P. 1
Master Cam Design Help Topics

Master Cam Design Help Topics

|Views: 98|Likes:
Publicado pormsviperms

More info:

Published by: msviperms on Jun 23, 2011
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

07/22/2012

pdf

text

original

Sections

  • Entering Points
  • Modify functions
  • Offsetting surfaces
  • Trimming surfaces to a plane
  • Trimming surfaces to surfaces
  • Creating a trimmed surface within a flat boundary
  • Translating entities
  • Drafting menu options
  • Creating dimensions in SmartMode (Drafting menu)
  • Modifying Solids
  • Creating cuts on a solids

MASTER CAM DESIGN

ENTERING DATA
When Mastercam prompts for data entry such as a value for height, width, radius, or angle, you can take one of the following actions. These actions apply to both the prompt area and dialog box fields. ¨ ¨ ¨ Notes: ¨ Mastercam remembers the previous XYZ coordinates that you entered. To use these values again, press [Enter] instead of entering a value for each of the coordinates. ¨ Mastercam accepts formulas as well as numbers. You can use addition [+], subtraction [-], multiplication [*], division [/], and parentheses [( )]. Use ordinary algebraic notation [i.e., x1+2/3y(16*.025)/8z-1/2]. ¨ Wherever Mastercam accepts real numbers and formulas, you can enter an angle value in degrees/minutes/seconds or gradians/radians formats. Use the following data entry tokens, always placing the token after the numeral: degrees=d minutes = ‘ seconds = " gradians = g radians = r ¨ When prompted for a real value (a length, a distance, or an angle) at the prompt line, you can use the up and down arrow keys to display previously entered values. Press either mouse button or press [Enter] to accept the displayed value. Type the data directly into the text box, then press [Enter]. Type the letter of a shortcut method, then press [Enter].

Data entry shortcuts
Data entry shortcuts let you enter data that you gather from the graphics area into the prompt area or any text box that asks for a real (or decimal) number. To use a data entry shortcut, enter the letter of the shortcut method, then click the point that you want in the graphics window. The shortcuts appear next to the prompt area as shown below. Clicking right in a text box displays a quick reference of the shortcuts and their meanings.

X X coordinate value for a selected point. Press [X] then choose the point whose X coordinate you want to use. 1

Y Y coordinate value for a selected point. Press [Y] then choose the point whose Y coordinate you want to use. Z Z coordinate value for a selected point. Press [Z] then choose the point whose Z coordinate you want to use. R Radius of a selected arc. Press [R] then select the arc whose radius you want to use, or select a radius dimension. D Diameter of a selected arc. Press [D] then select the arc whose diameter you want to use, or select a diameter dimension. L Length of a line, arc, or spline. Press [L] then select the entity whose length you want to use. Other methods for entering a length: select a linear format dimension, a witness line, or the distance between two witness lines; select text to enter text height as a length measurement. S Distance between two points. Press [S] then select the two points. A Angle. Displays the Angle menu which provides options for defining an angle value. ? Displays the quick reference to the data entry shortcuts. In a text box that accepts a real (decimal) number, right-click to display the quick reference. Defining angle values for data entry 1 Line Uses the angle of a single line that you select. Mastercam calculates the angle in a counterclockwise direction from the horizontal line of the current Cplane. 1 line also lets you select an angular dimension to obtain an angle value. 2 Lines Uses the angle formed by two lines that you select. Mastercam calculates the angle in a counterclockwise direction from the first selected line to the second selected line. P ts ( 2 or 3 ) Enter two or three points to determine an angle. Enter two points, then press [Esc] to calculate the angle of the line that runs between the two points in a counterclockwise direction from the horizontal axis of the current Cplane. When entering three points, the first point becomes the pivot point (equivalent to an arc center), and the next two points define an angular distance. Arc sweep An arc sweep is the distance in degrees from the start angle to its end angle. The system prompts you to select the arc whose sweep angle you want to use. Value Lets you type a value for an angle. Values are in decimal degrees by default, but can be entered in degree/minute/seconds format or gradians/radians format. Use the following data entry tokens, always placing the token after the numeral: degrees=d minutes = ‘ seconds = " gradians = g radians = r Examples: 25d11’5" 25g 200r

2

POINT ENTRY Entering Points
Throughout your work in Mastercam the system prompts you to enter points. By entering points you define positions in 3D space. You can enter points using one of two methods: Mastercam's AutoCursor™ feature or the Point Entry menu. When you enter a point, Mastercam projects the selected position onto the current construction plane. If the current Cplane is set to 3D, Mastercam uses the actual position of the selected point. About Auto Cursor The AutoCursor™ is a point entry feature that is available whenever Mastercam displays the Point Entry menu and prompts you to enter a point. AutoCursor eliminates menu steps by detecting and snapping to points as you move the cursor over geometry on the screen. Endpoints and midpoints of curves, lines, arc center points, and point entities are all detected and highlighted by AutoCursor. If AutoCursor doesn’t detect any points, the AutoCursor defaults to the Sketch Point Entry menu option, letting you enter a point at any position. At any time while AutoCursor is active, you can override the auto-selected point by using the mouse or keyboard shortcut keys to access Point Entry menu options. In complex geometry there may be more than one point that lies within the detection range of the cursor. In these cases, the AutoCursor uses the order shown below to detect and snap to points. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Point entities Endpoints of curves or lines Midpoints of curves or lines Quadrant points of arcs Centers of arcs Real curve or line intersections (not intersections projected by Mastercam) Points on the active selection grid

Note: AutoCursor does not recognize endpoints on surfaces. To enter a point at the endpoint of a surface, you must use the Endpoints option on the Point Entry menu. AutoCursor is active by default. To disable AutoCursor, choose Main Menu, Screen, Config, select the Screen tab, and clear the Use AutoCursor in Point Selection checkbox. Turning AutoCursor on or off 1. 2. 3. Right-click in the graphics window to display the menu. Choose AutoCursor. A check appears next to the AutoCursor menu selection when it is on. Right click and choose AutoCursor to turn it off. 3

Note: You can also choose Screen, Next menu, and toggle AutoCursor to Y. Entering a point using AutoCursor 1. Activate AutoCursor from the right-click menu.

2. Move the cursor over geometry on the screen. As Mastercam detects and snaps to points, it displays a temporary open-square over the point and highlights the corresponding Point Entry menu option. 3. When the cursor snaps to the point you want, left-click to enter the point.

Entering a point using XYZ coordinates You can enter a point using XYZ coordinates as an alternative to selecting a point with the cursor or using AutoCursor™. Mastercam accepts coordinates that use commas as separators (5,3,1) or that use the letter of the coordinate (x5y3z1). If you enter values for just one or two coordinates (x1 or x1y2), Mastercam uses the coordinate values of the last point you entered for any axes you omitted. If you are entering a point for the first time in the current Mastercam session, the system uses zero as the default value for any coordinates that you do not enter. 1. Once in the Point Entry menu, type the coordinate in either format described above. As soon as you begin typing, the prompt area opens a data entry field. 2. Press [Enter] to enter a point at the coordinate

Entering a point at the system origin Choosing Origin from the Point Entry menu places a point at the system origin. Mastercam places a point or sets a point position at the construction origin. System origin In the Cartesian coordinate system, the intersection of the X, Y, and Z axes (0,0,0) is known as the system origin. Often the system origin corresponds with the lower left corner of the part or the stock to be machined. The origin may also correspond with the 0,0,0 position on the milling machine, which is a known reference point for all machine moves. The system origin is fixed and cannot be changed. In Mastercam, the graphics view axes markers (also called the viewport axes markers) always refer to the system coordinates, which use 0,0,0 as the origin. The system coordinates are also referred to as world coordinates. You can view the system origin on screen by pressing [F9]. The system origin is shown in brown (default color). Construction origin The current Cplane has an origin, called the construction origin. In a new MC9 file, both the system and construction origins are set to 0,0,0. You set a new construction origin by pressing [Alt+ O] when in the Cplane menu and entering a coordinate or selecting a point in the graphics window. The construction origin remains set at the point that you choose until you change it, even when you change the Cplane (with one exception – when you retrieve a named view as described below). You can view the construction origin on screen by pressing [F9]. The construction origin is shown in green (default color).

4

An advantage of the construction origin is that it simplifies creating or translating geometry. Setting a construction origin relative to the current Cplane lets you think about XYZ coordinates with respect to the current Cplane only, not the system origin. This benefit becomes apparent when working on a large part where the system origin may not be visible in the graphics window. You can set the construction origin to be located near the area on the part where you are working and avoid the complication of calculating coordinates in reference to an origin that may not be on screen. You can save user-defined Cplanes as named views. An advantage of using named views is that you can associate an origin to a plane. When you change the Cplane to a named view, the construction origin changes to the origin linked to the view. For more information, see Creating a named view. Note: You can set the colors of the system and construction origins on the Screen tab of the System Configuration dialog box (Screen, Config, Screen tab, System colors). Entering a point at the center of an arc 1. 2. Choose Center from the Point Entry menu. Select an arc. Mastercam highlights the point at center of the arc.

Entering a point at the endpoint of an entity 1. 2. Notes: ¨ When selecting a surface entity, Mastercam enters a point at the closest corner. Choose Endpoint from the Point Entry menu. Select an entity. Mastercam highlights the entity’s endpoint.

¨ When selecting a trimmed surface, Mastercam calculates the surface edges of the base surface, not the trimmed surface. Therefore, the point may be created outside of the trimmed surface. Entering a point at the intersection of two curves The Intersec option lets you enter a point at the intersection of two curves (lines, arcs, or splines) in the current construction plane. Since two curves may intersect at multiple positions, be sure to select each curve near the intersection where you want to enter a point. When lines or arcs do not intersect, Mastercam calculates an extension to one or both entities and places a point where the entities could intersect. However, Mastercam cannot calculate a predictable extension to a spline. Intersec only works with a spline that could be intersected by a line or arc. 1. Choose Intersec from the Point Entry menu.

2. Choose the first curve, then choose a second curve that intersects the first. Mastercam highlights the intersection point. Entering a point at the midpoint of a curve This option lets you enter a point at the midpoint of a curve (line, arc, or spline). A midpoint is the point calculated halfway along the length of a curve.

5

90. 2. Setting up a grid for point entry The selection grid is a matrix of reference points that the cursor snaps to when you sketch a point. Select a point. 6 . Choose Relative from the Point Entry menu. To enter a distance using XYZ coordinates. then press the left mouse button. Entering a point relative to the position of another point The Relative option lets you choose a point based on another point’s position. The point is entered at the location where the cursor projects onto the Cplane. using the cursor to pick a position in the graphics window. Choose Sketch from the Point Entry menu. Select a line. or spline. Choose Midpoint from the Point Entry menu. 2. 2. Entering a point at the last entered position From the Point Entry menu. Type a value for angle.1. choose Rectang from the menu. then left-click to highlight the point at that position. Enter a point. Mastercam highlights the point previously entered. Entering a point at the position of an existing point 1. Type a value for distance (vector length) and press [Enter]. Snapping to the selection grid provides a finer level of precision than sketching points freehand. Move the cursor to a location on the screen where you want to enter a point. 1. Mastercam highlights the closest quadrant point. Mastercam highlights the midpoint of the selected curve. choose Last. You can use the selection gridto enter points more precisely. Mastercam highlights the selected point. then press [Enter] to define the point. Sketching a point at any position The Sketch option lets you enter a point freehand. 2. The Point Entry: Relative menu displays. then press [Enter] to define the point. 3. Entering a point at a quadrant position on an arc 1. Move the cursor close to the 0. Choose Point from the Point Entry menu. 180. 2. To enter a distance using polar coordinates. 1. choose Polar. Type the coordinate in the prompt area. arc. Choose Quadrant from the Point Entry menu. or 270 degree quadrant point of the arc.

Screen. 3. and choose the selection grid button from the Screen tab. Notes: ¨ The grid settings persist for the current MC9 file. 6. Sel. 7 . 1. The auto-highlight feature can be turned on and off in the Screen tab of the System Configuration dialog or in the right-click menu. Grid. Sel. Check Active grid to turn on the selection grid. Choose Test to view the grid settings before saving them. 4. Enter a color number or choose the Color button to select the color for the grid points and origin marker. The selection methods available vary according to the function that you are using. When working with complex geometry. Enter values (inches or millimeters) in the Spacing X and Y fields for the distance between the grid points. Choose Main Menu. Note: Be sure to check both Active grid and Visible grid to view the activated grid. 9. 8. choose Screen. deactivating. Check Visible grid to make the selection grid visible. These values define the length and width of the grid cells. 2. To save the grid settings in the configuration file. When you have the option to select more than one entity. Next menu. Configure. the Selection Grid Parameters dialog box opens to give you options for activating. The system highlights selected entities in white. 5. grid. The Selection Grid dialog box opens. Next menu. Follow the procedure above to set up a default selection grid. 7. When the cursor is very close to an entity. Choose OK to save the settings. Enter an Origin XY coordinate for center of the grid or choose Select and choose a point from the graphics window. or customizing the appearance of the selection grid. Mastercam displays the Entity Selection menu which provides several selection methods. the entity highlights showing you what would be selected if you clicked at that position on the screen. Entity Selection Throughout your work in Mastercam the system prompts you to select entities. Press [Esc] to return to the Selection Grid dialog box. Enter a value (inches or millimetres) for Size to set the overall length and width of the grid (it can extend beyond the screen boundaries). the options in the Entity selection menu make selection easier and quicker than picking one entity at a time. The highlight color can be changed in the Screen tab of the System Configuration dialog box.When you press [Alt+G] or choose Screen. The simplest way to select entities is to click the mouse in the graphics window when the Entity Selection menu displays.

surface. Chaining identifies the geometry that makes up the surface sections or boundaries. press [Esc] to return to the Entity Selection menu. Chaining is also used to define entities for several Analyze and Create functions and is an efficient method for entity selection even when a specific order is not required. when creating a contour toolpath. Chaining differs from other selection methods because it associates order and direction to the selected curves. However. Chaining also determines the direction of tool travel during machining. release the mouse buttons. Configure). To select all entities for a single operation. Choose Unselect from the Entity Selection menu. and toolpaths. About chains Chaining activates entities in a specific order in preparation for a function such as toolpath or surface creation. arcs. Entities from the Entity Selection menu. 2. you can also chain together separate sets of entities to be cut in a single operation. Many surface and solid creation methods require geometry to be chained. and splines) or points which have adjoining endpoints. ¨ ¨ To quickly simplify a crowded screen and narrow your selection of entities.Selection Tips The following tips can aid your selection of entities as you work in Mastercam: ¨ Rapid-fire selection: To select single entities quickly. You can change the select color using the System Colors button in the Screen tab of the System Configuration dialog box (Screen. Usually you chain the geometry that is used in a single operation. hold down both mouse buttons and move the cursor over geometry that you want to select. When finished. Most toolpaths require geometry to be chained. choose All. 8 . use the Hide function. or solid. Unchained entities won’t be included in the toolpath. Unselecting entities 1. When you finish selecting entities. 3. Click on highlighted entities to unselect them. use the Mask function and choose Attributes from the Selection Mask dialog box. solids. Mastercam highlights chains in the same color as selected entities. ¨ To narrow the selection of entities to only one level of geometry at a time. you select one or more sets of curves (lines. you chain the entities that form the shape that you want to be machined. When you chain geometry. For example you can chain together the entities for separate parts to be cut from the same workpiece in the same operation. Chaining Chaining is the process of selecting and linking pieces of geometry so that they form the foundation of a toolpath. For example. such as a contour toolpath or pocket toolpath. Chaining order and direction affect the way Mastercam generates surfaces.

In an open chain the start and endpoints are different coordinates. The chaining direction determines the direction of tool movement in a toolpath. Chaining direction All chains have a direction. Examples of open chains are single lines or arcs. while the direction for open chains points toward one of the chain endpoints. Examples of closed chains are rectangles or circles. In a closed chain the start and endpoints share the same coordinates. regular surface. Closed chains typically consist of several entities that have adjacent endpoints and that form a closed boundary. Mastercam uses chaining direction to synchronize the chains to create a smooth. In surface creation.Chains also have these characteristics: Type (open or closed) Direction Order Branch points Chains are open or closed. An open chain may consist of a single entity or several contiguous entities. The arrow in the following graphic shows the counterclockwise chaining direction for a closed chain. Direction for closed chains is either clockwise or counterclockwise. Errors in establishing chaining direction often result in a twisted surface that can’t be machined. The chain starts at the base point of the arrow. 9 .

Mastercam assigns chain direction based on the Direction for Closed Chains parameters in the Chaining Options dialog box. In an open chain. the inside chains represent an opening which is cut out. Reversing chaining direction for inner chains Use this chaining option to swap the chaining direction when chains are surrounded by an outer boundary. leaving the inside chain as scrap. For more control over the direction of closed chains. When enabled. 10 . Closed chains are assigned either a clockwise or counterclockwise direction regardless of where you position the cursor when selecting the chain. This chaining option is useful for geometry that consists of inside and outside shapes and provides an automated method of reversing the cutter offset from the inside shape to the outside shape. this option sets chaining direction relative to the position of the cursor when you select an entity to be chained. In a closed chain. the cutter needs to be offset to the inside of the chain while the surrounding chain requires the cutter to be offset to the outside of the chain.Mastercam determines chaining direction differently for open chains than closed chains. In the graphic below. Therefore. check the box labeled Use cursor position for manual selection. the start point is placed at the end of the chain closest to the selection point and the chain direction points to the opposite end of the chain.

Mastercam only considers a position a branch point when multiple entity endpoints meet. requires separate curves to define along and across edges. and swept surfaces. for instance. If you need to create a branch point at the intersection of two entities. order is important to ensure minimal rapid moves. Branch points A branch point is the position where the endpoints of two or more entities meet. The Chain Manager in the Operations Manager can then be used to re-order the chains. Trim or Modify. 11 . The values you select in the Chaining options dialog box will be in effect whenever you create a chain in the current file. Use either the Modify.Chaining order Some Mastercam functions that require chaining produce unexpected results if the entities are chained in an order that prevents Mastercam from properly synchronizing the chains. To reach the Chaining options dialog box. select the Options command in several of the chaining menus. The topics below describe the individual options. coons. Entities can intersect without having their endpoints meet. ruled. A coons surface chaining. In these cases. Examples of these functions are loft. You can set the synchronization method in the Chaining Options dialog box. Branch points indicate where there are different paths that the chain can take. Mastercam also uses branch points as a method for synchronizing chains. When chaining for toolpaths. When Mastercam encounters a branch point during chaining. You can check rapid moves with the Backplot function which represents rapid moves in yellow. it prompts you to choose the path for the chain to follow. Examples of these functions include the Xform commands Rotate and Mirror. and the Delete command. Other functions that use chaining don’t require that the entities get chained in any particular order. you need to break both entities at their intersection point. You can see the current values in the prompt area whenever a chaining menu appears. Break command to divide the intersecting entities at a specific point. chaining is a selection method and order is irrelevant. Chaining options Use the Chaining options dialog box to set default values for a number of choices that affect how you work with chains.

¨ To reselect the previous chained entities. 2. Click on the topics below for more information. Select a line. Configure function. Create. Creating points at fixed intervals along a curve 1. or spline. for example when correcting a surface that didn’t generate properly. arc. Many of these values can be set during operation. use Analyze. 2. use Last from the Chaining Methods menu. Configure). Creating entities The Create menu gives you options for creating geometric and drafting entities. You can access the Create menu by choosing Create from the Main Menu. Point. Chaining tips ¨ Mastercam supports Auto-Partial chaining. Chain to check for overlapping entities.You can also set a number of system chaining defaults that will apply to all files. In the prompt area. Repeat step 2 to create additional points. see Setting default CAD values. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 3. Mastercam rechains the entities so that you can edit the chains and correct chaining direction or order. ¨ If the chain stops unexpectedly. enter the number of points to create along the entity. Creating points The Point menu gives you options for creating point entities. Create. however. Along ent. Point. You can then use Modify functions to trim adjacent entities together in order to chain them. 12 . These are set by way of the Chaining options button on the Screen tab of the System Configuration dialog box (Screen. Position. Point. some are unique and can only be set prior to operation using the Screen. 4. Create. Creating a point at any position in the graphics window 1. Choose Main Menu. Choose Main Menu. Last prevents you from having to completely rechain the entities. 3. Enter a point to create a point at that position. You can access the Point menu by choosing Main Menu. The functions on the Create menu can be divided into three categories: Note: For information on setting default design and drafting values. This eliminates the need to repeatedly choose Partial from the Chaining Methods menu when partial chaining.

0 mm for metric units. 4. Point. Create. 3. Create. Choose Main Menu. then select a solid face. 3. 2.1 inches for English units and 2. 2. 2. Select a NURBS spline. 13 . type [S] to activate snapping. arc. then left-click to create a point at that position. Select a line. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the selected face. Choose Solid face. Cpts NURBS. Note: To create the point at the position of an existing point entity. Dynamic. Choose Main Menu. 3. Repeat step 2 to create points for additional NURBS splines. Press [Esc] to exit the function. or surface. Point. Create. Create. Point. 2. Creating points at the node points of a parametric spline 1. Choose Main Menu. Press [Esc] and repeat steps 2 and 3 to create points on a different entity. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create points along additional entities. 3.Note: The default value is an approximation based on the entity length divided by . spline. 5. then left-click. Choose Main Menu. 4. or press [Esc] twice to exit the function. Dynamic. Press [Esc] to exit the function. move the cursor crosshairs over the point. 5. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the selected entity. 4. Creating a point at any position on a curve or surface 1. Move the base of the arrow to a desired position. Creating points at the control points of a NURBS spline 1. Point. Select a parametric spline. 4. Node pts. Creating a point at any position on a solid face 1. Set Faces to Y. Repeat step 3 to create additional points on the same entity. Repeat step 2 to create points for additional parametric splines. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

and to trim the curves to the resulting points. Press [Esc] and repeat steps 2 through 4 to create points on a different face. Creating points at the intersections of a slice plane with curves This function slices selected curves with a plane and creates points at positions where the plane intersects the curves. Note: Mastercam will create the point at a defined distance from the endpoint closest to the cursor position when you select the entity. You also have options to create the points at offset positions. Length. Point. Select one or more lines. Note: To create the point at the position of an existing point entity. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to create additional points. move the base of the display arrow to the side of the curves to keep after trimming. 4. 3. and/or splines. Repeat step 3 to create additional points at different distances. Choose Main Menu. Set parameters on the Slice menu. then choose Done. move the cursor crosshairs over the point. 7. 6. 6. then choose Do it. or spline close to one endpoint. 14 . enter the distance to create the point from the selected endpoint. then left-click. select one of the highlighted entities. arcs.4. 2. 5. Define the slice plane. Mastercam displays a temporary indicator of the plane in the graphics window. Create. 1. 3. Note: Entering the same value twice in a row exits you from the function. Create. 4. then left-click to create a point at that position. If prompted. or press [Esc] twice to exit the function. In the prompt area. Press [Esc] to exit the function. to create points at a defined spacing interval from the intersections. Choose Main Menu. type [S] to activate snapping. Select a line. 5. Repeat step 4 to create additional points on the same face. Slice. Creating a point at a defined distance along a curve 1. 2. Press [Esc] to exit the function. then left-click. Move the base of the arrow to a desired position. Point. 5. arc.

then choose Do it. choose Yes to select existing point entities or No to enter points at any position in the graphics window. then choose Save and continue with the remaining steps. Enter a point on or near the selected curve where you want the perpendicular distance to be calculated. Press [Enter] to continue. solids.Projecting points onto surfaces and solids You can use this function to create points at the projection positions. arc. continue with step 10. Press [Esc] to exit the function. then press [Esc]. Select the line on the side of the curve where you want to create the point. In the prompt area. choose Append to add the current data to the end of the existing file or Overwrite to replace the existing data with the current data. enter a file name. At the prompt. 7. 2. then press [Enter] to view the file. 4. Otherwise. 4. or spline in the graphics window. Srf project. and/or save the projection data to a file. Mastercam reports the number of points that were successfully projected. If prompted. 5. select one or more points. Creating a point at a perpendicular distance from a curve 1. enter a value for the distance from the curve that you want the point to be created. Select one or more surfaces. 6. 1. 15 . Select a line. and/or solid faces. Close the file. enter one or more points. Type a comment to display at the top of the file (optional). 10. Set parameters on the Projection menu. Choose Main Menu. If prompted that a file of the same name already exists. Create. 3. Choose Main Menu. 5. Note: Entering a zero value creates the point directly on the curve. Repeat steps 5 through 10 to project additional points. then choose Done. If No was selected in step 3. If you entered a value greater than zero in step 4. Mastercam displays a temporary line on both sides of the curve. create lines along the projection paths. If Yes was selected in step 3. Point. In the prompt area. Create. 8. 11. 3. 2. Perp/dist. 9. Point. then press Done. 12.

This is useful for determining the boundaries of an individual curve in a chain of curves. Next menu. Select one or more arcs in the graphics window. 2.Creating points in a grid pattern 1. Choose Main Menu. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional bolt circles. ¨ Choose Save dups to change the setting as follows: Set to Y to create all displayed points. then choose Do it. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional grids. even if duplicate points result. Displaying and saving entity endpoints Choosing the Endpoints option on the Screen menu lets you view and create point entities at the endpoints of all visible lines. 3. 4. 2. Enter a point to position the lower left corner of the grid. Note: Save Dups has no effect if you discard the points (see step 3). Create. Small arcs. 4. then choose Do it. Repeat step 3 to create additional points. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Set parameters on the Grid menu. 5. 3. or press [Esc] to exit the function. Point. Point. then choose Done. Endpoints. Choose Main Menu. arcs. ¨ Set to N to create a single point at each endpoint position and discard any duplicate points that occupy the same position in the graphics window. 5. or choose No to discard them. 2. 4. Choose Yes to create and save the actual points. Choose Main Menu. Create. Creating points in a bolt circle pattern 1. Next menu. Enter a point to position the center of the bolt circle. 2. Creating points at the center of selected arcs 1. Set parameters on the Bolt Circle menu. Choose Main Menu. Screen. Bolt circle. 1. Next menu. and splines. Mastercam displays the points for you to view and prompts you to save them. Press [Esc] to exit the function. then choose Do it. Set parameters on the From Small Arcs/Circles menu. 3. 16 . Grid. Create. Point. 3.

Line. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional horizontal lines. You can access the Line menu by choosing Main Menu. 2. Choose Main Menu. Create. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional vertical lines. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 2. Endpoints. Line. enter a value to position the line on the vertical axis. Choose Main Menu. Create. 2. Note: This point becomes the first endpoint of the next line that you create. Enter two points for the endpoints of the line. 4. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Create.Creating lines The Line menu gives you options for creating line entities. In the prompt area. Creating a vertical line 1. Choose Main Menu. Click on the topics below for more information. Creating a horizontal line 1. Multi. Enter two points for the endpoints of the line. Creating a line between any two points 1. Repeat step 2 to create additional lines. Line. enter a value to position the line on the horizontal axis. Choose Main Menu. 4. Line. Horizontal. Creating multiple lines connected at their endpoints 1. Enter a point for the second endpoint of the line. Enter two points for the endpoints of the line. 2. 3. 3. 5. 4. Line. Create. 4. In the prompt area. Create. 3. Enter a point for the first endpoint of the first line. 3. Vertical. 5. 17 . Repeat step 3 to create additional lines.

3. 3. Creating polar lines 1. Select the line to keep. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create additional lines. Creating a line tangent to two arcs 1. Select an arc or spline. Choose Main Menu. Press [Esc] to exit the function. enter the angle of the line. 6. In the prompt area. Line. 5. 6. You can access the Tangent Line menu by choosing Main Menu. Note: The line may be created on an extended portion of the selected entity. In the prompt area. Note: Select the entity close to where you want to create the tangent line because multiple solutions may be possible. 5. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Create. Create. 4. Creating tangent lines The Tangent Line menu gives you options for creating lines that are tangent to arcs and splines. enter the angle of the line. Select two arcs. Line. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Click on the topics below for more information. Enter a point for the first endpoint of the line. Tangent. Choose Main Menu. Enter the length of the line. Tangent. Polar. Choose Main Menu. 2. 4. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional tangent lines. 18 .5. 7. Note: Select both entities close to where you want to create the tangent line because multiple solutions may be possible. Enter the length of the line. 2 arcs. Create. Angle. Line. 2. Create. Tangent. 2. Line. Creating a line tangent to an arc or spline at a defined angle 1.

You can access the Perpendicular menu by choosing Main Menu. Line. enter the length of the line. Create. 2. 19 . 3. 3. Note: The line may be created on an extended portion of the selected entity. If prompted. Choose Main Menu. Creating a line perpendicular to a curve through a point 1. Repeat step 2 to create additional tangent lines. Note: Enter the point close to where you want to create the tangent line because multiple solutions may be possible. In the prompt area. Press [Esc] to exit the function. select the line to keep. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create additional perpendicular lines. 4. Choose Main Menu. Creating perpendicular lines The Perpendicular menu gives you options for creating lines that are perpendicular to curves.3. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 6. Point. Enter a point for the perpendicular line to pass through. 2. 7. or spline. In the prompt area. Create. arc. 4. Tangent. Click on the topics below for more information. Creating a line tangent to an arc or spline through a point 1. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 6. Perpendclr. 4. 5. 5. Line. Select a line. Point. Note: The line may be created on an extended portion of the selected entity. Select an arc or spline. Create. Perpendclr. enter the length of the line. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional tangent lines. Line. Enter a point for the tangent line to pass through.

Create. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create additional parallel lines. 20 . enter the offset distance. Choose Main Menu. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 2. Note: The parallel line is the same length as the reference line selected in step 2. 7. In the prompt area. Click on the topics below for more information. Line. 5. Point. Parallel. You can access the Parallel menu by choosing Main Menu. 6. 4. 2. 6. Create. Select a line for the new line to be perpendicular to. enter the length of the line. Repeat step 3 to create additional parallel lines. Perpendclr. Creating a parallel line using an offset distance and direction 1. 3. 3. Note: The line may be created on an extended portion of the selected entity. Create. Line. Choose Main Menu. Choose Main Menu. Mastercam creates each parallel line by offsetting an existing line by a defined distance or through a point. Parallel. Parallel. Select a line. 5. Creating a parallel line through a point 1. Create. Select a line. 3. Creating parallel lines The Parallel menu gives you options for creating parallel lines.Creating a line perpendicular to a line and tangent to an arc 1. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Line. 4. Line. Side/dist. In the prompt area. 4. Indicate the offset direction by left-clicking on one side or the other of the selected line. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 5. 2. Select an arc for the perpendicular line to be tangent to. Select the line to keep. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional perpendicular lines. Enter a point for the parallel line to pass through. Note: The parallel line is the same length as the reference line selected in step 2. Arc.

Enter a value for Offset distance and Number of steps. ¨ Offsetting an arc or circle creates a larger or smaller arc or circle.Creating a parallel line tangent to an arc 1. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Select a line. arc. Arc. 6. Select an arc for the parallel line to be tangent to. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create additional parallel lines. Mastercam offsets the curve. Mastercam moves the entity in the opposite direction from the one you indicate. Parallel. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to offset additional curves or press [Esc] to exit the function. Choose Main Menu. 5. Xform. Create. Select the line to keep. On the Offset dialog box. Choose Main Menu. 3. Offset. select the type of operation to perform: Move or Copy. The parallel line is the same length as the reference line selected in step 2. 2. Note: If you entered a negative offset distance on the Offset dialog box. Select a line. 21 . or spline in the graphics window. Notes: ¨ Offsetting a spline by a distance greater than the radius of the smallest curve in the spline may cause the spline to self-intersect. 5. 4. 4. Notes: ¨ ¨ The line may be created on an extended portion of the selected entity. Offsetting inside the perimeter creates a smaller circle. then choose OK to close the dialog box. Offsetting outside the perimeter creates a larger circle. Click on one side or the other of the selected entity to indicate the offset direction. it displaces it by a defined distance and direction. 3. depending on the offset direction. Offsetting a single curve When Mastercam offsets a single curve. 6. 2. Line. 1. The direction is perpendicular to the curve at every point along the curve relative to the current construction plane.

Click on the topics below for more information. 1. 4. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 5. If prompted. Parallel function gives you several options for offsetting single lines. Choose Main Menu. 3. 3. Creating polar arcs The Polar Arc menu gives you options for creating arcs using polar coordinates. Select a point. Arc. arc. which begins midway between the start of the first selected line and the closest endpoint of the second selected line. see Creating parallel lines. Mastercam creates a midline. For more information. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create additional bisecting lines or midlines. 2. Arc. press [Alt+F1] to fit the geometry to the screen. 2. Polar. Create. 4. enter the length of the line. 1. Mastercam displays the length of the resulting entity in the prompt area. Line. 5. Creating a line at the closest position between two curves or a curve and a point Note: For intersecting lines. You can access the Polar Arc menu by choosing Main Menu. Create. Note: If the intersection point is out of view. select the bisecting line to keep. 6. Mastercam creates a point. Bisect. Mastercam calculates arcs in a counterclockwise direction. For parallel lines. Create. Choose Main Menu. or spline. In the prompt area. line. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Create. Click on the topics below for more information. Select a line. Mastercam creates a bisecting line.¨ The Create. Line. Creating a bisecting line or a midline Note: For intersecting lines. You can access the Arc menu by choosing Main Menu. Select two lines. Line. 22 . CREATING ARCS The Arc menu gives you options for creating arc entities (including circles). Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional lines. arc. Closest. or spline.

Enter the initial angle of the arc in degrees. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional arcs. In the prompt area. Enter a point for the end angle of the arc. 5. Create. 23 . Create. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional arcs. 3. 7.Creating a polar arc with a defined center point and start/end angles Note: You can create a full circle by entering 0 for the initial angle and 360 for the final angle. 6. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Enter the start angle of the arc in degrees. 6. Choose Main Menu. Enter a point for the center of the arc. Arc. Polar. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 3. 3. Creating a polar arc with a defined center point and by sketching the start/end angles 1. enter the radius of the arc. 7. 4. Creating a polar arc with a defined starting point 1. Start pt. enter the radius of the arc. Polar. Enter the end angle of the arc in degrees. Note: You can create a full circle by entering 0 for the initial angle and 360 for the final angle. 4. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Create. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional arcs. Choose Main Menu. 1. Center pt. Arc. 4. Enter a point for the center of the arc. Enter a point for the start angle of the arc. In the prompt area. Choose Main Menu. Sketch. 5. 5. 2. Enter the final angle of the arc in degrees. Polar. Enter a point for the starting point of the arc. Arc. enter the radius of the arc. 2. 7. Note: You can create a full circle by entering the same point for the initial and final angles. 2. In the prompt area. 6.

4. 2. 3. Repeat step 2 to create additional arcs. 6. Choose Main Menu. 6. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create additional arcs. Arc. Enter the end angle of the arc in degrees. Arc. Create. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Enter two points for the endpoints of the arc. Enter three unique points. 3. Note: You can create a full circle by entering 0 for the initial angle and 360 for the final angle. In the prompt area. 24 . 2. Creating an arc with three defined edge points 1. 7. Note: No more than two of the points that you enter in step 2 can be collinear. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Enter the start angle of the arc in degrees. Choose Main Menu. 3 points. Polar. Enter a point for the ending point of the arc. Creating an arc with a defined radius and endpoints 1. 5. Arc. enter the radius of the arc. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional arcs. 4. 2.Creating a polar arc with a defined ending point 1. Create. 4. Note: The radius that you enter in step 3 must be greater than or equal to half the distance between the two points that you enter. Select the arc to keep. enter the radius of the arc. End pt. Choose Main Menu. 5. In the prompt area. 3. Endpoints. Create.

Click on the topics below for more information. You can access the Tangent Arc menu by choosing Main Menu. 6. The arc may be created on an extended portion of the selected entities. arcs. Creating an arc tangent to one arc or line 1. Select two lines. 3. the system projects the point along the normal vector of the selected entity. Enter a point for the arc to be tangent with the selected entity. Create. 2. Notes: ¨ The radius that you enter in step 2 must be greater than or equal to half the distance between the closest points on the two curves that you select in step 3. Select the arc to keep. 2. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 7. 5. 6. Arc. 3. Create. Press [Esc] to exit the function. enter the radius of the circle. Create. ¨ The arc may be created on an extended portion of the selected entity. 2 entities. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to create additional circles. 4. or splines. Arc. Creating a circle tangent to two curves 1. ¨ ¨ You cannot create the arc between two parallel lines. In the prompt area. In the prompt area. 4. Tangent. Select a line or arc. 5. 25 Choose Main Menu. Choose Main Menu. enter the radius of the arc. .Creating tangent arcs The Tangent Arc menu gives you options for creating arcs that are tangent to curves and points. Notes: ¨ If the point that you enter in step 3 does not lie on the selected line or arc. 1 entity. select the circle to keep. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional arcs. Arc. Tangent. Tangent. If prompted.

Press [Esc] to exit the function. 7. In the prompt area. this function always creates a full circle and does not give you the option to trim the selected entities Creating an arc tangent to three points. Tangent. Tangent.¨ While similar to filleting two curves. The arc may be created on an extended portion of the selected entities. Note: Choose Point entry to enter tangent points in the graphics window. Creating an arc tangent to a line or arc with a defined edge point 1. and/or arcs. 4. Select a line for the circle to be tangent to. Select three points. lines. press [Alt+F1] to fit the geometry to the screen. 5. Note: If the circles are out of view. 4. 2. 2. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional circles. 26 . Choose Main Menu. Center line. 3 ents/pts. Tangent. Arc. 6. Select a line to pass through the center of the circle. The circle may be created on an extended portion of the selected line. Select the circle to keep. Create. 3. Choose Main Menu. Choose Main Menu. Create. Notes: ¨ ¨ You cannot create a tangent arc between three parallel lines. enter the radius of the circle. and arcs 1. Arc. Arc. Repeat step 2 to create additional arcs. 3. Creating a circle tangent to a line using a defined center line 1. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Notes: ¨ ¨ The lines you select in steps 2 and 3 cannot be parallel to one another. Create. lines. Point.

Note: To set the tangent point to the position of an existing point. 4. 6. Tangent. or spline. Choose Main Menu. then left-click. Repeat step 2 to create additional circles. Select a line. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create additional arcs. Create. 2. In the prompt area. Select the arc to keep. 3. Create. Creating an arc tangent to a curve at any position This function creates an arc that is less than or equal to 180 degrees. to maintain 180 degrees or less. Notes: Select a line or arc for the arc to be tangent to. 3. Mastercam calculates 180 degrees between the points and fits a circle to them. Arc. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the selected entity. Enter a point for the second endpoint of the arc. if necessary. Arc. 7. 4. ¨ The radius that you enter in step 4 must be greater than or equal to half the distance between the entity selected in step 2 and the point entered in step 3 at the closest pass between them. 2. Choose Main Menu. Enter a point for the arc to pass through. Circ 2 pts. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional arcs. 5. 27 . 1. 3. Dynamic. type [S] to activate snapping. arc. enter the radius of the arc. 4. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Move the base of the arrow to a desired point. Creating a circle using two defined edge points 1.2. Mastercam adjusts the direction of the arc. Enter two points to lie on the edge of the circle. move the cursor crosshairs overt the point. 5. ¨ The arc may be created on an extended portion of the selected line. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 6. then left-click.

Arc. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Enter a point to lie on the edge of the circle.Creating a circle using three defined edge points 1. Enter a point for the center of the circle. Create. Repeat step 2 to create additional circles. 5. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional circles. 5. Choose Main Menu. which can be either a point or crosshair. In the prompt area. Circ pt+dia. Arc. 2. 3. 3. Circ pt+edg. 2. Choose Main Menu. Enter a point for the center of the circle. Create. enter the diameter of the circle. Choose Main Menu. Creating a circle with defined center and edge points 1. enter the radius of the circle. Arc. Creating a circle with a defined center point and diameter 1. 2. You can control 28 . Choose Main Menu. 3. Press [Esc] to exit the function. In the prompt area. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional circles. Create. Create. 4. Creating a circle with a defined center point and radius 1. Circ pt+rad. 2. 5. 3. is real geometry that can be selected and manipulated like any other geometry. Arc. Enter three points to lie on the edge of the circle. The mark. 4. 4. Circ 3 pts. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional circles. Automating and formatting arc center lines You can automatically mark the center of arcs as you create them. Enter a point for the center of the circle.

¨ ¨ Choose Fixed length and enter a line length in current units. do one of the following: ¨ Choose Percentage of diameter and enter a percent value. ¨ ¨ 8. The System Configuration dialog box opens. To use a color different from the current system color. To place the mark on a different level. To control crosshair line style. level. Screen. 2. 1. Choose OK to enact all settings from all tabs and close the dialog box. ¨ 9. 29 . you have the option to create a point at the center of the rectangular shape. 3. In addition.color. Configure. 6. The crosshair line length will be the percentage of the arc diameter you entered. the mark uses the current system color. Choose Main Menu. and line style. check Define in the Level group and either enter a level number or choose Select and select a level from the Levels dialog box. fillets at sharp corners on the rectangular shape. or Lines to mark the center with a crosshair. and Ellipse) that are composed of lines and/or arcs and are defined within a rectangular boundary. Choose Cancel to abandon all changes made to this as well as to other tabs and close the dialog Creating rectangular-shaped geometry The Rectangular Shape menu gives you options for creating rectangles and other geometric shapes (Obround. Unless you change the settings. Choose Center Lines (arcs) The Automatic Center Lines dialog box opens. Choose No to use the settings only for the current Mastercam session. and style and crosshair size. To control crosshair line length. check Define in the Color group and either enter a color number or choose the color button to select a color from the palette. Choose the CAD Settings tab. ¨ box. Double D. Single D. and/or a surface within the boundary of the rectangular shape. 5. Select Point to mark the arc center with a point. Do one of the following: Enter or choose other defaults. Choose Yes to update the current Configuration File. do one of the following: Check Current to use the current system line style. Check Define. level. 4. then either enter a line style number or choose Select and select a style. 7.

choose Main Menu. Enter two points for opposing corners of the rectangular shape. 9. 3. Create. 30 . If prompted. 8. Click on the menu and topics below for more information. Repeat steps 7 and 8 to create the shape in additional positions in the graphics window. Note: The angle increment is used to calculate the number of lines contained in the ellipse shape. Select a rectangular shape from the list. then choose OK. Repeat steps 6 and 7 to create the shape in additional positions in the graphics window. enter the angle increment. 3. 7. Creating rectangular-shaped geometry with one defined placement point 1. Enter a point to position the rectangular shape in the graphics window. 2. Choose 2 points. Set the remaining parameters. 6. 2. Creating rectangular-shaped geometry with two defined placement points 1. 10. If prompted. Select a rectangular shape from the list. Choose Main Menu. A smaller value results in a smoother shape. Choose Options. 5. Create. then choose OK. Rectangle. Rectangle. 8. 7. Choose 1 point. Set the remaining parameters. then choose OK. Create. A smaller value results in a smoother shape. 4. Choose Options. Set parameters on the Rectangle One Point dialog box. Note: The angle increment is used to calculate the number of lines contained in the ellipse shape. Choose Main Menu. Note: Be sure to select the square that represents the placement point to use on the rectangular shape.To access the Rectangular Shape menu. 6. 4. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Rectangle. 5. enter the angle increment.

2. ¨ box.9. Choose Rectangular Shapes. Check the options you want Mastercam to use by default. Note: For information on creating an ellipse that is composed of a single NURBS spline. Choose OK to register your choices. ¨ You can also access the System Configuration dialog box by pressing [Alt+F8]. Create. see Creating an ellipse. Choose the CAD Settings tab. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. Configure. 11. see Rectangle Options dialog box. Options from the Main Menu. Setting default rectangular shape options The CAD Settings tab of the System Configuration dialog box lets you set defaults for rectangle creation options. 8. The Rectangle Options dialog box opens. Do one of the following: Enter or choose other defaults. The System Configuration dialog box reopens. 31 . Set parameters as follows: Number of sides – Sets the number of sides for the polygon. Notes: ¨ You can change rectangular shape options by choosing Main Menu. 10. 1. ¨ Choose Main Menu. 9. Choose Cancel to abandon all changes made to this as well as to other tabs and close the dialog Creating a polygon You can create a polygon as a NURBS spline or as a collection of individual linked lines. For more information. Polygon. Next menu. The System Configuration dialog box opens. Create. Press [Esc] to exit the function. The Create Polygon dialog box displays. 13. Choose Yes to update the current Configuration File. Choose OK to enact all settings from all tabs and close the dialog box. Rectangle. Screen. 12. You must have a minimum of three. Choose No to use the settings only for the current Mastercam session.

¨ Measure radius to corner – Determines how Mastercam measures the radius of the polygon. 3. Press [Esc] to exit the function. this creates the polygon as multiple lines. 4. The Create Ellipse dialog box displays. Create. Set parameters as follows: X Axis Radius – Sets the radius of the ellipse’s horizontal axis Y Axis Radius – Sets the radius of the ellipse’s vertical axis Start Angle – Sets the angle that Mastercam begins creating the ellipse End Angle – Sets the angle that Mastercam finishes creating the ellipse 32 . The Measure Corner option determines how Mastercam measures the radius. Line.Sets the type of entity to create for the polygon. each representing a side of the polygon. Next menu. When left blank. Choose Main Menu. Choose OK. 2. Enter a point for the first endpoint of the first line. Repeat step 4 to create additional polygons using the current values. Create. this measures the radius from the center of the polygon to the corners. Press [Esc] to exit the function.¨ Radius – Sets the polygon’s radius. Ellipse. When left blank. 5. ¨ Create NURBS . which is the distance from the center of the polygon to the edge of the polygon. When checked. 5. 2. this measures the polygon from the center to the midpoint of the sides. 4. Creating an ellipse 1. 6. 3. When checked. ¨ Rotation – Sets the angle that Mastercam uses to position one of the sides of the polygon relative to the current construction plane. ¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. this creates the polygon as a single NURBS spline broken at the starting point. Multi. Note: This point becomes the first endpoint of the next line that you create. Enter a point for the second endpoint of the line. Creating multiple lines connected at their endpoints 1. Enter a point for the center of the polygon. Repeat step 3 to create additional lines.

Chamfer. The Chamfer dialog box displays. 5. Create. Distance 2 sets the distance from the endpoint of the second line you select to be chamfered (step 4). Choose Main Menu.¨ Rotation . Choose OK. ¨ For information on creating an ellipse shape using line segments. 5. the Parameters area displays only one Distance field. Chamfering lines 1. 2. Next menu. Repeat step 4 to create additional ellipses using the current values. 3. Select two non-parallel lines. 4. ¨ You can create a partial ellipse by entering a start angle greater than 0 degrees and/or an end angle less than 360 degrees. Notes: ¨ Mastercam creates each ellipse as a NURBS spline. ¨ 2 Distances – Allows you to set two separate distances. Enter the necessary distances and angle values and choose OK. Enter a point for the center of the ellipse. the Parameters area displays two fields: Distance. Repeat step 4 to create additional chamfers. When selected. which allows you to set an angle that determines the chamfer of the second line you select in step 4. and Angle. the Parameters area displays two distances: Distance 1 sets the distance from the endpoint of the first line you select to be chamfered (step 4). Press [Esc] to exit the function. 33 . 3. ¨ Dist/Angle – Allows you to set one distance and an angle. Select one of the following chamfer Methods: ¨ 1 Distance – Allows you to set the chamfer to equal distances from the endpoints of the two lines selected in step 4.Sets the angle used to rotate the long axis of the ellipse about its center point Note: The Create Ellipse dialog box includes a preview window that shows how the ellipse will look. which allows you to set the distance from the endpoint of the first line you select in step 4. When selected. see Creating rectangular-shaped geometry. You can press [Enter] after changing any of the parameters to see how the changes effect the ellipse. When selected. 4. 6.

Fillet. ¨ The Trim option is selected by default. You can access the Fillet menu by choosing Main Menu. Mastercam prompts you to chain entities when you return to the graphics window. you create an arc of a defined radius tangent to the curves. although you have the option to turn off trimming. Mastercam trims the curves to the fillet. You can chamfer arcs using the 1 Distance and 2 Distances methods. Deselect this option if you do not want Mastercam to trim the selected lines. When you fillet curves. Notes: ¨ Press [Esc] to exit the function. Create. 34 . Modify. Filleting curves he Fillet menu gives you options for filleting curves. Fillet or by choosing Main Menu.6. By default. Click on the menu and topics below for more information. which causes Mastercam to trim the selected lines to the chamfer. ¨ If you select the Chain selection option.

and N. or N to create fillets at negative.Radius – Determines the size of the resulting fillets. Chain . See Filleting corners along chains of curves for more information.Displays the Chaining Methods menu where you can select chains of curves to create fillets at sharp corners along the chains. Notes: ¨ This option applies only when Filleting corners along chains of curves. Angle Determines the sweep of the fillet arc. ¨ The ability to fillet only inside or outside corners of a chained boundary is particularly useful during geometry creation for wire EDM parts (punches and dies). or clockwise (CW) corners (relative to the chaining direction). and F. L (Larger) to create fillets that are larger than 180 degrees. L. or counterclockwise (CCW) corners (relative to the chaining direction). Choose A to create fillets along all corners. Choose S (Smaller) to create fillets that are smaller than 180 degrees. This option toggles between A. These parts often require different radius values on inside versus outside corners in order to provide adequate corner clearance. This option toggles between S. This option is a Yes/No toggle. 35 . P to create fillets at positive. CW /CWW – Determines which corners are used to create fillets along the chains of curves. Trim . P.Determines whether Mastercam trims the selected curves to the fillet. Choose Y to activate trimming or N to deactivate trimming. or F (Full) to create fillets that are full circles (360 degrees).

Repeat steps 2 through 6 to create additional fillets. 2. toggle Trim to Y or N. 1. Mastercam creates the fillets but does not trim the tangent curves. choose Radius. Note: When the Trim option is set to ‘Y’. 6. or F. To change the trimming mode (optional). 7. To change the sweep of the fillets (optional). toggle Angle<180 to S. Mastercam displays the Fillet menu and shows the default menu values in the prompt area. 2. or press [Esc] to exit the function. 36 . To change the trimming mode (optional). or splines. arcs. Select two lines. 3. and ‘F’ creates fillets that are full circles. then enter a value for radius in the prompt area. relative to the chaining direction. 4. ¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu.Filleting two curves 1. Create. Chain function lets you create fillets at sharp corners along selected chains of curves. To change the size of the fillets (optional). Choose Main Menu. and ‘F’ creates fillets that are full circles. choose Radius. When Trim is set to ‘N’. ‘L’ creates fillets larger than 180 degrees. You have the option to create fillets at all corners or at clockwise or counterclockwise corners. L. Note: Choosing ‘S’ creates fillets smaller than 180 degrees. Choose Main Menu. toggle Angle<180 to S. L. 4. Mastercam trims the tangent curves to the resulting fillets. Fillet. select the fillet to keep. Note: Choosing ‘S’ creates fillets smaller than 180 degrees. Notes: ¨ The radius you enter in step 2 must be greater than or equal to half the distance between the entities you select in step 5. Fillet. To change the sweep of the fillets (optional). To change the size of the fillets (optional). If prompted. 3. Modify. Mastercam displays the Fillet menu and shows the default menu values in the prompt area. ‘L’ creates fillets larger than 180 degrees. toggle Trim to Y or N. Filleting corners along chains of curves The Fillet. Fillet. then enter a value for radius in the prompt area. Modify. or F. 5.

then choose Done. Fillet. ‘N’ results in clockwise corners (relative to the chaining direction) being filleted. Note: Choosing ‘A’ results in all corners being filleted (regardless of the chaining direction). These parts often require different radius values on inside versus outside corners in order to provide adequate corner clearance. 7. these two functions were separate C-Hooks. Notes: ¨ Repeat steps 2 through 8 to create additional fillets. 9. Mastercam displays the Chaining Methods menu. ¨ The ability to fillet only inside or outside corners of a chained boundary (step 5) is particularly useful during geometry creation for wire EDM parts (punches and dies).Note: When the Trim option is set to ‘Y’. ‘P’ results in counterclockwise corners (relative to the chaining direction) being filleted. 8. If the selected chains contain existing fillets. toggle CW/CCW to A. When Trim is set to ‘N’. You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. 5. Mastercam displays the prompt (in the menu area) shown below. Mastercam trims the tangent curves to the resulting fillets. Spiral/Helix dialog box The Spiral/Helix dialog box allows you to select between the Spiral function and the Helix function. Y0. Create. Prior to version 9 of Mastercam. Choose Yes to change existing fillets to the current radius or No to maintain the original radii of existing fillets. P. The Spiral function creates spiral geometry as a series of parametric splines. the Helix function lets you create a tapered helix as a parametric spline with the center at X0. 6. To change which corners result in fillets (optional). Select one or more chains of curves. Choose Chain. 37 . or press [Esc] to exit the function. Mastercam creates the fillets but does not trim the tangent curves. or N.

Choose OK. initial Z pitch of . 4. initial XY pitch of . Create. Place the spiral using the Point Entry menu selections or by clicking the mouse button at the desired location. Select the Spiral radio button. The system calculates and displays the spiral in the graphics window. The Point Entry menu displays. ¨ ¨ ¨ # of revolutions – Sets the number of times the spiral will complete a 360-degree revolution XY Initial Pitch – Determines the amount that the radius increases in a single revolution. 2. which is the incremental distance (step down) in the Z where the spiral will begin. 3. 38 . Enter the parameters as follows: Radius – Sets the radius for the first spline in the spiral. Spiral/Helix. 7 revolutions. 5. ¨ Z Final Pitch – Sets the Z depth for the final revolution of the spiral. XY Final Pitch – Sets the pitch value for the final revolution of the spiral. ¨ Choose Main Menu.Creating a spiral 1. and final pitch values of zero.2. Next menu. ¨ Z Initial Pitch – Determines the distance in the Z axis between each revolution. ¨ Incremental Angle – Controls the number of points on each spline by specifying the angle at which Mastercam will recalculate the spiral. The following illustration shows a spiral created with a 1-inch radius. 5-degree angle.8. The Spiral/Helix dialog box displays.

Choose OK. Y0. Next menu. Creating splines The Spline menu gives you options for defining the method used to create the spline as well as parameters that further define the resulting geometry. Place the helix using the Point Entry menu selections or by clicking the mouse button at the desired location. The system calculates and displays the tapered helix in the graphics window. Spiral/Helix. 2. centered on X0. Create. Click on the menu and topics below for more information. ¨ ¨ Taper Angle – Specifies the thread taper angle. ¨ # of revolutions – Sets the number of times the spiral will complete a 360-degree revolution 4. 39 . Select the Helix operation radio button. Radius – Sets the radius for the first spline in the spiral. ¨ Incremental Angle – Controls the number of points on each spline by specifying the angle at which Mastercam will recalculate the spiral. Create. 3. 5. The Spiral/Helix dialog box displays. ¨ Choose Main Menu. ¨ Pitch – Sets the distance from a point on one thread to the corresponding point on the next thread measured parallel to the axis. Enter the parameters as follows: Starting Angle – Sets the angle at which the helix will begin. You can access the Spline menu by choosing Main Menu. Spline.Creating a helix 1. The Point Entry menu displays.

40 . Repeat steps 4 and 5 to create additional splines. Choose Main Menu. 5. Enter points for the spline to pass through.Creating a spline using manual point entry 1. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to create additional splines. 2. 5. define the end condition of the spline’s endpoints. Set the Type and Ends parameters on the Spline menu. 7. 1. Spline. If prompted. Note: The spline passes through the first two points that you select then through all other points that lie within the pattern until it reaches the third selected point. 2. 3. 6. 3. Choose Main Menu. Spline. Note: The resulting spline passes through the points you enter in step 3 in the order in which you enter them. 4. Create. Create. 1. Notes: ¨ You can create a closed spline by selecting the same point for the first and last points in step 4. You can create a closed spline by entering the same point for the first and last points in step 4. Select three points. Choose Automatic from the Spline menu. If prompted. then press [Esc]. 4. define the end condition of the spline’s endpoints. Creating a spline using automatic point entry This function creates a spline from a string of points that lie in a defined pattern. Choose Manual from the Spline menu. 6. Set the Type and Ends parameters on the Spline menu.

6. 2. Choose Curves from the Spline menu. Select a line. then choose Do it. 4. Choose Main Menu. 41 . Choose Blend from the Spline menu. type [S] to activate snapping. 3. move the cursor crosshairs over the point. Set parameters on the Spline Blending Between 2 Curves menu. Set the Type parameter on the Spline menu. then choose Done. Create. then choose Do it. 6. then left-click. 2. blank. Note: Mastercam creates a separate spline for each chain of curves that you select in step 4. delete or blank extraneous points. You can set a tolerance that determines how closely each resulting spline matches the selected curves. Mastercam displays a temporary spline between the tangent points. then left-click.¨ Mastercam uses a combination of distance and direction from point to point to place the points in a sensible order. 1. 7. 5. Set the Type parameter on the Spline menu. Choose Main Menu. 3. Creating a spline tangent to two curves 1. 8. Select one or more chains of curves. Set parameters on the From Curve(s) menu. Move the base of the arrow to the desired tangent position. and you can choose to keep. Repeat steps 4 through 7 to create additional splines. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the selected entity. arc. Create. 5. Press [Esc] to exit the function. or delete the original curves once the splines have been created. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional splines. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for a second blending curve. 9. Note: To set the point of tangency to an existing point. Creating splines from existing curves This function creates splines based on the geometry of existing curves. Spline. To avoid distorting the intended shape of the spline. or spline for the first blending curve. 4. Spline.

you must first create a spline using manual or automatic point entry with the Ends parameter set to Y. Screen. enter the XYZ coordinates for the tangent vector. In the prompt area. Curve-generated or NURBS if curve generation is not permitted. toggle Endpoint to F to set the end condition for the first endpoint or L to set the end condition of the last endpoint. Choose Natural. ¨ ¨ Curve-generated or parametric if curve generation is not permitted. 4. See Surface types for more information on surface types. you can also select a type at the time you create the spline or surface. While these types will be generated by default. Do one of the following: Enter or choose other defaults. Choose the CAD Settings tab. ¨ box. 1. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. also the surfaces defined from them. On the Spline End Conditions menu. 1.Specifying spline and surface type defaults The CAD Settings tab of the System Configuration dialog box lets you specify the type of spline or surface Mastercam will create by default whenever you create a spline or surface. Choose Values. ¨ ¨ ¨ Set the end condition of the selected endpoint by taking one of the following actions: Choose 3 pt arc. For more information. Choose No to use the settings only for the current Mastercam session. Configure. Choose Yes to update the current Configuration File. 2. ¨ NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline) – curves defined by knots or control points. 2. 3. 42 . Choose Cancel to abandon all changes made to this as well as to other tabs and close the dialog Defining the tangency of a spline at its endpoints To define a spline’s end conditions. The options are: ¨ Parametric – curves defined by coefficients or nodes. see Creating a spline using manual point entry and Creating a spline using automatic point entry. The System Configuration dialog box opens. Select the default spline and surface type from the Spline/Surface creation type drop down menu. also the surfaces defined from them. Choose OK to enact all settings from all tabs and close the dialog box.

Create. ¨ ¨ In the Letters area. You can access the Create Letters dialog box by choosing Main Menu. Creating geometric text using TrueTypeÒ fonts 1. Enter the height of the letters and the spacing between each letter. Next menu. 3. Choose To end. arc. The Create Letters dialog box displays. Select a line. enter the angle of the tangent vector. 4. Choose the TrueType® button. Select a line. 7. Select a font and font style. 5.¨ ¨ ¨ 3. Create. ¨ Bottom of Arc . or spline. or spline. Next menu. Note: We recommend that you accept the default spacing. Vertical – Places the text top-to-bottom starting at the insertion point you select. Click on the topics below for more information. The Font dialog displays.Places the letters along an arc starting at 180 degrees and continuing in a counterclockwise direction. Select an alignment for the text: Horizontal – Places the text left-to-right starting at the insertion point you select. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for the other endpoint. 6. Choose Angle. Choose Do it to set the spline. Letters. enter the radius of the arc to write the letters along. and NURBS splines. ¨ Top of Arc – Places the letters along an arc starting at 180 degrees and continuing in a clockwise direction. 2. Letters. Choose Flip to reverse the direction of the vector. Choose To entity. In the prompt area. arc. if necessary. 43 . enter the text to create as geometry. arcs. Creating geometric text The Create Letters dialog box gives you options for creating alphanumeric characters comprised of lines. Note: It is not necessary to select a font size. which is calculated based on letter height. if necessary. If you selected Top of Arc or Bottom of Arc for the alignment. then choose OK. Note: You cannot reverse the vector direction if you set the end condition using 3 pt arc or Natural. Choose Main Menu.

7. Each file contains a letter or character comprised of lines. Choose Main Menu. 44 . Press [Esc] when you are satisfied with the placement of the text. you are limited only by the number of TrueType fonts that are installed on your personal computer. Create. The Drafting Globals dialog box displays. See your Windows® documentation for more information about TrueType fonts. respectively. Next menu. and Slant. Choose OK twice. Letters. ¨ When creating letter geometry using TrueType fonts. Next menu. The Create Letters dialog box displays. text. Enter a starting point for the text. If the letters that you create are not the size that you want.8. 5. 6. The Create Letters dialog box displays. 4. 8. arcs. Choose Main Menu. Configure the parameters on the Note Text tab to obtain the desired appearance for the selected Note: The Drafting Globals parameters overwrite the Font and Height settings made in steps 2 and 4. Enter the Height for the letters in the Parameters area. Notes: Choose OK. Choose the Drafting Globals button. ¨ The height of the actual letters may not match the value that you entered for letter height because the system scales the letters based on all of the information encoded into the TrueType font. 3. enter the text to create as geometry. Creating geometric text using pre-defined letter files Mastercam contains pre-defined letter files in four fonts: Block. Box. You can use these files to create a string of geometric text. including blank space around the letters. you can scale them. 2. Letters. 9. Create. 1. Enter the start point for the letters. Roman. 9. For more information. In the Letters area. see Scaling entities using a single scale factor and Scaling entities using multiple scale factors. Creating geometric text using drafting parameters 1. The text appears in the graphics window. and splines. Select a Drafting font from the Font pull-down menu.

Depending on the font you select. 6. enter the letters to create as geometry. The last option (Other) lets you select a directory where you can store customized letter files. based on the Mastercam predefined font files. 2. From the Font pull-down menu. 1. MC7. Note: You can open the geometry file of any Mastercam letter/character and edit the file. or Other type fonts you want to use. Enter the name of an MC9. 9. 5. In the Letters area. enter the radius of the arc to write the letters along. 7. To prevent overwriting Mastercam’s pre-defined letter files. Note: The first four directories contain predefined letter files. The Create Pattern dialog box displays. If you selected "Other" and have created your own fonts. Create. Click the mouse. 3. the Alignment choices may or may not be active. MC8.Places the letters along an arc starting at 180 degrees and continuing in a counterclockwise direction. Pattern. 8. or select the Browse button to locate the file. each representing a different font. enter the letter height. you can import it into the current file as many times as needed. ¨ Bottom of Arc . ¨ Top of Arc – Places the letters along an arc starting at 180 degrees and continuing in a clockwise direction. If active. 10. Set additional parameters as follows: Scale – Sets the scale of the pattern entities. Rather than recreate it each time you need it. enter the letter spacing. Box. Roman. 4. 3. and Mastercam creates the letters in the graphics window. save the edited file to a different directory. Next menu. This function is useful if you have a part such as a nut or bolt that you use repeatedly in your work. Slant. If prompted. ¨ Choose Main Menu. If the Spacing parameter is active. select one of the Block.2. MC7. or GE3 file. Vertical – Places the text top-to-bottom starting at the insertion point you select. select ASCII File names to indicate that you have ASCII file names for the fonts. 45 . MC8. In the Height area. or GE3) into the current file. if necessary. Importing pattern entities into the current file You can import entities contained in an existing file (MC9. Choose OK. select an alignment for the text as follows: ¨ ¨ Horizontal – Places the text left-to-right starting at the insertion point you select.

Points – Creates points at the corners of the bounding box. ¨ ¨ file. Solids and dimensions can be. Mirror Z – Mirrors the pattern entities about the Cplane’s Z axis relative to the construction origin.Sets the color and level of the pattern entities. Enter a point for the center of the pattern file.g. Bound box. 6. defining alternate construction planes and origins. Create. Pattern files) so that they are easy to find when you use this function. Mirror Y – Mirrors the pattern entities about the Cplane’s Y axis relative to the construction origin. For more information about groups. Choose OK. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. Next menu. The Bounding Box dialog box displays. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 7. Notes: ¨ It is useful to store files containing pattern entities in a separate directory (e. 46 . Select the check box to apply the current system color and level to the pattern entities. ¨ Use Main Color and Level . Leave the check box blank to maintain the original color and level of the pattern entities.¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ Rotation – Sets the angle to rotate the pattern entities. 5. see Working with groups. Mastercam identifies the entities as a group in the database for future use. 2. Set the Create parameters as follows: Lines – Creates lines along the edges of the bounding box. ¨ Each time you import a set of pattern entities into the current file. This geometry can be useful for checking the overall dimensions of a part.. Toolpaths cannot be imported. and translating a part to a new position in the graphics window. which is a box-shaped boundary that is calculated around selected entities in the graphics window. Creating bounding box geometry The Bounding Box dialog box lets you create points and lines to mark the center and extents of a bounding box. 1. Mirror X – Mirrors the pattern entities about the Cplane’s X axis relative to the construction origin. 4. Mastercam names the group using the pattern file name and a number to ensure the uniqueness of the group name. Choose Undo Last to remove pattern entities in the order in which they were created in the current Repeat step 5 to create the pattern entities at additional positions. Note: The pattern entities are created in the current Cplane.

¨ 3. Choose OK. arcs. for Coons. NURBS. or from pre-defined shapes. 6. Surface. as follows: X – Sets the distance to extend the bounding box beyond the selected entities in the X direction. Center point – Creates a point at the center of the bounding box. Swept. you can choose only Parametric and NURBS. and Blend surfaces. Set the Expand parameters. entity as the "child. Surface options. entity or entities as the "parent" and the resultant. Click on the topics below for more information. or generated. ¨ ¨ ¨ 4. Y – Sets the distance to extend the bounding box beyond the selected entities in the Y direction. 5. To understand the relationship between dependent entities. you can choose from all three surface types. Create. Each surface type is described below. Surface associativity Entity association refers to the dependent relationship between one entity and a second entity or group of entities from which the first entity is generated. and curve-generated. You can access the Surface menu by choosing Main Menu. splines). which you create from curves (lines. or generating. think of the original. if desired. However. A surface is a 2D or 3D shape that has area. If you did not select the All entities option. SURFACES Creating and modifying surfaces The Surface menu gives you options for creating and modifying surfaces. from other surfaces. For most Create. Select the All entities box if you want the bounding box to select all entities." which depends on the parent for its definition. Z – Sets the distance to extend the bounding box beyond the selected entities in the Z direction. Each type describes a method that the system uses to calculate and store mathematical data about the surface. Parametric 47 . Entity association occurs between the following entities: ¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ Between curve-generated surfaces and their reference curves Between offset surfaces and their generating surfaces Between trimmed surfaces and their generating (base) surfaces Between surface curves and the surfaces on which they lie Surface types Mastercam lets you create three types of surfaces: parametric. select the entities that the bounding box will surround and choose Done.

but with slightly more computing time Compatible with IGES conversion Can be output to VDA file format (if created in Mastercam) Note: Due to limitations with the VDA file format. curve-generated surfaces have the following characteristics: ¨ ¨ Require less data storage than parametric or NURBS surfaces Associated with their generating curves Note: Curve-generated surfaces store exact data about their generating curves (rather than approximations). Converters function can be output to VDA only if they are bicubic (mathematical degree 3 by 3). However. 48 . a NURBS surface expands the string of control points in a second direction resulting in a grid. However. A patch is an area of the surface bounded by four segments of generating curves. In addition.The parametric method of storing surface information is analogous to the parametric method of storing spline information. surfaces that you bring in from another source using the File. NURBS surfaces have the following characteristics: ¨ ¨ ¨ Require less data storage than parametric surfaces. parametric surfaces have the following characteristics: ¨ ¨ ¨ Compatible with IGES and VDA conversions Not associated with their generating curves Require a large amount of data storage NURBS The NURBS method of storing surface information is analogous to the NURBS method of storing spline information. You can analyze a surface to determine if it is bicubic. it stores a direct reference back to the original curves. ¨ Not associated with their generating curves Curve-generated When the system stores a surface as a curve-generated surface. In addition. Create functions Creating a lofted surface The Loft option creates surfaces using a smooth blending of a minimum of two curves or chains of curves. a parametric surface expands each curve segment in a second direction resulting in a patch. In addition.

Loft. Select two or more curves or chains of curves. When you select a curve or chain of curves. Set parameters on the Lofted Surface menu. Press [Esc] to exit the function. you may want to select your curves using the Sync chaining method . then choose Do it to create the surface.) compose one edge of the surface. 49 . the system places a temporary arrow at the closest endpoint to show which end you have selected. Note: When you select curves for a loft surface. it is important that you pay attention to where you select each curve or chain of curves because the selected ends of each pair of curves (curves one and two. curves two and three. branch. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional lofted surfaces. 2. or point.1. then choose Done. Choose Main Menu. 5. node. Create. 4. Surface. In order to better match your curves or chains of curves. which lets you match curves manually or by entity. etc. 3.

8. Config. then choose Done to complete chaining. choose Screen. enter the number of patches to use in the ‘along’ direction. In the prompt area. as needed. If at any time you want to regain access to this dialog box. press [Alt+H]. Click on the topics below for more information. Note: Mastercam eliminates this step for Coons surfaces that you create during the remainder of the Mastercam session if you check Don’ t ask again. In order to create Coons surfaces. There are two types of Coons chaining: automatic and manual. Repeat steps 3 through 7 to create additional Coons surfaces or press [Esc] to exit the function. Choose Do it to create the Coons surface. 6. Select the CAD Settings tab and choose Ask each time. Choose Main Menu. 3. a type of chaining selection used only for this function. you must use Coons chaining. 4. 5. Choose No (not to use automatic Coons chaining) on the Automatic Coons Chaining dialog box. 2. Set parameters on the Coons menu.Creating a Coons surface This option lets you create a surface from a grid of curves. Surface. Create. 50 . Note: For help on the menu options. Enter the number of patches to use in the ‘across’ direction. 7. Coons. Creating a Coons surface using manual Coons chaining 1. Follow the system prompts to select the ‘along’ and ‘across’ chains.

Choose the CAD Settings tab.Creating a Coons surface using automatic Coons chaining 1. You can also disable Coons Auto Chaining. If at any time you want to regain access to this dialog box. 4. 6. The System Configuration dialog box opens. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. 2. Config. Check Ask each time to make Mastercam query the operator. 3. Select the CAD Settings tab and choose Ask each time. Repeat steps 3 through 6 to create additional Coons surfaces or press [Esc] to exit the function. 2. as needed. You can enable Coons Auto Chaining so that it is always used. Set parameters on the Coons menu. Check No to disable Coons Auto Chaining. choose Screen. Choose Main Menu. 5. 7. 51 . Surface. Configure. Select the end of a curve at the lower-right corner of the geometry. Enabling Coons Auto Chaining Coons Auto Chaining lets you define a Coons surface by selecting three entities: two curves that meet in the upper left corner and one curve in the lower right corner of the geometry. Screen. press [Alt+H]. Coons. Choose Yes (to use automatic Coons chaining) on the Automatic Coons Chaining dialog box. which forces the operator to use manual chaining. Choose OK to enact all settings from all tabs and close the dialog box. Note: For help on the menu options. 1. Note: Mastercam eliminates this step for Coons surfaces that you create during the remainder of the Mastercam session if you check Don’ t ask again. ¨ ¨ ¨ 4. Do one of the following: Enter or choose other defaults. Create. or make Mastercam ask the operator to approve its use each time. Choose Do it to create the Coons surface. 3. Do one of the following: Check Yes to use Coons Auto Chaining by default. Select two curves that intersect at the upper-left corner of the geometry.

Note: If you don’t get the results you want using automatic Coons chaining. you must understand patch layout. Mastercam uses a minimum branch angle to determine which entities to chain when there are intersecting entities. or patch. The system does not chain any entity that intersects at an angle larger than the minimum branch angle. Manual Coons Chaining In order to understand manual Coons chaining. Coons patch boundaries are laid out in a grid of along and across curves. Along curves lie in rows that are parallel to the stepping direction. You define the along curves for the entire surface first. followed by the across curves. Choose No to use the settings only for the current Mastercam session. try using manual Coons chaining. ¨ box. 52 . you can enter a different value by choosing Angle from the menu area before selecting the entities that you want to chain. Choose Cancel to abandon all changes made to this as well as to other tabs and close the dialog Automatic Coons Chaining Automatic Coons chaining lets you define a surface patch based on three entities: the two curves that meet in the upper-left corner and one curve in the lower-right corner of your geometry. Across curves lie in columns that are perpendicular to the stepping direction. The following graphic shows the selection of two across curves and two along curves to form a square.Choose Yes to update the current Configuration File. The default value for the minimum branch angle is 30 degrees. However.

Note: Where you select each curve affects your results.The following graphic shows how multiple patches form a 3-by-3 grid that defines the Coons surface. The following example shows graphics of the same curves and Coons surface used in the Automatic Coons Chaining example that required three selection steps. Following these graphics you see a top view of the curves and the seven selection steps required to create the surface using manual Coons chaining. 53 . Be consistent when selecting the start of each across and along curve.

Coons surface blending methods The following graphics show a sample surface (shown below in isometric view) created using each of the Coons blending methods (shown in side view).Note: This example shows a 1-by-2 grid. 54 .

55 .Creating a ruled surface The Ruled option creates surfaces using a linear blending a minimum of two curves or chains of curves.

such as an obround. branch. 2. then press [Enter]. type a value in the displayed text box. Surface. ¨ When you select curves for a ruled surface. Notes: ¨ The Create. or point. N (NURBS). Take one or more of the following actions: Toggle Type to P (parametric). Ruled. Rectangle function creates a ruled surface based on the extents of a rectangle or rectangular shape. the system places a temporary arrow at the closest endpoint to show which end you have selected. node. In order to better match your curves or chains of curves. which lets you match curves manually or by entity. Choose Tolerance. The Ruled surface parameters menu displays.) compose one edge of the surface. 56 . Create. it is important that you pay attention to where you select each curve or chain of curves because the selected ends of each pair of curves (curve one and two. or C (curve-generated).1. etc. Choose Main Menu. Choose Do it to create the surface. Select two or more curves or chains of curves. ¨ ¨ 4. two and three. you may want to select your curves using the Sync chaining method . then choose Done. 3. When you select a curve or chain of curves.

Select one or more chain of curves. as needed. 57 . The displays. Revolved. Set parameters on the Revolved Surface menu. 4. When you select the axis. then choose Done. Surface. The Chaining Methods menu displays. The system revolves one or more selected chains of curves (profile entities) about a single line (axis of rotation). choose Create.Creating a revolved surface This option creates a surface that is circular in one direction. 2. The following graphics identify a profile entity and axis of rotation and show them used in a full and partial rotation. Select a line for the axis of rotation. 3. the system displays a temporary arrow at one end of the axis to indicate the rotation direction. then choose Do it to create the revolved surfaces. 1. From the Main Menu.

The chains that you select to sweep are called ‘across’ chains. Creating a swept surface The Sweep function creates a surface by sweeping chains of curves along a path. then choose Done. Choose Main Menu. you do not have to choose Done . This is known as a linear blend. Analyze. 2. For more information. 2. Press [Esc] to exit the function. you can select only one path chain. ¨ 1. Mastercam moves to the next step automatically. In this case. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. Sweep. 58 . Change the sweep of the surface by taking one of the following actions: Enter an angle value for Sweep. Note: For more information about curve-generated surfaces. These chains define cross-sections of the resulting surface. You can define a swept surface using the following combinations of across (section) and along (path) chains: ¨ 1 across/1 along: Mastercam sweeps one section chain along one path chain. ¨ ¨ 5. 3. Surface. toggle it to Y. see Translate/Rotate Example. Mastercam calculates the angle from the surface’s end angle. Select one or two ‘along’ chains of curves for the sweep path. 4. Enter an angle value for Start Angle and/or End Angle. Create. Choose OK to close the dialog box. 6.Editing the sweep of a revolved surface 1. You have the option to translate or rotate the cross-section chain along the path. Choose Main Menu. Select one or more ‘across’ chains of curves to define the cross-sections of the surface. ¨ 2 or more across/1 along: Mastercam transitions from one section chain to the next in the order in which you defined them while following one path chain. 3. 1 across/2 along: Mastercam proportionally scales one section chain between two path chains. Note: If you selected more than one chain in step 2. The chains that define the path or trajectory of the sweep are called ‘ along’ chains. then choose Done. see Surface types. Select a curve-generated revolved surface.

5. In the prompt area.4. Note: This option is available only when one across chain and one along chain are selected. ¨ Toggle Trans/Rot to T to translate the section chain along the path chain or R to rotate the section chain as it is translated along the path chain. see Surface types. then press [Enter]. If necessary. choose Type to toggle it to N (NURBS) or P (parametric). Mastercam displays the current surface error tolerance. Choose Do it to create the Swept surface. 6. type a tolerance value. Note: The following graphics show three swept surfaces created using various combinations of across and along chains. surface type. Note: The surface tolerance determines how closely the resulting surface fits the along and across curves. For more information. choose Tolerance. see Translate/Rotate Example. 1 across/1 along 59 . For more information. ¨ To edit the surface type. use the Swept Surface menu to edit these settings by taking the following actions: ¨ To edit the surface error tolerance. In the prompt area. or press [Esc] to exit the function. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional swept surfaces. and translate/rotate settings.

Toggle To plane to N. 3. then choose Done. The default surface length is listed in the prompt area. 4. 2. choose Length. Mastercam displays the Draft Surface menu and lists the current menu settings in the prompt area. Create. splines). Select one or more chains of curves (lines. then enter a value for length in the prompt area. To change this length.2 across/1 along Creating draft surfaces using a defined length 1. Draft. Note: Mastercam creates a separate draft surface for each individual entity in each chain of curves. Mastercam displays the Chaining Methods menu. arcs. Surface. 60 . Choose Main Menu.

Toggle To plane to N. 8. arc. 9. Choose Main Menu. Note: The default view is the current construction plane (Cplane). or driving out. The draft surface extends to a defined length or plane. Mastercam displays a menu where you can select a new view. which is calculated perpendicular to a selected view (You may need to rotate the geometry to see the arrow). click on the following topics: Creating draft surfaces using a defined length 1. 2. then enter a value for length in the prompt area. 4. To create draft surfaces on additional curves. 6. Set the type of draft surface(s) to create. or C for curvegenerated. To change this length. To change the draft direction. Note: A zero value produces no tilt and is the equivalent of a perpendicular extrusion. The default draft angle is listed in the prompt area. 3. N for NURBS. Mastercam displays the Draft Surface menu and lists the current menu settings in the prompt area. choose Angle. then enter a value between ±180° in the prompt area. see Surface types. Mastercam displays a menu where you can select a new view. To change this value. or degree of tilt. then enter a value between ±180° in the prompt area. Select one or more chains of curves (lines. To change this value. For more information. Mastercam displays the Chaining Methods menu. which is calculated perpendicular to a selected view (You may need to rotate the geometry to see the arrow). Surface. The default surface length is listed in the prompt area. Note: A zero value produces no tilt and is the equivalent of a perpendicular extrusion. The default draft angle is listed in the prompt area. choose Length. choose View. splines). arcs. To change the draft direction. 6. Note: Mastercam creates a separate draft surface for each individual entity in each chain of curves. A direction arrow on the first selected chain reflects the current draft direction.5. choose Angle. choose View. For information on creating draft surfaces. choose Curves. Create. Note: The default view is the current construction plane (Cplane). often with an angle. then choose Done. 61 . Draft. A direction arrow on the first selected chain reflects the current draft direction. 7. or spline) in a linear direction perpendicular to some view. Choose Do it to create the draft surface(s). then repeat steps 2 through 8. press [Esc] About draft surfaces A draft surface is created by extruding. or to exit the function. the shape of a curve (line. Choose P for parametric. 5.

choose View. then repeat steps 2 through 8. To create draft surfaces on additional curves. or to exit the function. Note: Mastercam creates a separate draft surface for each individual entity in each chain of curves. Mastercam displays the Draft Surface menu and lists the current menu settings in the prompt area. or to exit the function. Toggle To plane to Y. 62 . Draft. 9. or C for curvegenerated. Mastercam displays the Chaining Methods menu. A direction arrow on the first selected chain reflects the current draft direction. Choose P for parametric. Note: Mastercam creates trimmed surfaces in cases where the plane is defined at an angle other than perpendicular with respect to the draft direction. press [Esc]. Mastercam displays a menu where you can select a new view. then choose Done. 3. splines). To change the draft direction. press [Esc]. The default draft angle is listed in the prompt area. N for NURBS. Select one or more chains of curves (lines. To change this value. Note: The default view is the current construction plane (Cplane). Choose Do it to create the draft surface(s). 4. which is calculated perpendicular to a selected view (You may need to rotate the geometry to see the arrow). then enter a value between ±180° in the prompt area. choose Curves. 6. choose Curves. Note: For additional information regarding surface types.7. To create draft surfaces on additional curves. Set the type of draft surface(s) to create. Choose Do it to create the draft surface(s). 5. Note: A zero value produces no tilt and is the equivalent of a perpendicular extrusion. see Surface types. see Surface types. choose Angle. Set the type of draft surface(s) to create. For more information. 8. or C for curve-generated. N for NURBS. 8. Choose Main Menu. Use the Define Plane menu to define where the draft surface(s) terminate. Create. then repeat steps 2 through 8. 2. Surface. Toggle the Type option to P for parametric. Creating draft surfaces using a defined plane 1. Choose Plane. 7. arcs. 9.

surface type.The pictures below show an example of a draft surface: Draft Surface menu options The Draft Surface menu options define the following characteristics of the draft surfaces that you’re creating: draft direction. 63 . Click on the menu below for more information. and position where the surface ends. draft angle.

5. 2. then choose OK. Create. toggle it to Y. then choose Done. see Surface types. toggle it to Y. Note: For more information about curve-generated surfaces. arcs. then choose OK. Creating draft surfaces using a defined plane 1. 5. Analyze. 64 . Press [Esc] to exit the function. see Surface types. Enter an Angle value. 4. Enter a 3D Length value. 3. Analyze. Surface. Choose Main Menu. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. Choose Main Menu. 2. Select a curve-generated draft surface. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Draft. Editing the length of a draft surface 1.Editing the angle of a draft surface 1. Select one or more chains of curves (lines. splines). Select a curve-generated draft surface. Choose Main Menu. 4. 3. Mastercam displays the Chaining Methods menu. 2. Mastercam displays the Draft Surface menu and lists the current menu settings in the prompt area. Note: For more information about curve-generated surfaces.

press [Alt+H]. Primitive. To change this length. choose Angle. Surface. To change this value. primitive surfaces are not based on curve geometry. 7. Choose Main Menu. then enter a value for length in the prompt area. Mastercam creates a cylindershaped surface model in the graphics window. choose Length. or C for curvegenerated. You can access this menu by choosing Main Menu. or to exit the function. 3. then enter a value between ±180° in the prompt area. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis. Primitive. Next menu. To change the draft direction. Surface. Click on the topics below for more information. 2. The default draft angle is listed in the prompt area. These models are fully closed and appear to be solid when shading is turned on. choose Curves. press [Esc]. such as a block or sphere. then repeat steps 2 through 8. Set the type of draft surface(s) to create. 65 . choose Axis.Note: Mastercam creates a separate draft surface for each individual entity in each chain of curves. you must enter a value in the prompt area. Creating a cylinder-shaped primitive surface model 1. The Primitive Surfaces menu gives you options for creating different types of primitive surface models. For more information. 5. choose Height and Radius. ¨ To set the cylinder’s orientation. 4. The default surface length is listed in the prompt area. Create. With the exception of extruded surface models. N for NURBS. A direction arrow on the first selected chain reflects the current draft direction. Mastercam displays a menu where you can select a new view. Choose P for parametric. Choose Do it to create the draft surface(s). Next menu. choose View. Create. Note: A zero value produces no tilt and is the equivalent of a perpendicular extrusion. 6. Modify the surface model by setting parameters on the Cylinder menu as follows: ¨ To set the cylinder’s size. see Surface types. To create draft surfaces on additional curves. Toggle To plane to N. Creating surfaces in pre-defined (primitive) shapes A primitive surface model is composed of one or more NURBS surfaces in a pre-defined shape. Note: The default view is the current construction plane (Cplane). 8. For help on this menu. 9. After choosing either option. Cylinder. which is calculated perpendicular to a selected view (You may need to rotate the geometry to see the arrow).

2. Choose Main Menu. After choosing any of these options. For help on this menu. choose Sweep angle. Mastercam creates each new surface model using the exact parameters as the previously created surface model of the same type. Note: By default. The Start angle parameter determines the angle at which Mastercam begins creating the cylinder. choose Attributes. Top radius. Primitive. choose Sweep angle. Note: You can create a partial cylinder by entering a value of less than 360 degrees. ¨ To set the cylinder’s attributes. Press [Esc] to finalize the creation of the cone. 3. you must enter a value in the prompt area. Modify the surface model by setting parameters on the Cone menu as follows: ¨ To set the cone’s size. enter a value for sweep angle. ¨ To set the cone’s sweep. Create. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis. choose Axis. Surface. Next menu. In the prompt area. 66 . Creating a cone-shaped primitive surface model 1. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the cone’s bottom face. choose Height. ¨ To set the cone’s position. ¨ To set the cone’s orientation. ¨ To set the cone’s attributes. Note: If you create multiple primitive surface models of a given type. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the cylinder’s bottom face. The Start angle parameter determines the angle at which Mastercam begins creating the cone. Mastercam creates a coneshaped surface model in the graphics window. 3. Note: You can create a partial cone by entering a value of less than 360 degrees.¨ To set the cylinder’s position. Use the Attributes menu to set the color and level of the surface model. ¨ To set the cylinder’s sweep. choose Base point. choose Attributes. Press [Esc] to finalize the creation of the cylinder. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them. press [Alt+H]. enter a value for sweep angle. Btm radius. Use the Attributes menu to set the color and level of the surface model. Note: By default. choose Base point. the cone will be creating using the main system color and level (Secondary menu) unless you use this option to set different attributes. and Taper angle. Cone. the cylinder will be created using the main system color and level (Secondary menu) unless you use this option to set different attributes. In the prompt area.

Creating a torus-shaped primitive surface model 1. For help on this menu. ¨ To set the block’s position. Mastercam creates each new surface model using the exact parameters as the previously created surface model of the same type. Primitive. Note: By default. you must enter a value in the prompt area. ¨ To set the block’s position and 2D size in one step. choose Axis. you must enter a value in the prompt area. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axes that correspond to the block ’s height and length. the block will be created using the main system color and level (Secondary menu) unless you use this option to set different attributes. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them Creating a block-shaped primitive surface model 1. Modify the surface model by setting parameters on the Torus menu as follows: ¨ To set the size of the torus. choose Maj radius and Min radius. and base point. Use the Attributes menu to set the color and level of the surface model. Surface. Width. press [Alt+H]. ¨ To set the block’s attributes. ¨ To set the orientation of the torus. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the block’s bottom face. 2. You can also choose Rotate to revolve the block about its base point by an angle value that you enter in the prompt area. choose Corners. press [Alt+H]. Mastercam creates a torus (doughnut)-shaped surface model in the graphics window. Length. and Taper angle. Mastercam creates a blockshaped surface model in the graphics window. Choose Main Menu. choose Axis (H) and Axis (L). They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them. 67 . choose Height. Primitive. Press [Esc] to finalize the creation of the block. Torus. Enter two points in the graphics window for opposing corners of the block’s bottom face.Note: If you create multiple primitive surface models of a given type. After choosing either of these options. 3. The block’s height is unchanged. Mastercam updates length. choose Attributes. 2. Choose Main Menu. Mastercam creates each new surface model using the exact parameters as the previously created surface model of the same type. Next menu. Create. After choosing any of these option. Surface. Create. Block. width. Modify the surface model by setting parameters on the Block menu as follows: ¨ To set the block’s size. choose Base point. Note: If you create multiple primitive surface models of a given type. ¨ To set the block’s orientation. For help on this menu. Next menu.

then enter a value for radius in the prompt area. ¨ Modify the surface model by setting parameters on the Sphere menu as follows: To set the sphere’s size. Creating a sphere-shaped primitive surface model 1. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis. choose Radius. choose Sweep angle. ¨ To set the sphere’s position. ¨ To set the sphere’s attributes. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them. For help on this menu. 3. choose Axis. Next menu. the of the torus will be creating using the main system color and level (Secondary menu) unless you use this option to set different attributes. Note: You can create a partial torus by entering a value of less than 360 degrees. ¨ To set the sphere’s sweep. Note: You can create a partial sphere by entering a value of less than 360 degrees. Mastercam creates each new surface model using the exact parameters as the previously created surface model of the same type. Press [Esc] to finalize the creation of the torus. Note: By default. Press [Esc] to finalize the creation of the sphere. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the torus’ hole. the sphere will be creating using the main system color and level (Secondary menu) unless you use this option to set different attributes. Create. ¨ To set the attributes of the torus. choose Base point. Mastercam creates a sphereshaped surface model in the graphics window. 2. Note: If you create multiple primitive surface models of a given type. In the prompt area. In the prompt area. choose Base point. Use the Attributes menu to set the color and level of the surface model. 68 . choose Sweep angle. Choose Main Menu. Use the Attributes menu to set the color and level of the surface model. ¨ To set the sphere’s orientation. 3.¨ To set the position of the torus. The Start angle parameter determines the angle at which Mastercam begins creating the sphere. Primitive. ¨ To set the sweep of the torus. The Start angle parameter determines the angle at which Mastercam begins creating the torus. press [Alt+H]. Note: By default. enter a value for sweep angle. enter a value for sweep angle. Sphere. Surface. choose Attributes. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the sphere. choose Attributes.

choose Yes to close the chain of curves. Surface. Extrusion Select one chain of curves. the extrusion will be created using the main system color and level (Secondary menu) unless you use this option to set different attributes. you must enter a value in the prompt area. Use the Attributes menu to set the color and level of the surface model. Note: This functionality is similar to the Primitives function offered with the Mastercam Solids product. Note: By default. ¨ To set the extrusion’s attributes. Mastercam drives the shape of the curves in a perpendicular direction to create the surface model. which creates actual solid bodies. Mastercam creates a separate NURBS surface for each solid face in your selection. Mastercam creates each new surface model using the exact parameters as the previously created surface model of the same type. 4. Next menu. After choosing any of these options. press [Alt+H]. it must be closed. Scale. Press [Esc] to finalize the creation of the extruded surface model. choose Base point. Modify the surface model by setting parameters on the Extrusion menu as follows: ¨ To set the extrusion’s size. 69 . choose Axis. ¨ To set the extrusion’s position. Extracting surfaces from solids You can use solids to extract surface information. see Creating solids in pre-defined (primitive) shapes. 1. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the extrusion’s bottom face. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them. Offset. If prompted. Note: Choosing No cancels the selection and exits the function. choose Attributes. You can also choose Rotate to revolve the extrusion about its base point by an angle value that you enter in the prompt area. 5. Creating an extruded primitive surface model Mastercam creates an extruded primitive surface model by driving out the shape of a selected chain of curves in a perpendicular direction.Note: If you create multiple primitive surface models of a given type. ¨ To set the extrusion’s orientation. Primitive. Note: If you select a spline. Choose Main Menu. Create. 3. 2. Mastercam closes the chain by drawing a straight line between the two open endpoints. For help on this menu. For more information. choose Height. and Taper angle. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis.

then choose Done. Create. then choose Do it to create the fillet surfaces. Note: The radius that you enter should be an average representation of the variable radii that you enter if you vary the radius along the surface in the following step. Select one or more surfaces. based on how it is constructed. enter a value for radius. The Define Plane menu displays. 2. then choose OK to set the direction. lies on a curve or chain of curves at a rail location. Fillet. From solid. 4. Fillet. Choose Main Menu. Set parameters on the Plane/Surface menu. Select one or more surfaces. Create. then choose Done to extract the surfaces. Define the tangent plane. 2. each of which is tangent to a plane and a surface. Surface. then choose Done. 3. Creating a fillet surface between a plane and a surface This option creates one or more fillet surfaces. 70 . Note: For help on the Plane/Surface menu options. and is tangent to one or more selected surfaces. press [Alt+H]. if necessary. Create. 2. 1. 1. Note: The arrow points to the side of the plane that you want the fillet surfaces to be tangent to.1. Next menu. Modify functions Creating fillet surfaces The Fillet menu gives you options for constructing fillet surfaces. A fillet surface is mathematically equivalent to a series of arcs and is tangent to one or two surfaces. In the prompt area. Creating a fillet surface between a curve and a surface This option creates one or more fillet surfaces. Choose Main Menu. 5. Choose Flip to reverse the direction of the plane’s normal arrow. Surface. as needed. Create. Plane/surf. 6. Surface. In the prompt area. The solids are unchanged. Choose Main Menu. each of which has a defined radius. You can access the Fillet menu by choosing Main Menu. Select one or more faces and/or whole solid bodies. enter a value for the radius of the fillet surfaces. Surface. 3. Curve/surf. Fillet.

In some cases. each of which is tangent to two surfaces. Select one or more chains of curves. When Mastercam offsets a surface. Note: You receive this prompt only if you selected the Fillet Both Sides check box on the Surface-Surface Fillet dialog box and the system finds more than one solution. then press [Esc] to exit the function. 71 . For example. Surface. Creating a fillet surface between two surfaces This option creates one or more fillet surfaces. Create. 6. 4. Set parameters on the Curve/Surface Fillet Surface menu. You can select one set. Fillet. With one set. then choose Done. Note: For help on the Surface/Surface menu options. then choose Do it to create the fillet surfaces. Select one or more surfaces for the first set of surfaces. the system looks for intersections between all walls and the floor. Surface. then choose Do it to create the fillet surfaces. Surf/surf. Offsetting surfaces This function offsets one or more surfaces by a distance and a direction relative to the surface normal direction of each selected surface. 5. however. having only one set of surfaces could prove more time consuming. Note: For help on the Curve/Surface menu options. If prompted. Set parameters on the Surface/Surface Fillet Surface menu. Choose Main Menu. When you choose this option. 2. the system looks for intersections only between each wall and the floor. the system prompts you to select two sets of surfaces. The system attempts to create fillet surfaces by pairing each surface in the first set with each surface in the second set. Offset. If. Create. then choose Done. the system attempts to create fillet surfaces by pairing each surface in the set with every other surface in the set. 3. Choose Main Menu.4. press [Alt+H]. select the surfaces to delete. Note: The radius that you enter should be an average representation of the variable radii that you enter if you vary the radius along the surface in the following step. then choose Done. but it must contain at least two surfaces. 1. Select one or more surfaces for the second set of surfaces. 1. it creates the offset surface as a separate surface from the original surface. 5. 6. Indicate which side of the curves to use to create the fillet surfaces by choosing Left or Right with relation to the direction of the curve. if you have multiple surface walls and a single surface floor all in a single set. In the prompt area. you select the walls as one set of surfaces and the floor as the second set of surfaces. enter a value for radius. press [Alt+H].

72 . blank. 5. Trim. However. 6. Mastercam displays the Offset menu. To check the surface normal directions. Note: You must select lines. Surface. Trim/extend. You can access the Trim or Extend menu by choosing Main Menu. Select one or more surfaces to offset. Surface. To change the offset distance. Select one or more surfaces to trim. Indicate what to do with the original surfaces once the offset surfaces have been created. 4. you can replace these trimming curves with surface curves in step 5. Set the step method and trimming parameters. or delete the original (base) surface. You can check the normal direction of one or all surfaces in the selection. For more information. press [Alt+H] from the menu. 1. The default offset values display in the prompt area. B to blank the surfaces. if necessary. In the prompt area. Modify. Trim. then select one or more surface curves in the graphics window. arcs. Note: To trim the surfaces to surface curves instead of using the trimming curves selected in step 3. enter a new value for the distance to offset the surfaces. Mastercam projects them onto the surfaces in order to calculate the intersection where the surface will be trimmed. 4. then choose OK. choose Check norms. Choose Options. arcs. Select a curve or chains of curves to use to trim the surfaces. and you can keep. Mastercam displays the Check Surface Normals menu. then choose Done. choose Offset dist. Trimming surfaces The Trim or Extend Surface menu gives you options for trimming.2. Set the remaining parameters on the Trim to Curves menu. and/or splines as the trimming curves in this step. Click on the topics below for more information. untrimming. Modify. 2. Toggle Dispose to K to keep the surfaces. then choose Do it. A negative value offsets the surfaces in the negative surface normal direction. Surface or by choosing Main Menu. it creates the trimmed surface as a new surface. To curves. or D to delete the surfaces. and splines or surface curves) If the trimming curves do not lie directly on the surfaces. 3. Create. Choose Do it to create the offset surfaces. Trimming surfaces to curves This function trims surfaces to curves (lines. and extending surfaces. but it may take longer to calculate the trimmed surfaces than Fixed step. Choose Main Menu. A positive value offsets the surfaces in the positive surface normal direction. Note: You can enter a positive or negative value. When Mastercam trims a surface. Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method. then choose Done. choose Surf crvs. then choose Done. 5. 3.

2. Project function. Take one of the following actions: ¨ ¨ Choose OK to keep the side that the arrow currently points to. Select one or more surfaces to trim. When Mastercam trims a surface. or delete the original (base) surface. Mastercam displays an arrow on the surface. Trimming surfaces to a plane This function trims surfaces to a plane. Create. then choose Done. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Surface. Trim. blank. Curve. then choose OK. 7. Select a highlighted surface. Surface. To plane. Notes: ¨ This function is similar to the Create. The arrow on the graphic indicates the side that Mastercam will keep after trimming. it creates the trimmed surface as a new surface. 3. The following graphics show a surface trimmed by a circle. Choose Flip to reverse the direction of the arrow. Trim/extend. Move the base of the arrow to the area of the surface to keep after trimming. 73 . Mastercam displays a temporary graphic of the plane in the graphics window. Choose Main Menu. ¨ ¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. 4. Define the trimming plane. Note: Avoid selecting the outer boundary of the surface. 1. and you can keep. However. Modify. then click. which gives you the option to trim surfaces to projected curves.6. To curves. in this function no curves are created. 8. which may produce unintended results.

Trim/extend. blank. Slice function. The following graphics show a rectangular surface trimmed to a plane. 74 . 1. or delete the original (base) surface. Notes: ¨ This function is similar to the Create. Surface. Choose Main Menu. and trims one or both of the sets of surfaces. Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method. then choose Done. Choose Options. it creates the trimmed surface as a new surface. Trim. To surfaces. Trimming surfaces to surfaces This function looks for intersections between two sets of surfaces. ¨ ¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. Modify. 7. When Mastercam trims a surface. Select one or more surfaces for the first set of surfaces. Choose Do it to trim the surfaces. Set the step method and trimming parameters. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 6.5. Create. then choose OK. Surface. To plane. 2. one of which must contain only one surface. which gives you the option to trim surfaces to a plane. and you can keep. but it may take longer to calculate the trimmed surfaces than Fixed step. Curve. However. in this function no curves are created.

Choose Do it. select a surface from the first set. 75 . Press [Esc] to exit the function. Move the base of the arrow to the area of the surface to keep after trimming. Repeat for a surface from the second set. try performing the function on it separately from the other surfaces. select a surface from the second set. then click. Move the base of the arrow to the area of the surface to keep after trimming. 4. If you do not get the trimming results you want on a particular surface. Note: If you selected more than one surface in step 2. you must select only one surface in this step.3. Trim/extend. then click. Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method. but it may take longer to calculate the trimmed surfaces than Fixed step. Move the base of the arrow to the area of the surface to keep after trimming. 5. Select one or more surfaces for the second set of surfaces. Curve. To surfaces. which gives you the option to trim two sets of surfaces to their intersections. However. then choose Done. Surface. ¨ This function is similar to the Create. Intersect function. which may produce unintended results. then click. 6. then choose OK. then take one of the following actions: ¨ If in step 4 you chose to trim only the first set of surfaces. Set the step method and trimming parameters. ¨ The following graphics show one surface trimmed to its intersection with another surface. Note: Avoid selecting the outer boundary of the surface. ¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. Choose Options. Notes: ¨ Mastercam trims the surfaces based on the section of the selected surface(s) that you keep in step 5. in this function no curves are created. select a surface from the first set. Create. ¨ If in step 4 you chose to trim only the second set of surfaces. ¨ If in step 4 you chose to trim both sets of surfaces.

Surface. Flat bndy. then choose OK. Trim. Choose Done to return to the Flat Boundary menu. which defines the outer boundary of the surface. If you selected any open chains in step 3. 76 . Additional chains must be nested within this boundary. Notes: ¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. 4. Create. Choose Options. there must be one outermost chain. Use the chaining methods on the Flat Boundary menu to select one or more planar chains of curves.Creating a trimmed surface within a flat boundary This function creates a trimmed NURBS surface within a flat boundary defined by chain(s) of curves or surface edges. 2. For information on manual chaining. Note: If you choose Yes. Flat bndy. Choose Main Menu. Choose Yes to close the chains or No to remove the open chains from calculation of the trimmed surface. ¨ You can use the Manual chaining method to select surface edges and surface curves. it creates and blanks an untrimmed base (parent) surface. Mastercam displays the message shown below. Choose Do it to create the flat boundary surface. 5. Surface. Trim/extend. Set the step method. but it may take longer to calculate the trimmed surfaces than Fixed step. 3. Notes: ¨ If selecting multiple chains. 1. When Mastercam trims a surface to the boundary. see Manual chaining. 6. Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method. Nested chains form holes in the flat boundary surface. Mastercam calculates (but does not create) a curve between the two open endpoints for the purpose of defining the closed boundary. Modify.

Trim. Choose OK to split the surface along the current direction (reflected by the arrow on the surface) or choose Flip to reverse the direction before choosing OK. then click. Note: You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. Modify. 3. Choose Main Menu. Untrim. The flat boundary surface has two holes from the nested chains. Trim/extend. type [S] to activate snapping. Surface. 77 . Untrimming a surface 1. it creates two trimmed surfaces and blanks the original surface. 4. Note: To enter a point at the position of an existing point. Modify. 5.¨ The following graphics show the resulting surface when all three chains are selected. Create. Select a surface in the graphics window. Surface. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to split additional surfaces. move the cursor crosshairs over the point. then click. When the system breaks the selected surface. Splitting a surface into two trimmed surfaces This function breaks a surface at a fixed position along one of the surface directions. Press [Esc] to exit the function. set Dispose to D. 1. Trim. 2. ¨ Choose Main Menu. 6. Move the base of the arrow to the position you want the split to pass through on the surface (the fixed position). Note: You may need to rotate the geometry to bring the arrow into view. 2. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. Take one of the following actions: To untrim a surface by deleting it and unblanking its untrimmed base surface. Split. Split. Surface.

If you selected an internal boundary (hole) and the surface contains multiple internal boundaries. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to remove trimmed boundaries from additional surfaces. 3. If the trimmed surface contains only one hole. 5. Select a trimmed surface in the graphics window. Mastercam closes it by removing the trimmed surface and replacing it with the untrimmed base surface. Create. set Dispose to K. Isometric). or No to fill only the selected hole. Mastercam closes the hole by removing the trimmed boundary. Mastercam displays the following prompt: Choose Yes to fill all of the internal holes. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. 4. 1. Note: You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. Surface. You do not receive this prompt. Trim. You can fill internal holes (those that lie completely within the outer boundary of the surface) and external holes (those that lie along the outer boundary of the surface). 2. 3. you may need to switch to isometric view (Gview. Slide the base of the arrow to a trimmed boundary that you want to fill. Note: If you selected an external trimmed boundary. 78 . Select a trimmed surface in the graphics window. Surface. Mastercam closes the hole by removing the boundary. Choose Main Menu. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Untrim. 5. Removing a trimmed boundary from a surface The Remove Boundary function lets you fill holes in a trimmed surface. then left-click. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to untrim additional surfaces. For each hole that you select to fill. Note: To see the arrow. Trim/extend. Modify. or press [Esc] to exit the function. ¨ To return a base surface to the graphics window and blank the trimmed surface. Mastercam returns its base surface to the graphics window and disposes of the trimmed surface according to the selection made in step 2.¨ To return a base surface to the graphics window and keep the trimmed surface visible in the graphics window. set Dispose to B. Remove bndy. 4.

This condition is true for all flat boundary surfaces because the base surface of a flat boundary surface always extends beyond the outer boundary of the flat boundary surface. Create. Trim/extend. the hole that gets filled is defined as the space between the trimmed and the untrimmed boundaries. ¨ If you select the outer boundary of a trimmed surface and that boundary does touch the outer boundary of the untrimmed base surface (regardless of whether the base surface is currently displayed or is blanked). ¨ If you select the outer boundary of a trimmed surface and that boundary does not touch the outer boundary of the untrimmed base surface (regardless of whether the base surface is currently displayed or is blanked). Remove bndy. 79 . no trimmed boundaries are removed.Notes: ¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. Surface. as shown in the following example. as shown in the following example. ¨ This function differs from the Fill Holes function in which Mastercam creates trimmed surfaces to fill the holes. the hole that gets filled is defined as the space between the trimmed and the untrimmed boundaries but only along the selected trimmed edge until it reaches the untrimmed boundary. see the related topics below. For more information.

Note: If you selected an external trimmed boundary. Mastercam displays the following prompt: Choose Yes to fill all of the internal holes.Filling a trimmed boundary in a surface The Fill Holes function lets you fill holes in a trimmed surface. You can fill internal holes (those that lie completely within the outer boundary of the surface) and external holes (those that lie along the trimmed outer boundary of the surface). 3. 2. Isometric). Trim. Note: To see the arrow. Modify. If you selected an internal boundary (hole) and the surface contains multiple internal boundaries. Mastercam closes the hole by creating a trimmed surface within it. 4. Select a trimmed surface in the graphics window. Surface. then left-click. you may need to switch to isometric view (Gview. Slide the base of the arrow to a trimmed boundary that you want to fill. 5. Choose Main Menu. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to fill holes in additional surfaces. Fill holes. 1. For each hole that you select to fill. 80 . Mastercam creates a trimmed surface within the boundary defined by the hole. You do not receive this prompt. or press [Esc] to exit the function. or No to fill only the selected hole.

Create. Trim/extend. ¨ If you select the outer boundary of a trimmed surface and that boundary does not touch the outer boundary of the untrimmed base surface (regardless of whether the base surface is currently displayed or is blanked). as shown in the following example. 81 . This condition is true for all flat boundary surfaces because the base surface of a flat boundary surface always extends beyond the outer boundary of the flat boundary surface. For more information. ¨ This function differs from the Remove Boundary function in which Mastercam removes the trimmed boundaries but nothing new is created. Fill holes. the hole that gets filled is defined as the space between the trimmed and the untrimmed boundaries. as shown in the following example. the hole that gets filled is defined as the space between the trimmed and the untrimmed boundaries but only along the selected trimmed edge until it reaches the untrimmed boundary. ¨ If you select the outer boundary of a trimmed surface and that boundary does touch the outer boundary of the untrimmed base surface (regardless of whether the base surface is currently displayed or is blanked). Surface.Notes: ¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. see the related topics below.

Choosing No tells the system not to extend the surface. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Trim/extend. Choose Length. 9. 10. you cannot extend curve-generated surfaces linearly and have them remain curvegenerated. Choosing Yes tells the system to create a NURBS approximation of the surface. Create. or curve-generated) as the original surface. and you can choose to keep. ¨ When possible. 7. 82 . Note: This step is not necessary if Linear is set to N. 4. 3. Extend. You can extend the surface linearly or following the curvature of the surface. 1. In the prompt area. Notes: ¨ ¨ You can extend trimmed surfaces only along untrimmed edges. enter the length to extend the surface. it creates the extended surface as a new surface. or delete the original surface. Choose Do it to extend the surface. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. 6. Note: You can perform this step repeatedly to extend the surface incrementally by the defined length. You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. 2. the system cannot extend all surfaces precisely. 5. then click.Extending a surface by a defined length This function extends a surface by a defined length. In such cases. Repeat steps 5 through 7 to extend additional surfaces. Modify. When Mastercam extends a surface. However. For example. blank. Mastercam displays the prompt shown below. NURBS. Surface. Extend. Mastercam creates the extended surface using the same surface type (parametric. Select a surface in the graphics window. Surface. as needed. Choose Main Menu. Move the base of the arrow to the edge to extend. Set Linear to Y to extend the surface linearly or to N to extend the surface according to the curvature of the surface. 8. Set other parameters on the Extend Surface menu. Set To plane to N.

6. Extend. Mastercam creates the extended surface using the same surface type (parametric. Mastercam displays the prompt shown below. the system cannot extend all surfaces precisely. ¨ When possible. Surface. blank. and you can choose to keep. Choosing No tells the system not to extend the surface. Use the Define Plane menu to define the plane to extend the surface to. When Mastercam extends a surface. Select a surface in the graphics window. 2. blank. For example. Choose Do it to extend the surface. 83 . it creates the extended surface as a new surface. You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. Notes: ¨ ¨ You can extend trimmed surfaces only along untrimmed edges. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. Set Linear to Y. Surface. Move the base of the arrow to the edge to extend. Press [Esc] to exit the function. or curve-generated) as the original surface. or delete the original surface. Set other parameters on the Extend Surface menu. as needed. Trim/extend. Choose Plane. In such cases. When Mastercam extends a surface. it creates the extended surface as a new surface. Extend. 3. Create. 4. then click. Choosing Yes tells the system to create a NURBS approximation of the surface.Extending a surface to a plane This function extends a surface linearly to a defined plane. or delete the original surface. and you can choose to keep. you cannot extend curve-generated surfaces linearly and have them remain curvegenerated. NURBS. 8. Set To plane to Y. Extending a surface by a defined length This function extends a surface by a defined length. 9. You can extend the surface linearly or following the curvature of the surface. 7. Choose Main Menu. 1. Modify. However. 5.

Mastercam displays the prompt shown below. Note: This step is not necessary if Linear is set to N. Extend. then click. blank. 7. 84 . Choose Main Menu. or delete the original surface. Surface. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. Use the Define Plane menu to define the plane to extend the surface to. 3. or curve-generated) as the original surface. Set Linear to Y.1. For example. Move the base of the arrow to the edge to extend. Choose Plane. Choosing No tells the system not to extend the surface. enter the length to extend the surface. 5. When Mastercam extends a surface. as needed. and you can choose to keep. NURBS. Set other parameters on the Extend Surface menu. Select a surface in the graphics window. ¨ When possible. 4. Extending a surface to a plane This function extends a surface linearly to a defined plane. Choose Main Menu. 9. Choosing Yes tells the system to create a NURBS approximation of the surface. 8. 10. Surface. Set To plane to N. 1. In such cases. the system cannot extend all surfaces precisely. it creates the extended surface as a new surface. Extend. Mastercam creates the extended surface using the same surface type (parametric. 2. Modify. In the prompt area. Repeat steps 5 through 7 to extend additional surfaces. Extend. Notes: ¨ ¨ You can extend trimmed surfaces only along untrimmed edges. Set Linear to Y to extend the surface linearly or to N to extend the surface according to the curvature of the surface. You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. you cannot extend curve-generated surfaces linearly and have them remain curvegenerated. 3. Choose Length. Surface. However. Choose Do it to extend the surface. 4. 2. Modify. Set To plane to Y. Create. Trim/extend. 6. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Note: You can perform this step repeatedly to extend the surface incrementally by the defined length.

However. as needed. Choose Flip to reverse the blend direction. then left-click. Extend. or curve-generated) as the original surface. 2 surf blnd. then choose OK to set the direction.5. Mastercam displays the prompt shown below. 2. Mastercam creates a temporary surface between the two blending splines and displays the 2 Surface Blending menu. Create. 1. This function is useful for eliminating unwanted features in order to smooth out part of a surface model. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for a second surface. 9. Next menu. see Blend direction example. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. as needed. Move the base of the arrow to the edge to extend. Select a surface. You can extend trimmed surfaces only along untrimmed edges. Choose Do it to extend the surface. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. Notes: ¨ ¨ Set other parameters on the Extend Surface menu. Note: To receive help on the menu options. Trim/extend. Create. Note: To select a blend location at an existing point. 3. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Move the base of the arrow over the desired point. then choose Do it to create the blend surface. For example. if necessary. Mastercam creates a temporary blending spline on the surface. You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. type [S] to activate snapping. Define the location and width of the tangent surface: Move the base of the arrow to the location where you want to blend the new surface to the existing surface. the system cannot extend all surfaces precisely. Note: For an example of how the blend direction affects the resulting surface. Blending two surfaces Mastercam blends two surfaces by creating a third surface that is tangent to the first two surfaces. 7. Surface. 6. then click to set the blend location. 6. In such cases. Mastercam creates the extended surface using the same surface type (parametric. 85 . NURBS. Set parameters on the 2 Surface Blending menu. ¨ When possible. then click. Surface. you cannot extend curve-generated surfaces linearly and have them remain curvegenerated. Select a surface in the graphics window. 5. press [Alt+H]. 8. Choosing No tells the system not to extend the surface. Choosing Yes tells the system to create a NURBS approximation of the surface. 4. Choose Main Menu.

see Adjusting the boundaries of a fillet blend surface. If the Sides parameter is set to 3. 3. Surface. 4. Select a surface. press [Alt+H]. Surface. 2. Next menu. 1. Create. 1. see Blend direction example. if necessary. take one of the following actions: ¨ Manually adjust one or more of the boundaries. Note: To receive help on the menu options. Mastercam creates a temporary surface between the three blending splines and displays the 3 Surface Blending menu. Set parameters on the 3 Surface Blending menu." It is similar to blending three surfaces. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for two additional surfaces. Note: For an example of how the blend direction affects the resulting surface. For more information.Blending three surfaces Mastercam blends three surfaces by creating a fourth surface that is tangent to the first three surfaces. Blending three intersecting fillet surfaces Mastercam blends three intersecting fillet surfaces by creating one or more surfaces that are tangent to the first three surfaces. as well as whether the resulting surfaces are trimmed or untrimmed. as needed. Choose Main Menu. with this option Mastercam automatically calculates the location where the blend surface(s) are tangent to the fillet surfaces. then click to set the blend location. 2. then select three fillet surfaces. ¨ Toggle Trim. as needed. Note: The selected geometry determines the number of surfaces that the system creates. as needed. Define the location and width of the tangent surface: Move the base of the arrow to the location where you want to blend the new surface to the existing surface. Dispose. This function is useful for eliminating unwanted features in order to smooth out part of a surface model. then choose OK to set the direction. Create. Otherwise. Mastercam creates a temporary blending spline on the surface. and Edge spl to new settings. 5. Choose Main Menu. 6. Move the base of the arrow over the desired point. then choose Do it to create the blend surface. 3 surf blnd. Next menu. type [S] to activate snapping. Note: To select a blend location at an existing point. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. then left-click. However. This function is useful for rounding the corners of a filleted "box. Fillet blnd. Set parameters on the 3 Fillet Blend menu. Mastercam creates a three-sided blend surface. Choose Flip to reverse the blend direction. 86 .

and Blend surfaces. To understand the relationship between dependent entities. for Coons. entity or entities as the "parent" and the resultant. Parametric The parametric method of storing surface information is analogous to the parametric method of storing spline information. However. NURBS surfaces have the following characteristics: ¨ ¨ Require less data storage than parametric surfaces." which depends on the parent for its definition. or generating. Each type describes a method that the system uses to calculate and store mathematical data about the surface. Choose Do it to create the six-sided fillet blend surface. 3. Entity association occurs between the following entities: ¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ Between curve-generated surfaces and their reference curves Between offset surfaces and their generating surfaces Between trimmed surfaces and their generating (base) surfaces Between surface curves and the surfaces on which they lie Surface types Mastercam lets you create three types of surfaces: parametric. Surface associativity Entity association refers to the dependent relationship between one entity and a second entity or group of entities from which the first entity is generated. However. In addition.¨ Choose Select to toggle Sides to a new setting and/or reselect the three fillet surfaces that you want to blend. or generated. entity as the "child. However. In addition. a NURBS surface expands the string of control points in a second direction resulting in a grid. parametric surfaces have the following characteristics: ¨ ¨ ¨ NURBS The NURBS method of storing surface information is analogous to the NURBS method of storing spline information. NURBS. For most Create. you can choose from all three surface types. but with slightly more computing time Compatible with IGES conversion 87 Compatible with IGES and VDA conversions Not associated with their generating curves Require a large amount of data storage . and curve-generated. A patch is an area of the surface bounded by four segments of generating curves. Swept. Surface options. think of the original. you can choose only Parametric and NURBS. a parametric surface expands each curve segment in a second direction resulting in a patch. Each surface type is described below.

The options are: ¨ Parametric – curves defined by coefficients or nodes. it stores a direct reference back to the original curves. 1. Curve-generated or NURBS if curve generation is not permitted. 4. Screen. Choose the CAD Settings tab. You can analyze a surface to determine if it is bicubic. Configure. While these types will be generated by default. surfaces that you bring in from another source using the File. Choose OK to enact all settings from all tabs and close the dialog box. See Surface types for more information on surface types. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. 3. The System Configuration dialog box opens. Converters function can be output to VDA only if they are bicubic (mathematical degree 3 by 3). curve-generated surfaces have the following characteristics: ¨ ¨ Require less data storage than parametric or NURBS surfaces Associated with their generating curves Note: Curve-generated surfaces store exact data about their generating curves (rather than approximations). you can also select a type at the time you create the spline or surface. Do one of the following: Enter or choose other defaults. 88 . Specifying spline and surface type defaults The CAD Settings tab of the System Configuration dialog box lets you specify the type of spline or surface Mastercam will create by default whenever you create a spline or surface. ¨ Not associated with their generating curves Curve-generated When the system stores a surface as a curve-generated surface. In addition.¨ Can be output to VDA file format (if created in Mastercam) Note: Due to limitations with the VDA file format. also the surfaces defined from them. Select the default spline and surface type from the Spline/Surface creation type drop down menu. ¨ ¨ Curve-generated or parametric if curve generation is not permitted. ¨ NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline) – curves defined by knots or control points. also the surfaces defined from them. 2.

then choose OK. then click. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. Note: You can choose Flip to reverse the current direction before choosing OK. Note: You may need to rotate the geometry to bring the arrow into view. Click on the topics below for more information. arcs. While this menu is displayed. 4. Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method. Const param. Move the base of the arrow to the position you want the curve to pass through on the surface (the fixed position). 89 . Creating constant parameter curves on a surface You can create a curve in one or both surface directions at a fixed position (constant parameter) on the surface. Creating curves on surfaces and solids The Curve menu gives you options for creating lines. You can access the Surface Display menu by choosing Main Menu. Curve. Create. Back color. 2. Curve. Select a step method and set the types of curves to create. 5. 6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional curves. 3. ¨ box. Create. 1. Screen. and Density) are shown in the prompt area. Choose No to use the settings only for the current Mastercam session. Select a surface in the graphics window.Choose Yes to update the current Configuration File. Choose Main Menu. You can access this menu by choosing Main Menu. Choose Options. Note: To enter a point at the position of an existing point. Choose Cancel to abandon all changes made to this as well as to other tabs and close the dialog Setting the display of surfaces and solids The Surface Display menu gives you options for specifying how surfaces and solids appear in the graphics window. splines on surfaces and solids and for creating surface curves on surfaces. type [S] to activate snapping. move the cursor crosshairs over the point. current surface display settings (Show back. then click. but it may take longer to calculate the curves than other step methods. Choose OK to create a curve in the current direction (reflected by the arrow on the selected surface) or Both to create a curve in both directions. Surf disp.

Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the solid Note: You may need to rotate the geometry to bring the arrow into view. 5. Note: To enter a point at the position of an existing point. Curve. then click. then click. Select a step method. but it may take longer to calculate the curves than other step methods. face. Creating constant parameter curves on a solid face You can create a curve in one or both solid face directions at a fixed position (constant parameter) on the face. 7. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 6. 1. Move the base of the arrow to the position you want the curve to pass through on the solid face (the fixed position). Repeat steps 2 through 6 to create additional curves. Const param. Choose OK. Choose Options. or constant parameter. Choose Main Menu. 3. In the following example. Note: An easy way to visualize the directions of a surface or solid face is to look at its wireframe display. Choose OK to create a curve in the current direction (reflected by the arrow on the selected face) or Both to create a curve in both directions. then check Splines and select a spline type. 90 .7. Choose Solid face. 2. Create. Note: You can choose Flip to reverse the current direction before choosing OK. The red lines represent the two constant parameter curves created on the surface. type [S] to activate snapping. 4. one in each direction. The point where the constant parameter curves intersect is the fixed position. Select a solid face in the graphics window. Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method. the green lines represent the wireframe display of a surface. move the cursor crosshairs over the point.

8.

Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: An easy way to visualize the directions of a surface or solid face is to look at its wireframe display. In the following example, the green lines represent the wireframe display of a surface. The red lines represent the two constant parameter curves created on the surface, one in each direction. The point where the constant parameter curves intersect is the fixed position, or constant parameter.

Creating parametric splines along the patch boundaries of a parametric surface 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Patch bndy. Select a parametric surface. Mastercam creates parametric splines along the patch boundaries. Repeat step 2 to create splines along the patch boundaries of additional surfaces. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: This function does not work with bicubic (degree 3, or order 4) parametric surfaces, such as those created with the Create, Rectangle function.

Creating flowline curves on a surface This function creates multiple curves on a surface in one direction of the surface. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Flowline. Select a surface in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on the surface.

3. Select the curve direction: Choose OK to accept the current direction or choose Flip to reverse the direction, then choose OK. 4. The prompt area reflects the current method used to calculate the number of curves that Mastercam will create on the surface. To change the calculation method, choose Number, Dist(ance), or Toler(ance), then enter a value in the prompt area. 5. Choose Options. Select a step method and set the types of curves to create, then choose OK.

91

Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method, but it may take longer to calculate the curves than other step methods. 6. 7. 8. Choose Do it to create the curves. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to create additional curves. Press [Esc] to exit the option.

Note: An easy way to visualize the directions of a surface or solid face is to look at its wireframe display. In the following examples, the green lines represent the wireframe display of a surface. The red lines represent flowline curves created on the surface in different directions.

Creating flowline curves on a solid face

This function creates multiple curves on a solid face in one direction of the solid face. 1. 2. 3. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Flowline. Choose Solid face. Select a solid face in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on the face.

4. Select the curve direction: Choose OK to accept the current direction or choose Flip to reverse the direction, then choose OK. 5. The prompt area reflects the current method used to calculate the number of curves that Mastercam will create on the surface. To change the calculation method, choose Number, Dist(ance), or Toler(ance), then enter a value in the prompt area. 6. Choose Options. Select a step method, then check Splines and select a spline type. Choose OK.

92

Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method, but it may take longer to calculate the curves than other step methods. 7. 8. 9. Choose Do it to create the curves Repeat steps 2 through 7 to create additional curves. Press [Esc] to exit the option.

Note: An easy way to visualize the directions of a surface or solid face is to look at its wireframe display. In the following examples, the green lines represent the wireframe display of a surface. The red lines represent flowline curves created on the surface in different directions. Creating a curve at any position on a surface 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Dynamic. Choose Options. Set the type of entities to create, then choose OK. Select a surface in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. Move the base of the arrow to position the first endpoint of the curve on the surface, then click.

Note: To set the endpoint at the position of an existing point entity, type [S] to activate snapping, move the cursor crosshairs over the point, then click. 5. Repeat step 4 to enter additional points through which you want the curve to pass.

Note: The resulting curve passes through the points in the order you enter them. You must enter a minimum of two points, one for each endpoint of the curve. 6. 7. 8. Notes: ¨ If you choose to create a spline in step 2, the points that you enter in steps 4 and 5 represent nodes where the spline lies directly on the surface. ¨ If you choose to create a surface curve in step 2, it lies completely on the surface. Creating a spline at any position on a solid face 1. 2. 3. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Dynamic. Choose Options. Check Splines, select a spline type, then choose OK. Choose Solid face. 93 Press [Esc] to create the curve. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to create additional curves. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

4. 5.

Select a solid face in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the face. Move the base of the arrow to position the first endpoint of the spline on the face, then click.

Note: To set the endpoint at the position of an existing point entity, type [S] to activate snapping, move the cursor crosshairs over the point, then click. 6. Repeat step 5 to enter additional points through which you want the spline to pass.

Note: The resulting spline passes through the points in the order you enter them. You must enter a minimum of two points, one for each endpoint of the spline. 7. 8. 9. Press [Esc] to create the spline and exit the function. Repeat steps 3 through 7 to create additional splines. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: The points that you enter in steps 5 and 6 represent nodes where the resulting spline lies directly on the solid face.

Creating curves at the intersections of a slice plane with surfaces and solids This function slices selected surfaces and solids with a plane and creates curves along the intersections of the plane with the selected entities. You also have options to create the curves at offset positions, to create curves at a defined spacing interval from the intersections, and to trim the surfaces to the resulting curves. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Slice. Select one or more surfaces, solids, and/or solid faces, then choose Done.

3. Define the slice plane. Mastercam displays a temporary graphic of the plane in the graphics window. 4. Set parameters on the Slice Curve menu, then choose Do it to create the curves.

Note: Choose Options to access additional parameters. 5. If prompted, select a highlighted surface to trim. Move the base of the arrow to the side of the surface that you want to keep after trimming, then click. 6. Note: ¨ If trimming is active, Mastercam trims all of the selected surfaces based on the selection you make in step 5. If you do not get the trimming results you want on a particular surface, try performing the function on it separately from the other surfaces. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

94

¨ The first graphic shows a selected surface and the slice plane that intersects it. The second graphic shows the resulting curve (red) on the surface, which has been trimmed back to the curve.

Creating curves at the intersections of two sets of surfaces and solids This function creates curves at the intersections between two sets of surfaces and solids. Mastercam pairs each entity in the first set with each entity in the second set and creates curves at the intersecting locations. 1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Intersect.

2. Select one or more surfaces, solids, and/or solid faces for the first set of entities, then choose Done. Note: You can select solids and solid faces in the first set only. 3. 4. Select one or more surfaces for the second set of entities, then choose Done. Set parameters on the Intersection Curve menu, then choose Do it to create the curves.

Note: Choose Options to access additional parameters. 5. If prompted, select a highlighted surface to trim. Move the base of the arrow to the side of the surface that you want to keep after trimming, then click. If prompted again, repeat for a second surface. 95

if you have multiple surface walls and a single surface floor in one set. one on each of the intersecting surfaces. the system looks for intersections only between each wall and the floor. you select the walls as one set of surfaces and the floor as the second set of surfaces. ¨ The first graphic shows two shaded intersecting surfaces. The second graphic shows the same surfaces in wireframe view. If. ¨ If trimming is active. The red lines are the curves that were created along the surface intersections.6. Mastercam attempts to create curves by pairing each surface in the set with every other surface in the set. Mastercam trims both sets of surfaces based on the selections you make in step 5. ¨ If you choose to create surface curves. 96 . having only one set of surfaces could prove more time consuming. the system looks for intersections between all walls and the floor. In certain instances. For example. you must select two sets of surfaces and one set must contain only one surface. you may select them in one set containing a minimum of two surfaces. In this case. If you do not get the trimming results you want on a particular surface. ¨ In order to trim surfaces to the intersection curves. ¨ If you choose to intersect only surfaces. however. Mastercam creates two surface curves for each intersection. however. Notes: Press [Esc] to exit the function. try performing the function on it separately from the other surfaces.

2. Select one or more surfaces. solids. Notes: ¨ If trimming is active. then choose Do it to project the curves. and/or solid faces. 6. Mastercam trims all of the selected surfaces based on the selection you make in step 5. Move the base of the arrow to the side of the surface that you want to keep after trimming. Create. ¨ In the following graphic. 97 . If you do not get the trimming results you want on a particular surface. 5. then choose Done. Project. Press [Esc] to exit the function. then choose Done. select a highlighted surface to trim. If prompted. Choose View.Projecting curves onto surfaces and solids 1. 3. then select the view to use to generate the parting line curves. Part line. try performing the function on it separately from the other surfaces. 3. solids. Creating parting line curves on surfaces and solids 1. 2. and/or solid faces. Curve. 4. the green circle has been projected onto the surface. then click. Select one or more chains of curves to project. Choose Main Menu. Note: Choose Options to access additional parameters. Create. The red circle is the resulting curve. Set parameters on the Projection Curve menu. then choose Done. Select one or more surfaces. Curve. Choose Main Menu.

2. If prompted. Move the base of the arrow to the surface edge where you want to create the curve. 5. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. the red line represents the parting line curve. Move the base of the arrow to the side of the surface that you want to keep after trimming. Choose Break angle. ¨ This function is often used with mold-making. then choose Do it to create the curves. then click to create the curve. Press [Esc] to exit the function. ¨ In the following graphic. 98 . One edge. 4. Curve. but it may take longer to calculate the curves than other step methods. select a highlighted surface to trim. where the surface wraps out of view. If you do not get the trimming results you want on a particular surface. Note: This step is necessary only when creating curves along trimmed surfaces. 3. and the gray lines represent the back of the surface (negative surface normal). Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method. The green lines represent the front of the surface (positive surface normal). Create. Creating a curve along one edge of a surface 1. Notes: ¨ If trimming is active. then choose OK. Choose Main Menu. 5. Choose Options. Mastercam trims all of the selected surfaces based on the selection you make in step 5. Note: Choose Options to access additional parameters.4. try performing the function on it separately from the other surfaces. Select a Step Method and Spline Type. Select a surface in the graphics window. then click. enter a break angle value. Set the remaining parameters on the Parting Line Curve menu. 6. In the prompt area.

Select a solid edge in the graphics window. 4. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Choose Main Menu. Select one or more surfaces. but it may take longer to calculate the curves than other step methods. representation of the solid edge. Mastercam outputs a line. 3. 2. arc. Curve. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Press [Esc] to exit the function. then choose Done. Choose Main Menu. 6. Mastercam outputs an arc. However. Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method. Mastercam creates a curve on the selected edge. Create. or NURBS spline based on the simplest. Choose Do it to create the curves. if the resulting curve is linear. Note: Mastercam creates a line. Set Step Method and Spline Type. Choose From solid from the One Edge Curve menu. Creating curves along all edges of selected surfaces and solids 1. 2. and/or solid faces. Note: This step is necessary only when creating curves along trimmed surfaces. 99 . Note: The other One Edge Curve menu options pertain to creating curves along surface edges and do not need to be set when creating curves on solid edges. 5. Note: Mastercam creates a NURBS or parametric spline (depending on the spline type you selected in step 2).6. 4. 3. and if the resulting curve is round. then choose OK. yet exact. All edges. Repeat step 3 to create additional curves along solid edges. solids. then choose Done. In the prompt area. enter a break angle value. Create. One edge. Creating a curve along one edge of a solid 1. 7. 5. Choose Options. Choose Break angle. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to create additional curves along surface edges. Curve.

Specifying spline and surface type defaults The CAD Settings tab of the System Configuration dialog box lets you specify the type of spline or surface Mastercam will create by default whenever you create a spline or surface. representation of the solid edge. Mastercam creates a NURBS or parametric spline (depending on the spline type you selected in step 3). and if the resulting curve is round. See Surface types for more information on surface types. However. Select the default spline and surface type from the Spline/Surface creation type drop down menu. Choose the CAD Settings tab. Curve-generated or NURBS if curve generation is not permitted. Mastercam creates a line. ¨ For solids. 4. Screen.Notes: ¨ Steps 3 and 4 affect the creation of curves on surfaces. 2. you can also select a type at the time you create the spline or surface. you can omit these steps. if the resulting curve is linear. ¨ ¨ Curve-generated or parametric if curve generation is not permitted. Configure. While these types will be generated by default. 3. ¨ box. ¨ NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline) – curves defined by knots or control points. Mastercam outputs an arc. yet exact. 1. ¨ For surfaces. Mastercam outputs a line. or NURBS spline based on the simplest. Choose Yes to update the current Configuration File. arc. Choose Cancel to abandon all changes made to this as well as to other tabs and close the dialog 100 . The System Configuration dialog box opens. also the surfaces defined from them. Choose No to use the settings only for the current Mastercam session. If your selection in step 2 contains only solids. The options are: ¨ Parametric – curves defined by coefficients or nodes. Choose OK to enact all settings from all tabs and close the dialog box. also the surfaces defined from them. Do one of the following: Enter or choose other defaults. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu.

Merge functions. Choose Main Menu. The System Configuration dialog box opens. choose Yes to delete both the selected entities and the associated entities or No to cancel the delete command. Get or File. you can recover the deleted entities. Deleting duplicate entities when opening files Duplicate entities make files larger than necessary and interfere with chaining.Deleting and restoring entities The Delete menu gives you options for deleting entities and restoring deleted entities. Use the mouse to select single entities to delete or use a selection method from the Delete menu to select multiple entities. Choose Main Menu. Delete. then choose OK. 2. The Delete Duplicates dialog box appears. Note: For information on how to use the selection methods available in step 2. 4. see Entity selection. 5. see Restoring deleted entities. 3. Check Delete duplicate entities when saving to delete entities. 2. Choose the Start/Exit tab. Note: If necessary. Deleting selected entities 1. You can access the Delete menu by choosing Delete from the Main Menu. Choose All to define the duplicate entities to delete based on entity type. Mastercam notifies you of the number of entities deleted. 4. Configure. If prompted that there are entities associated with your selection. 1. Mastercam highlights the duplicate entities and displays the number of each type of duplicate entity in the prompt area. Duplicate. 2. Press [Enter] to delete the duplicate entities and return to the Delete menu. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Deleting duplicate entities 1. or clear it to leave duplicate entities in the file. Click on the topics below for more information. 3. Choose the attributes for the duplicate entities to delete. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 101 . Screen. The Start/Exit tab of the System Configuration dialog box lets you automatically delete duplicate entities when a file is opened using the File. For more information. 4. ¨ Do one of the following: Enter or choose other defaults. Choose Main Menu. Delete. 3.

Choose No to use the settings only for the current Mastercam session. All. Undelete. 2. Choose Cancel to abandon all changes made to this as well as to other tabs and close the dialog Restoring deleted entities The Undelete menu gives you options for restoring deleted entities to the graphics window. In the prompt area. Number. For information on using the All menu. Delete. Single. ¨ box. Restoring all entities of a specified definition 1. Notes: ¨ ¨ Mastercam restores entities in the reverse order in which they were deleted. 2. see Selecting all entities of a specified type. enter the number of entities to restore. Mastercam restores entities in the reverse order in which they were deleted. Choose Main Menu. Undelete. Restoring a single deleted entity ¨ Choose Main Menu. Note: You can set the number of deleted entities that can be restored on the Allocations tab of the System Configuration dialog box (Screen. Choose Main Menu. Note: Mastercam restores entities in the reverse order in which they were deleted. Click on the topics below for more information. 102 . Delete. Delete. Choose Yes to update the current Configuration File.¨ Choose OK to enact all settings from all tabs and close the dialog box. Note: Mastercam restores entities in the reverse order in which they were deleted. Restoring multiple entities 1. Use the All menu to define the entities to restore based on entity type and attributes. Undelete. Configure).

You can mirror all geometric and drafting entity types. 5. Choose OK to mirror the entities. 3. rotating. see Defining a mirror axis. 2. 103 . Xform. To mirror the text. you have the option to mirror the text or to prevent the text from being reversed or turned upside down in the mirrored image. You can access the Xform menu by choosing Xform from the Main Menu. 1. scaling. select the type of operation to perform: Move. Copy. To prevent mirrored text from being turned upside down or reversed. and a negative angle results in a clockwise rotation. For more information. Click on the topics below for more information. When you perform a transform function. Mastercam creates a temporary group from the original entities and a result from the transformed entities. You can rotate all geometric and drafting entity types. then choose Done. Choose Main Menu. Mirror. Mastercam displays the Mirror menu. With some functions. Set the mirror axis to the X axis. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to mirror additional entities. see Working with groups. You have the option to move or copy the original entities within the drawing. A positive angle results in a counterclockwise rotation. clear the option. Rotate. translating. On the Mirror dialog box. you have the option to join the copied entities to the originals. Rotating entities Rotating is the process of moving selected entities or one or more copies of the entities around a point by a defined angle. or Join. 4. Xform. The angle is calculated relative to the horizontal axis of the current construction plane. 2. Select one or more entities to rotate. Mirroring entities Mirroring is the process of creating mirror images of entities by reflecting them symmetrically with respect to a defined axis. offsetting. 1. 8.Transforming entities The Xform menu gives you options for moving entities and optionally creating copies of them by mirroring. and rolling them. If your selection contains one or more drafting notes or labels. Press [Esc]to exit the function. stretching. 7. Select one or more entities to mirror. Y axis. then choose Done. check the option. When your selection includes drafting notes or labels. Mastercam enables the Mirror label and note text option. Choose Main Menu. Take one of the following actions: ¨ ¨ 6. Note: To see graphics showing how different mirror axes affect the transformed entities. a line or 2 points in the graphics window.

104 . You can use this function to scale all geometric and drafting entity types. Copy. select the type of operation to perform: Move. The entities will be scaled relative to this point. 1. Xform. 3. Press [Esc]to exit the function. 5. The color purple indicates the result of the transform operation after the original entities are rotated by negative 45 degrees (clockwise). 2. then choose OK to rotate the entities. or Join. Choose Main Menu. On the Scale dialog box. Scale. 5. On the Rotate dialog box. the increase or decrease is proportional along all axes (XYZ). 7. Notes: Enter a point to rotate the entities about. Copy. 4. select the type of operation to perform: Move. then choose Done. Scaling entities using a single scale factor Scaling increases or decreases the size of entities by a factor relative to a defined point. Enter a value for Rotation angle and Number of steps. or Join. 6. then choose OK to scale the entities. Enter a point in the graphics window. Enter a value for Scale factor and Number of steps. The color red indicates the group of entities selected for the transform operation. 4. The Scale dialog box displays. ¨ The following graphic shows geometry rotated about the yellow point. When a single scale factor is used. 6. Select one or more entities to scale.3. Select Uniform in the scaling area. The entities change size while maintaining their original shape. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to rotate additional entities.

Note: A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the object. The color purple indicates the result of each transform operation after the original entities are scaled by a factor of 3 (triple their original size). you can manually regenerate the dimension to the correct value. Scale. The Scale dialog box displays. 7. Scaling both the geometry and the associated dimension causes the dimension value to no longer match the geometry. You can apply a different scale factor to each of the axes (XYZ). A scale factor equal to 1 produces no change in size. Choose Main Menu. ¨ When scaling associative dimensions. then choose Done. Scaling entities using multiple scale factors Scaling increases or decreases the size of entities by a factor relative to a defined point. For more information. On the Scale dialog box. Enter a point in the graphics window. select only the geometry to scale. 2. ¨ The following graphics show two examples with the same geometry scaled about different points (yellow). A scale factor less than 1 shrinks the object. 8. 1. 4. 3. select the type of operation to perform: Move or Copy. Select one or more entities to scale. not the dimension. in which case. The color red indicates the group of entities selected for each transform operation. The entities not only change size but may change shape as well. You can use this function to scale all geometric and drafting entity types except solids. Mastercam will update the dimension to match the scaled geometry. Notes: ¨ For information on scaling entities using multiple scale factors. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to scale additional entities. 105 . The entities will be scaled relative to this point. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Xform. If the auto regenerate feature is off. see Associating drafting entities with geometry. If the auto regenerate feature is turned on. see Scaling entities using multiple scale factors. Mastercam marks the dimension as dirty. appearing to be stretched or squeezed from their original shape.

Press [Esc] to exit the function. 7.5. 6. If the auto regenerate feature is turned on. Press [Enter] to continue. and then choose OK to scale the entities. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to scale additional entities. Notes: ¨ To increase or decrease entities by the same amount in all directions. or see Scaling entities using a single scale factor. Note: A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the object in the defined direction. select only the geometry to scale. The color red indicates the group of entities selected for the transform operation. Scaling both the geometry and the associated dimension causes the dimension value to no longer match the geometry. ¨ When scaling associative dimensions. enter the same value for the XYZ scale factors. A scale factor equal to 1 produces no change in size in the defined direction. not the dimension. Mastercam marks the dimension as dirty. If the auto regenerate feature is off. Mastercam will update the dimension to match the scaled geometry. ¨ The following graphic shows geometry scaled about a point (yellow) using different X and Y scale factors. in which case. Mastercam converts the arcs to NURBS splines and displays the number of converted arcs in the prompt area. see Associating drafting entities with geometry. 106 . 8. If your selection contained one or more arcs and you used different XYZ scale factors. Enter the Scale factor to use in each direction (XYZ). A scale factor less than 1 shrinks the object in the defined direction. you can manually regenerate the dimension to the correct value. The color purple indicates the result of the transform operation after the original entities are scaled by a factor of 3 (triple their original size) in the Y direction and .75 (75% of their original size) in the X direction. For more information.

On the Translate dialog box. Press [Esc]to exit the function. Notes: 107 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to offset additional curves or press [Esc] to exit the function. 3. 5. Translate. or Join) and enter a value for Number of steps. Select one or more entities to translate. Offset. it displaces it by a defined distance and direction. On the Offset dialog box. Xform. 1. Offsetting a single curve When Mastercam offsets a single curve. Choose Main Menu. Choose OK to translate the entities. select the type of operation to perform (Move. 4. arc. then choose Done. The direction is perpendicular to the curve at every point along the curve relative to the current construction plane. 4. see Defining a translation direction. 6. Click on one side or the other of the selected entity to indicate the offset direction. 6. Drag function. Select a line. Mastercam displays the Translate Direction menu. You can move the entities within a plane or from one plane to another plane. You can quickly (but less precisely) translate entities using the Modify. size. Mastercam moves the entity in the opposite direction from the one you indicate. 1. 2. or shape of the entities. Define a translation direction using rectangular coordinates. Mastercam offsets the curve. Note: If you entered a negative offset distance on the Offset dialog box. then choose OK to close the dialog box. Enter a value for Offset distance and Number of steps. 5. 2. or two points relative to two views. Copy. Choose Main Menu. Notes: ¨ ¨ To view a graphic of a translation between views. select the type of operation to perform: Move or Copy.Translating entities Translating is the process of moving selected entities or one or more copies of the entities to new positions without altering the orientation. two points. . 3. or spline in the graphics window. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to translate additional entities. polar coordinates. You can translate all geometric and drafting entity types. Xform.

4. 5. Enter a value for Offset depth and indicate whether the depth is Absolute or Incremental. Indicate the type of operation to perform by choosing Move or Copy. Offsetting chains of curves When Mastercam offsets chains of curves. or press [Esc] to exit the function. ¨ The Create. Parallel function gives you several options for offsetting single lines. Note: This value is the distance that the chains will be offset in the XY directions (relative to the current construction plane). Ofs ctour. Note: When making your selection. see Creating parallel lines. 3. The offset direction that you will set in a following step is calculated relative to the chaining direction for each selected chain. 1.¨ Offsetting a spline by a distance greater than the radius of the smallest curve in the spline may cause the spline to self-intersect. Notes: Repeat steps 2 through 8 to offset additional chains of curves. 7. or zero value. Line. Select one or more chains of curves. Offsetting outside the perimeter creates a larger circle. You can enter a positive. Offsetting inside the perimeter creates a smaller circle. 108 . 2. Enter a value for Distance in the Offset section of the dialog box. Set the offset direction by choosing Right or Left in the Offset section of the dialog box. Mastercam opens the Offset Contour dialog box. negative. Choose Main Menu. then choose OK to offset the chains. For more information. 6. Set the remaining parameters on the Offset Contour dialog box. The offset is perpendicular to the chains of curves at every position along the curves relative to the current construction plane. Xform. Note: This value is the distance that the chains will be offset in the Z direction (relative to the current construction plane). depending on the offset direction. Enter a value for Number of steps to set the number of times to perform the operation. then choose Done. You can enter a positive value only. 9. it is important to pay attention to the chaining direction. 8. ¨ Offsetting an arc or circle creates a larger or smaller arc or circle. it displaces them by a defined distance and direction and optionally a depth.

Xform. Choose Main Menu. You can perform the Stretch function on all geometric and drafting entities except solids.¨ Offsetting a spline by a distance greater than the radius of the smallest curve in the spline may cause the spline to self-intersect. ¨ When offsetting 2D chains using a depth other than zero. Use the Stretch Menu to select entities to stretch. while the endpoints that lie outside the selection window maintain their original positions. ¨ Offsetting an arc or circle creates a larger or smaller arc or circle. 1. 3. Offsetting inside the perimeter creates a smaller circle. The line endpoints that lie within the selection window are translated. 6. Press [Esc]to exit the function. 5. Lines are stretched when they cross or intersect the window used to select the entities. Choose OK to translate/stretch the entities. or two points relative to two views. select the type of operation to perform (Move or Copy) and enter a value for Number of steps. you can define the offset distance by entering a value for Taper angle. Stretch. Stretching entities Stretching is the process of moving (translating) entities or one or more copies of the entities to new positions and optionally lengthening or shortening selected lines. On the Stretch dialog box. This parameter is directly related to the Distance parameter in the Offset section of the dialog box. The following graphic illustrates this relationship. 2. two points. polar coordinates. 109 . Repeat steps 2 through 4 to translate/stretch additional entities. 4. Define a translation direction using rectangular coordinates. depending on the offset direction. Offsetting outside the perimeter creates a larger circle.

5. Indicate the direction to transform the entities about the axis by choosing CW or CCW. 6. Rolling and unrolling entities The Roll function lets you wrap lines. 7. Choose Main Menu. Splines. 8. you can choose Z axis or X axis. and splines. Lines. Select one or more entities. In Mastercam Lathe. Note: The rotation axis is relative to the current construction plane. 1. 9. Mastercam breaks the entities relative to an angle tolerance. arcs. and Wire. 4. To fit entities in a cylindrical shape when rolling them or to flatten entities when unrolling them. Indicate the type of operation to perform by choosing Move or Copy. Indicate the axis to transform the entities about. Note: Your selection can include points. or Nurbs. arcs. Xform. 3. Determine the type of transformation to perform: Roll or Unroll. It then generates new geometry. This value determines how closely the transformed (target) geometry fits the original geometry. and splines about an axis as though around a cylinder or unwrap rolled entities to make them lie flat.Notes: ¨ The following graphics show a rectangle that is stretched out of shape (bottom graphic) when two of its lines are intersected by a selection window (top graphic) and translated to a new position. called target geometry. Enter a value for Angle tolerance. you can choose X axis or Y axis. You can choose to create points at the break points or lines or splines between the break points. Indicate the type of target geometry to create by choosing Points. then choose Done. 110 . In Mastercam Design. Roll. Mastercam opens the Roll dialog box. This value determines the size of the cylindrical shape about which the geometry is transformed. Enter a value for Rotary diameter. based on the break points. Mill. lines. A smaller value results in a more precise fit. 2.

and splines to the current construction plane. then choose Select. 111 . Select the entities to project using the General Selection menu and choose Done. 5. Define the translation vector by entering a point to translate from and a point to translate to. Squash. or Join. level. 3. Copy. This means you can select entities in various positions in 3D space and squash them into a flat. 7. ¨ To position the target geometry relative to a translation vector. line style. choose Angle. Choose OK to close the dialog box and transform the geometry. 4. lines. The system converts arcs to NURBS splines if they are not parallel to the construction plane. 6. 11. and line width) Note: You can choose either or both check boxes. After you enter two points. 2D plane. Choose OK. Set the position of the target geometry by taking one of the following actions: ¨ To position the target geometry relative to an angle value. 2. arcs. the dialog box reopens. then enter a value in the text box. 1. Enter the Depth or choose: ¨ The Construction depth check box (so that the projected entities remain at the current construction depth) ¨ The Construction attributes check box (so that attributes of the projected entities use the current construction color. Xform.10. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. Choose Main Menu. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Select an operation: Move. The Squash dialog box displays. choose Associate pts. Squashing entities The Squash dialog box allows you to project selected points. Repeat steps 2 thru 5 to project additional entities.

although you have the option to turn off trimming.Determines whether Mastercam trims the selected curves to the fillet. Choose Y to activate trimming or N to deactivate trimming. L (Larger) to create fillets that are larger than 180 degrees.Determines the sweep of the fillet arc. Click on the topics below for more information. This option toggles between S. or counterclockwise (CCW) corners (relative to the chaining direction). or F (Full) to create fillets that are full circles (360 degrees).Determines the size of the resulting fillets. or N to create fillets at negative. Modify. This option is a Yes/No toggle. Mastercam trims the curves to the fillet. You can access the Fillet menu by choosing Main Menu. P to create fillets at positive. P. See Filleting corners along chains of curves for more information.Displays the Chaining Methods menu where you can select chains of curves to create fillets at sharp corners along the chains. Trim . Fillet or by choosing Main Menu. Radius . Filleting curves The Fillet menu gives you options for filleting curves. Choose S (Smaller) to create fillets that are smaller than 180 degrees. 112 . Chain . or clockwise (CW) corners (relative to the chaining direction). and N. By default. Create. Angle . Determines which corners are used to create fillets along the chains of curves. This option toggles between A. Click on the menu and topics below for more information. you create an arc of a defined radius tangent to the curves. Fillet. L. Choose A to create fillets along all corners. You can access the Modify menu by choosing Modify from the Main Menu.Modifying entities The Modify menu gives you options for modifying entities. and F. When you fillet curves.

Finally. Press [Esc] to exit the function.Notes: ¨ This option applies only when Filleting corners along chains of curves. Trim. 3. or spline to trim to. arc. 2. 113 . Trimming one curve This function trims one curve to its intersection with a second curve without modifying the second entity. Modify. 1 entity. Mastercam does not extend splines beyond their original endpoints. or spline to trim. 4. Note: The following graphics show the selection of a vertical line trimmed to the horizontal line. arc. ¨ The ability to fillet only inside or outside corners of a chained boundary is particularly useful during geometry creation for wire EDM parts (punches and dies). Select a line. however. The curves must lie in the same Cplane. Trimming curves The Trim menu gives you options for trimming curves to one another. The result varies depending on where you select the line. the curves must have an actual intersection. Select a line. in cases where the intersection between two curves offers variable solutions. These parts often require different radius values on inside versus outside corners in order to provide adequate corner clearance. Modify. Trim. 1. 5. be sure to select each curve on the part of the curve that you want to keep. Mastercam trims curves by cutting them back or extending them at their intersections. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to trim additional curves. Choose Main Menu. You can access the Trim menu by choosing Main Menu. or if the Cplane is set to 3D.

The result varies depending on where you select the lines. Press [Esc] to exit the function. or spline as the first entity to trim. 3. 2. 1. and the results vary depending on whether you select to keep the top or the bottom of the arc. Note: The following graphics show the selection of a two lines trimmed to their intersection. Trimming three curves This function trims three curves. 5. Modify. 5. arc. as shown in the following graphic. which acts as a trimming curve. The arc is selected last. 3 entities. Choose Main Menu. Select a line. The first two curves that you select are trimmed to the third selected curve. arc. 2 entities. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to trim additional entities. arcs. 1. Select two lines. Select a line. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to trim additional entities.Trimming two curves This function trims two curves to their intersection. Select a line. or spline to trim to. 2. Trim. 114 . arc. Trim. Note: This function is useful for trimming two lines to a circle that is tangent to both lines. or splines to trim. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Choose Main Menu. or spline as the second entity to trim. 4. Modify. 3. The third curve is then trimmed to the first two curves. 4.

Mastercam calculates the closest position on the entity and trims the entity to that point. arcs. 1. If the point that you enter does not lie on the selected entity. 4. Note: The following graphic shows an arc that is trimmed (in this case. Select a line. or spline. Trim. 5. 115 . then choose Done. Enter a point to trim to. Modify. Trimming multiple curves to a single trimming curve This function trims multiple curves to a selected trimming curve without modifying the trimming curve. Press [Esc] to exit the function.Trimming a curve to a point This function trims a curve to a point or any defined position in the graphics window. Modify. and splines to trim. To point. 3. Choose Main Menu. Select one or more lines. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to trim additional curves. Many. 1. 2. extended) to a point that does not lie on the curve. Trim. arc. Choose Main Menu. 2.

5.3. or splines to use as dividing curves. 3. Dividing a line or arc between two trimming curves This function trims a line or arc into two disjointed segments by removing the segment that lies between two dividing curves. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Choose Main Menu. Divide. 2. Select a line or arc to divide. Note: The following graphic shows a line that is trimmed between two arcs. Choose Main Menu. Trim. 6. Press [Esc] to exit the function. each containing four arcs that are trimmed to a line (red). or spline to trim to. The dashed green line shows the portion of each arc that is trimmed. Close arc. Modify. Select an entity on the side of the trimming curve that you want to keep. 4. Modify. 4. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to trim additional curves. Select an arc that is less than 360 degrees. arc. 3. which varies depending on which side of the curves you select to keep. 4. Note: The following graphic shows two examples. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to divide additional curves Press [Esc] to exit the function. Closing an arc to form a full circle 1. 1. 116 . 5. Select a line. Repeat step 2 to close additional arcs. Trim. 2. arcs. Select any two lines.

5. crosshatches. Break. Break. Modify. arc. and copious data into geometric entities. 3. Breaking a curve into two segments at a defined length 1. Modify. Enter a point where you want to break the selected entity. Select a line in the graphics window. Break. arc. At length. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to break additional entities. 2. The system breaks the entity into two segments. or spline. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to break additional entities. Breaking a line into multiple segments 1. Select a line. 5. You can access the Break menu by choosing Main Menu. 2. Choose Main Menu. Breaking a curve into two segments at a defined point 1. Choose Main Menu. Choose Main Menu. the system finds the location on the curve that is closest to the point and breaks the curve at that point. 2. Break.Breaking entities The Break menu gives you option for breaking curves into multiple segments and for breaking drafting entities. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Modify. In the prompt area. or spline near the endpoint that you want to use to calculate length. 4. Note: If you enter a break point that does not lie on the selected curve. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 3. Select a line. Mny pieces. 3. enter a value for length. Take one of the following actions: 117 . 2 pieces. Mastercam breaks the curve at the defined length from the selected endpoint. Modify.

3. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to break additional lines. 4. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 7. choose Seg length. Select an arc in the graphics window. Take one of the following actions: ¨ To break the spline into a defined number of segments. In the prompt area. Num seg. 3. Mny pieces. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to break additional arcs. choose Num seg. 118 . In the prompt area. Breaking an arc into multiple arc or line segments 1. Choose Main Menu. Break. In the prompt area.¨ To break the line into a defined number of segments. 6. 6. 2. Press [Esc] to exit the function. In the prompt area. Break. Mny pieces. 4. ¨ To break the arc into segments of a defined length. Select a spline in the graphics window. Modify. Modify. choose by Length. Choose Main Menu. In the prompt area. Breaking a spline into multiple line segments 1. choose Seg length. enter the number of segments. ¨ To break the line into segments of a defined length. Set Arcs to Y to break the arc into arc segments or N to break it into line segments. enter the segment length. ¨ To break the spline into segments of a defined length. Seg length. 2. Take one of the following actions: ¨ To break the arc into a defined number of segments. 5. choose by Length. Choose Do it to break the arc. enter the segment length. enter the segment length. In the prompt area. Choose Do it to break the line. choose Num seg. 5. enter the number of segments. enter the number of segments.

or 2D splines that lie in undefined views. Modify. witness lines. Modify. Choose Do it to break the selected splines. 2D splines that do not lie in the current Cplane. Select one or more 2D splines. At inters. Choose Error. Note: A smaller value results in a closer fit. enter the chord height tolerance (distance) that determines how closely the resulting arc and line segments fit the original splines. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Break. choose by Error. Choose Do it to break the spline. Take one of the following actions: To keep the splines. labels. 3. 119 . set Dispose to D. Breaking 2D splines into arc and line segments 1. 5. To blank the splines. Note: Press [F3] to remove the display points. ¨ ¨ ¨ 5. In the prompt area. Select one or more lines. Break. and NURBS splines. Note: Mastercam does not break 3D splines. In the prompt area. To delete the splines. Break. set Dispose to K. Draft/line. Breaking curves at their intersections with other curves 1. 6. Breaking drafting entities into geometric entities This function breaks drafting dimensions. arcs. 1. A larger value results in a looser fit. 4. Spl to arcs. or splines. 2. enter the chord height tolerance (distance) that determines how closely the resulting segments fit the original spline. Choose Main Menu. Mastercam displays temporary points at each break point. 2. A larger value results in a looser fit. then choose Done. arcs. then choose Done. Choose Main Menu. Modify. set Dispose to B. notes. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to break additional splines.¨ To break the spline based on a chord height tolerance. and leader lines into lines. Choose Main Menu. Error. 4. Note: A smaller value results in a closer fit.

or work origin position. The newly created lines have the same line style as the crosshatch pattern. Choose Main Menu. Cdata/line. cut. 3. Break. Break. By breaking the geometry. 1. Note: Mastercam Wire allows you to set a chaining option "Break closest entity to thread point. 1. Break. Repeat step 2 to break additional entities.2. STCW position. Choose Main Menu. STCW position opens the STCW Position Settings menu. depending on the form of the copious data entity. Breaking the geometry perpendicular to the STCW position In Wire EDM. Repeat step 2 to break additional crosshatches. Using the chaining option to break the geometry is equivalent to using this procedure. 2. Select a copious data entity to break. Modify. You have the option to convert copious data to points and lines when you read an IGES file into Mastercam. 120 . The options in this menu let you choose to break a line or an arc at a point perpendicular to the current start. Choosing Main Menu. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Breaking copious data into points and lines This function breaks a copious data entity into points or lines. 3. 4. Mastercam Wire automatically breaks the entity that is closest to the thread point. Select one or more drafting entities. Choose Main Menu. Mastercam Wire requires a start of contour to begin cutting the part. it is a general rule of thumb to lead in to the part geometry perpendicular to the contour. Modify. While the STCW position may appear to be perpendicular to the contour. thread. Modify. you create an entity endpoint that can be used for the start of contour when chaining. Mastercam breaks the entities and exits the function. 2. Select a crosshatch to break. Modify. Note: Copious data is an entity type that originates in an IGES file and represents a collection of geometric forms (points and lines). Break. Hatch/line. Press [Esc] to exit the function." When this option is activated and you chain geometry for a wirepath. Breaking hatch entities into lines This function breaks lines in a crosshatch pattern into line entities. 4. 1. perpendicular to the thread point.

This function helps prepare geometry for the post processor by eliminating full circles. T. or W position perpendicular to which you want to break the geometry. Choose Main Menu.txt Breakcir. Modify. T. The parameters allow for easy modification using associativity. C.2. 2.doc Joining segments of broken curves This function joins collinear lines. or W position without extending the entity. 3. C. or W position. or spline. T. Select the entity to break. Break. arcs that have the same center and radius. Modify. To make a tab. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Note: If Mastercam Wire displays the message "cannot break line or arc past its endpoints. Make tab Choosing Main Menu. Creating tabs with Modify. Make tab function provides continuity for users of previous versions of Mastercam Wire." the entity you are trying to break cannot be broken perpendicular to the S. Make tab is an alternate method of creating a tab on a wirepath.dll Breakcir. Break. 5. Join. Break. C. Mastercam Wire inserts the stop code when it generates the wirepath. You can view the stop code when backplotting the wirepath. or splines that were originally created as the same entity. 1. The files for this C-Hook include: ¨ ¨ ¨ Breakcir. 121 . Choose Esc when done. 4. this method breaks the selected entity at the point that you choose and marks the entity endpoint with a glue stop or program stop. Note: While the Modify. Select another entity of the same type. Breakcir C-Hook When you run the Breakcir C-Hook. Choose the from the menu the S. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to join additional curves. Choose another entity or move the S. we recommend creating tabs using the tab parameters in the Cuts tab of the contour or 4-axis wirepath dialog box. and also allow you to easily specify lead in/out moves for the tab cuts.360 degrees and that match the main system color into two 180-degree arcs. the system automatically breaks all arcs that have a sweep of +/. Select a line. arc. 3.

Modify. Click on the topics below for more information. 3. Notes: ¨ For more information about surface normals. ¨ To check the surface normal direction before reversing it. see About surface normals. 2. see About surface normals. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Repeat step 2 to reverse the normal direction for additional surfaces. Select a surface in the graphics window. Setting the surface normal direction upward relative to the current Cplane This function checks selected surfaces and reverses the normal direction on any surface whose outward. Set. 4. You can access this menu by choosing Main Menu. then choose Done. The plus sign indicates the currently selected menu option. Reversing the surface normal direction 1. Normal.Notes: ¨ This function is useful for joining curves that were broken or trimmed. Choose Main Menu. 1. 122 . Modifying surface normals The Modify Normal menu gives you options for checking and changing surface normal directions. Modify. Normal. the system creates the new entity using the attributes of the first entity that you select. In the prompt area. Modify. Mastercam reports the number of reversals. Reverse. see Checking and optionally reversing the surface normal direction. 3. Surfaces. Notes: ¨ ¨ For more information about surface normals. Select one or more surfaces. normal direction points downward relative to the current Cplane. You can perform the same function by choosing Main Menu. Analyze. ¨ If the two entities that you select to join have different attributes. Normal. Choose Main Menu. Set norms Press [Esc] to exit the function. 2. or positive. Mastercam reverses the surface normal direction.

Choose Dynamic. Dragging a control point to a new position 1. Mastercam displays a direction menu. Note: To reverse the surface normal direction quickly without checking it first. Select a control point. Modify. The system highlights the control points in the graphics window. 4.Checking and optionally reversing the surface normal direction 1. 123 . Cpts NURBS). A larger arrowhead indicates that the normal vector points toward you. Changing the shape of a NURBS spline or surface Mastercam displays the Modify NURBS Cpts menu when you are in the process of modifying a control point on a NURBS spline or NURBS surface (Main Menu. Enter a starting point to begin dragging the control point. 2. Enter an ending point to set its position. Dynamic. 6. Choose Main Menu. 5. Set the outward. Select a NURBS spline or NURBS surface. surface normal direction by taking one of the following actions: Choose OK to accept the direction of the normal (the outward direction). normal direction based on the cursor position. a smaller arrowhead indicates that the normal vector points away from you. which changes the shape of the NURBS entity that is defined by the control point. click to set its position. 3. then choose OK. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on the surface. Mastercam modifies the position of the control point relative to the position of the starting and ending points that you enter. Select a surface. or positive. ¨ ¨ When you can see the arrow clearly. Choose Main Menu. Note: The size of the arrowhead changes to reflect the arrow’s position relative to your perspective in the current graphics view. The arrow points in the outward. Modify. 3. see Reversing the surface normal direction. Cpts NURBS. 2. 5. Choose Flip to reverse the direction of the normal (the outward direction). Modify. Normal. Move the arrow along the surface to check the normal direction. 4. This menu gives you options for modifying the position or weight of the selected control point. or positive.

Examples of rational NURBS entities include: NURBS ellipses. and parametric revolved surfaces that were converted to NURBS format. which reflects the control point’s center of influence. Cpts NURBS. you may need to press [Esc] and return to step 2. Mastercam automatically selects the corresponding control point to modify. Notes: ¨ You cannot undo [Alt+U] this function. Choose Point entry. You cannot modify these points. You cannot modify these points.7. 8. which reflects the control point’s center of influence. ¨ For each control point on a NURBS surface there is a corresponding green point. Select a NURBS spline or NURBS surface. Note: If the control points are no longer displayed. Choose Main Menu. ¨ For each control point on a NURBS surface there is a corresponding green point. you may need to press [Esc] and return to step 2. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 1. 4. arcs that were converted to NURBS format. Repeat steps 3 through 6 to modify additional control points. Cpts NURBS. If you select one in step 3. 3. Modify. Mastercam automatically selects the corresponding control point to modify. Modify. Select a control point. If you select one in step 3. Note: If the control points are no longer displayed. Enter a point for the position of the control point. Notes: ¨ You cannot undo [Alt+U] this function. NURBS revolved surfaces. 2. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 6. Mastercam modifies the position of the control point. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to modify additional control points. Moving a control point to a defined position 1. 5. 7. 124 . curve-generated revolved surfaces that were converted to NURBS format. Modifying the weight of a control point You can modify the weight of a control point for rational NURBS entities only. Choose Main Menu. The system highlights the control points in the graphics window.

and parametric splines to NURBS splines and curve-generated and parametric surfaces to NURBS surfaces. In the prompt area. 2. 6. Note: The weight of a control point affects its influence on the NURBS entity that it defines. Modify. Modify. If you select one in step 3. 1. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to modify additional control points. 4. Choose Main Menu. 7. enter a value for the weight of the control point. Notes: ¨ You cannot undo [Alt+U] this function. Note: If the control points are no longer displayed. arcs. Press [Esc] to exit the function. which reflects the control point’s center of influence. 125 . A higher value pulls the NURBS entity toward the control point. Converting curves and surfaces to NURBS format This function converts lines. Mastercam converts the selected entities to NURBS format. Repeat step 2 to convert additional entities. 3. Choose Main Menu. Extend. Select one or more curves or surfaces. Mastercam automatically selects the corresponding control point to modify. You can access the Extend menu by choosing Main Menu. Select a rational NURBS spline or surface. Choose Weight. then choose Done. Length. Modify. Extending entities The Extend menu gives you options for extending lines. and surfaces. You cannot modify these points. 5. The system highlights the control points in the graphics window. ¨ For each control point on a NURBS surface there is a corresponding green point. 3.2. Extending or trimming a curve by a defined length 1. arcs. Extend. splines. you may need to press [Esc] and return to step 2. and a lower value pushes the NURBS entity away from the control point. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Select a control point. X to NURBS. 4.

3. 4. Surface. For example. enter the length to extend the surface. Set Linear to Y to extend the surface linearly or to N to extend the surface according to the curvature of the surface. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface.2. 4. 3. the system cannot extend all surfaces precisely. However. or curve-generated) as the original surface. 1. When Mastercam extends a surface. Modify. it creates the extended surface as a new surface. Note: A positive value extends the entity. Set other parameters on the Extend Surface menu. arc. Select a surface in the graphics window. and you can choose to keep. Choose Main Menu. enter a value for length. as needed. 9. NURBS. Choose Do it to extend the surface. blank. In the prompt area. Mastercam creates the extended surface using the same surface type (parametric. you cannot extend curve-generated surfaces linearly and have them remain curve- 126 . 8. Trim/extend. Note: You can perform this step repeatedly to extend the surface incrementally by the defined length. You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. 5. 7. Repeat steps 5 through 7 to extend additional surfaces. You can extend the surface linearly or following the curvature of the surface. 5. 10. and a negative value trims the entity. Set To plane to N. then click. 6. or delete the original surface. Extend. In the prompt area. Select a line. Extending a surface by a defined length This function extends a surface by a defined length. Create. Note: This step is not necessary if Linear is set to N. Extend. ¨ When possible. Notes: ¨ ¨ You can extend trimmed surfaces only along untrimmed edges. Repeat step 3 to extend or trim additional curves by the defined length. Surface. Choose Length. 2. or spline close to the endpoint that you want to extend or trim. Move the base of the arrow to the edge to extend. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Set Linear to Y. Set To plane to Y. When Mastercam extends a surface. 6. Mastercam displays the prompt shown below. NURBS. 9. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. Modify. 1. In such cases. Choosing Yes tells the system to create a NURBS approximation of the surface. 127 . 2. Move the base of the arrow to the edge to extend. Dragging entities to new positions in the graphics window The Drag dialog box gives you options for quickly and dynamically moving entities in the graphics window by translating. However. and stretching them. or curve-generated) as the original surface. Choose Plane. Extending a surface to a plane This function extends a surface linearly to a defined plane. For example. then click. it creates the extended surface as a new surface. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Create. and you can choose to keep. Mastercam creates the extended surface using the same surface type (parametric. Choose Do it to extend the surface. blank. Choose Main Menu. Extend. Dragging entities using translation This function quickly and dynamically moves selected entities or a copy of the entities to a new position in the graphics window. Surface. you cannot extend curve-generated surfaces linearly and have them remain curvegenerated. Surface. ¨ When possible. Choose Main Menu. Trim/extend. Choosing No tells the system not to extend the surface. In such cases. Drag. 5. You can access the Drag dialog box by choosing Main Menu. Choosing Yes tells the system to create a NURBS approximation of the surface. 4.generated. Drag. Select a surface in the graphics window. You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. Modify. 3. Use the Define Plane menu to define the plane to extend the surface to. or delete the original surface. Set other parameters on the Extend Surface menu. Choosing No tells the system not to extend the surface. 7. Extend. Click on the topics below for more information. Notes: ¨ ¨ You can extend trimmed surfaces only along untrimmed edges. rotating. Mastercam displays the prompt shown below. 8. Modify. 1. as needed. the system cannot extend all surfaces precisely.

Enter Step Parameters values: ¨ Angle – Enter the angle at which the entity will be rotated. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window to select a point on the entity that determines the value to be used for translating along the selected axis. use the + and – keys to rotate while dragging the entity with the mouse. Copy – Select this option to make a copy of the selected entities. Select the starting point. The Drag dialog box displays. [V] – Vertical – Drags the selected entity vertically. 7. Select the geometry to transform. Choose Translate. Choose Done. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 4.2. then click to set their position. 10. Drag the entities in the graphics window. ¨ ¨ [H] – Horizontal – Drags the selected entity horizontally. If desired. 8. ¨ XY – Enter X or Y to select an axis for the translation. use one of the following option keys while dragging the entities: ¨ [A] – Angle – Prompts you to enter an angle value at which the entity will be dragged incrementally. When in translate mode. 128 . ¨ [+] – CCW – Drags the selected entity in a counterclockwise direction at the angle specified in either the Drag dialog box or the [A] Angle option. Select one of the Operation functions: Move – Select this option to move the selected entities. ¨ ¨ [T] – Translate – Toggles the Drag function from the Rotate mode. 3. ¨ ¨ 5. Choose OK. ¨ [-] – CW .Drags the selected entity in a clockwise direction at the angle specified in either the Drag dialog box or the [A] Angle option. 11. 6. [R] – Rotate – Toggles the Drag function from the Translate mode. using the + and – keys. 9. ¨ [S] – Snap – Opens the Point Entry menu which allows you to snap the selected entity to a defined position.

[V] – Vertical – Drags the selected entity vertically. Drag. 7. Enter Step Parameters values: Angle – Enter the angle at which the entity will be rotated as you drag the entity with the mouse. then click to set their position. Choose Done. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window to select a point on the entity that determines the value to be used for translating along the selected axis while rotating the entity with the mouse. The Drag dialog box displays. ¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ [H] – Horizontal – Drags the selected entity horizontally. Select one of the Operation functions: Move – Select this option to move the selected entities. 2. ¨ XY . Drag the entities in the graphics window. ¨ ¨ 5. 8. using the + and – keys. 129 . 3. Select the geometry to rotate. 6. You can use the + and – keys to translate the entity while rotating. 9.Enter X or Y to select an axis to translate the entity along. use one of the following option keys while dragging the entities: ¨ [A] – Angle – Prompts you to enter an angle value at which the entity will be dragged incrementally. Select the starting point. If desired.Dragging entities using rotation This function quickly and dynamically moves selected entities or a copy of the entities by rotating the entities about a point. 1. Modify. 4. [S] – Snap – Snaps the selected entity to a defined position. [R] – Rotate – Toggles the Drag function from the Translate mode. 10. Copy – Select this option to move a copy of the selected entities. Choose Rotate Choose OK. ¨ Choose Main Menu. [T] – Translate – Toggles the Drag function from the Rotate mode.

3. Choose Rotate or Translate. ¨ ¨ 5. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Enter Step Parameters values: ¨ Angle – Enter the angle at which the entity will be rotated. ¨ [-] – CW . Choose Window. Repeat steps 6 through 10 to transform the same set of selected entities or steps 2 through 10 to transform a new set of entities. 1. and select Stretch.¨ [+] – CCW – Drags the selected entity in a counterclockwise direction at the angle specified in either the Drag dialog box or the [A] Angle option. 9. Drag. Lines are stretched when they cross or intersect the window used to select the entities. Copy – Select this option to move a copy of the selected entities. 11. 8. 130 . The line endpoints that lie within the selection window are translated. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window to select a point on the entity that determines the value to be used for translating along the selected axis while stretching the entity with the mouse. while the endpoints that lie outside the selection window maintain their original positions. Choose Done.) ¨ XY – Enter X or Y to select an axis to translate the entity along. Select one of the Operation functions: Move – Select this option to move the selected entities. Drag the entities in the graphics window. Select the starting point. 2. 6. (Use the + or – keys to rotate as the entity is being stretched with the mouse. 12. 4. Choose Main Menu. Modify. 7. then click to set their position. and draw a window around the lines you wish to stretch. Choose OK. The Drag dialog box displays. You can use the + and – keys to translate the entity while stretching. Dragging entities using stretch methods This function quickly and dynamically moves (translates) selected entities or copies of the entities to new positions and optionally stretches (lengthens or shortens) selected lines.Drags the selected entity in a clockwise direction at the angle specified in either the Drag dialog box or the [A] Angle option.

Translate Xform. Set parameters on the Modify Circular Splines to Arcs menu. Choose Main Menu. Press [Enter] to erase the message. 3. Modify. 2. use one of the following option keys while dragging the entities: ¨ [A] – Angle – Prompts you to enter an angle value at which the entity will be dragged incrementally. Note: This function is particularly useful if geometry that is supposed to denote circles or arcs is read into Mastercam as splines during a file conversion. ¨ [+] – CCW – Drags the selected entity in a counterclockwise direction at the angle specified in either the Drag dialog box or the [A] Angle option. Select one or more circular-shaped splines. 11. Press [Esc] to exit the function Note: While the Drag function serves as a quick way to move entities in the graphics window. then choose Do it to create the arcs.Drags the selected entity in a clockwise direction at the angle specified in either the Drag dialog box or the [A] Angle option. If you later want to reference the centers of the circular geometry or dimension the circles. Repeat steps 2 through 10 to stretch additional entities. the following Xform functions offer more advanced and precise transformation methods: Xform. then choose Done. you can more easily and accurately determine do so if they are arcs instead of splines.10. Rotate Xform. If desired. 131 . 4. [S] – Snap – Snaps the selected entity to a defined position. using the + and – keys. Stretch Creating arcs from circular splines This function creates arcs based on the geometry of circular-shaped splines. [V] – Vertical – Drags the selected entity vertically. ¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ [H] – Horizontal – Drags the selected entity horizontally. [R] – Rotate – Toggles the Drag function from the Translate mode. 1. [T] – Translate – Toggles the Drag function from the Rotate mode. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 5. Cnv to arcs. ¨ [-] – CW . Mastercam displays the number of arcs that were successfully created. 12.

2. Choose Dynamic. enter a value for length. The system highlights the control points in the graphics window. Enter a starting point to begin dragging the control point. Dragging a control point to a new position 1. This menu gives you options for modifying the position or weight of the selected control point. Notes: ¨ You cannot undo [Alt+U] this function. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 3. Choose Main Menu. Length. arc. Modify. 6. 4. Note: A positive value extends the entity. Repeat steps 3 through 6 to modify additional control points. Repeat step 3 to extend or trim additional curves by the defined length. 2. you may need to press [Esc] and return to step 2. Note: If the control points are no longer displayed. Select a line. Modify. or spline close to the endpoint that you want to extend or trim. 8. 7. Enter an ending point to set its position. Choose Main Menu. Modify. 132 . Cpts NURBS. 5. Changing the shape of a NURBS spline or surface Mastercam displays the Modify NURBS Cpts menu when you are in the process of modifying a control point on a NURBS spline or NURBS surface (Main Menu. Select a NURBS spline or NURBS surface. 3. and a negative value trims the entity. Press [Esc] to exit the function. which changes the shape of the NURBS entity that is defined by the control point. In the prompt area.Extending or trimming a curve by a defined length 1. 5. 4. Cpts NURBS). Mastercam modifies the position of the control point relative to the position of the starting and ending points that you enter. Extend. Select a control point.

Enter a point for the position of the control point. The system highlights the control points in the graphics window. 7. and parametric revolved surfaces that were converted to NURBS format. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Select a rational NURBS spline or surface. which reflects the control point’s center of influence. If you select one in step 3. 3. 1. Modifying the weight of a control point You can modify the weight of a control point for rational NURBS entities only. You cannot modify these points. ¨ For each control point on a NURBS surface there is a corresponding green point. you may need to press [Esc] and return to step 2. Select a control point. Choose Main Menu. 2. curve-generated revolved surfaces that were converted to NURBS format. Choose Weight. Examples of rational NURBS entities include: NURBS ellipses. Mastercam automatically selects the corresponding control point to modify. You cannot modify these points. Moving a control point to a defined position 1. The system highlights the control points in the graphics window. Cpts NURBS. NURBS revolved surfaces. 4. Cpts NURBS.¨ For each control point on a NURBS surface there is a corresponding green point. 3. arcs that were converted to NURBS format. which reflects the control point’s center of influence. In the prompt area. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to modify additional control points. Choose Main Menu. Choose Point entry. 5. Select a control point. 6. Modify. enter a value for the weight of the control point. Mastercam modifies the position of the control point. Notes: ¨ You cannot undo [Alt+U] this function. If you select one in step 3. Note: If the control points are no longer displayed. Select a NURBS spline or NURBS surface. 2. 133 . Modify. 4. 5. Mastercam automatically selects the corresponding control point to modify.

the other is referred to as the negative (back. One is referred to as the positive (front. When a surface is created. the arrow shows the normal vector directions of a surface at the position of the base of the arrow. ¨ For each control point on a NURBS surface there is a corresponding green point. 134 . or away from the solid volume. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to modify additional control points. solid faces have two normal vectors. In the following graphics. About surface normals A surface normal is a vector (direction) that is perpendicular to the tangent plane of a surface at the point of tangency. If you select one in step 3.Note: The weight of a control point affects its influence on the NURBS entity that it defines. Note: If the control points are no longer displayed. 7. outward) direction. You cannot modify these points. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Each surface has two normal vectors. The positive normal direction always points outward. the default positive normal direction is based on the relative directions of the curves defining the surface. inward) direction. 6. which point in opposite directions. and a lower value pushes the NURBS entity away from the control point. Notes: ¨ You cannot undo [Alt+U] this function. Mastercam automatically selects the corresponding control point to modify. A higher value pulls the NURBS entity toward the control point. Notes: ¨ Like surfaces. you may need to press [Esc] and return to step 2. which reflects the control point’s center of influence.

¨ You can verify the positive normal direction at any position on a surface. Mastercam calculates each offset surface and solid in the positive normal direction. surface. Mastercam offsets surfaces in the positive normal direction when the offset distance is a positive value and in the negative normal direction when the offset distance is a negative value. you have the option to create the curves at an offset position of the surfaces and solids. Identifying the positive surface normal direction There are several ways to identify the positive normal direction of a surface: ¨ The Show Back function. see Checking surface normals. Mastercam calculates each offset surface and solid in the negative normal direction. Mastercam creates fillet surfaces on the sides of the surfaces that point in the positive normal direction unless you select the "Fillet Both Sides" option. 135 . applies a defined color to the back (negative) side of the wireframe display of a surface. you have the option to project the curves onto offset positions of the surfaces and solids. Curve. when active. Surface. If you enter a positive offset distance. If you enter a positive offset distance. ¨ When creating fillet surfaces between two sets of surfaces (Create. If you enter a negative offset distance. Curve. see Checking and optionally reversing the surface normal direction and Analyzing a curve. Mastercam calculates each offset surface and solid in the positive normal direction. For information about the Show Back function. For more information. Surface. which distinguishes it from the front (positive) side. ¨ When creating curves at the intersections of two sets of surfaces and solids (Create. you have the option to create the curves at an offset position of the surfaces and solids. Intersect). If you enter a positive offset distance. Project). Note: For solids. or solid face at any position. Mastercam calculates each offset surface and solid in the negative normal direction. If you enter a negative offset distance. Surface. and the negative normal direction points into the solid volume. If you enter a negative offset distance. For more information. ¨ A check normals option is built into functions where the normal direction affects the resulting geometry so that you can check the normal direction without leaving the function. How the surface normal direction affects your work in Mastercam ¨ When offsetting surfaces (Create. Slice). see Showing and setting the back color for surface displays. in which case Mastercam creates fillet on all sides of the surfaces. Fillet. Mastercam calculates each offset surface and solid in the negative normal direction. Surf/Surf) or between surfaces and a plane (Create. regardless of the normal directions. Curve. Plane/surf).¨ Curves have one normal vector that is perpendicular to the tangent line of the curve at the point of tangency. ¨ When creating curves at the intersection of a slice plane with surfaces and solids (Create. ¨ When projecting curves onto surfaces and solids (Create. Offset). Fillet. Mastercam calculates each offset surface and solid in the positive normal direction. the positive normal direction always points away from the solid volume.

each surface in this set is moved in the inward direction. see About surface normals. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Analyze. or positive. Choose Main Menu. 136 . each forming a cube. and the negative normal direction points outward from the center of the cube. You can access this menu by choosing Main Menu. 1. 3. Mastercam reports the number of reversals. The plus sign indicates the currently selected menu option. 2. Since the negative normal direction is outward. The positive normal direction for all of the surfaces points inward toward the center of the cube. Surfaces. Modifying surface normals The Modify Normal menu gives you options for checking and changing surface normal directions. In the prompt area. Normal.Example In the following example. normal direction points downward relative to the current Cplane. Select one or more surfaces. Setting the surface normal direction upward relative to the current Cplane This function checks selected surfaces and reverses the normal direction on any surface whose outward. are offset by different values. Modify. Set. ¨ The surfaces in the graphic on the right are offset by a negative value. The surfaces in this set are not moved in either direction. Since the positive normal direction points inward. then choose Done. Normal. Modify. each surface in this set is moved in the outward direction. Set norms. ¨ The surfaces in the graphic on the left are offset by a positive value. Notes: ¨ ¨ For more information about surface normals. ¨ The surfaces in the center graphic are offset by a zero distance. three sets of surfaces. You can perform the same function by choosing Main Menu.

¨ ¨ When you can see the arrow clearly. 4. 5. Press [Esc] to exit the function. In any other construction mode. You can access the Analyze menu by choosing Analyze from the Main Menu. Mastercam displays a direction menu.Reversing the surface normal direction 1. 2. Mastercam calculates data using absolute. editing the data. Dynamic. surface normal direction by taking one of the following actions: Choose OK to accept the direction of the normal (the outward direction). Modify. Choose Main Menu. Repeat step 2 to reverse the normal direction for additional surfaces. A larger arrowhead indicates that the normal vector points toward you. Normal. or positive. see About surface normals. Reverse. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on the surface.0). Select a surface in the graphics window. 2. Normal. Select a surface.0. then choose OK. When the construction plane is set to 3D. Modify. Note: The size of the arrowhead changes to reflect the arrow’s position relative to your perspective in the current graphics view. Choose Flip to reverse the direction of the normal (the outward direction). Checking and optionally reversing the surface normal direction 1. 3. Move the arrow along the surface to check the normal direction. Choose Main Menu. 3. click to set its position. The arrow points in the outward. Analyzing entities The Analyze menu gives you options for viewing data about entities and. the system calculates data using coordinates relative to the current Cplane. coordinates relative to the system origin (0. ¨ To check the surface normal direction before reversing it. a smaller arrowhead indicates that the normal vector points away from you. Notes: ¨ For more information about surface normals. or world. 137 . in some cases. see Checking and optionally reversing the surface normal direction. Note: To reverse the surface normal direction quickly without checking it first. see Reversing the surface normal direction. normal direction based on the cursor position. Mastercam reverses the surface normal direction. Set the outward. 4. or positive.

type a comment for the report (optional).Analyzing the coordinates of a point 1. Contour. Point. 2. 7. 2. 4. 3. Analyze. Analyze. Contour. In the prompt area. then choose Done. 6. Analyzing chains for offset data 1. Choose Main Menu. Choose Main Menu. Set Offset direction to Left or Right. Choose Main Menu. then choose OK. Analyze. Set Offset direction to Off and ignore all other options on the Analyze Contour Parameters dialog Note: This step does not apply to Mastercam Design users since the only parameters available are those pertaining to Contour type (set in step 3). In the prompt area. Set Offset Distance to a value other than zero. Note: Press [Alt+P] to print the data. Analyzing chains for coordinate data 1. then choose Done. Mastercam displays the coordinates of the point. Choose OK to close the dialog box. then press [Enter]. 4. Select one or more chains. Set Contour type to 2D to analyze the boundary for 2D data or 3D to analyze the boundary for 3D Note: Choose 3D if your selection in step 2 contained spline entities. 7. View the data. 5. Repeat step 2 to analyze additional points. 4. Set the remaining parameters on the Analyze Contour Parameters dialog box. Enter a point in the graphics window. Select one or more chains. then press [Enter]. box. 6. Set Contour type to 2D. type a comment for the report (optional). 3. 2. In the prompt area. Press [Esc] to exit the function. data. 5. then close the window. 138 . 3.

Enter two points in the graphics window. In the prompt area. Doing so reduces your chance of selecting the wrong entity to analyze. Select an entity. 2. Enter two points in the graphics window. 4. Mastercam displays the coordinates of the points and the distance (2D and 3D) and angle between the points. ¨ To analyze spline entities for offset data. Analyze. Choose Main Menu. Choose Main Menu. choose Only from the Analyze Entity menu. Analyzing the distance and angle between two points 1. Note: To redefine the type of entity to analyze. 2. View the data. Between pts. see Breaking a spline into multiple line segments and Breaking 2D splines into arc and line segments. Mastercam displays data about the entity in the prompt area or in a dialog box. 3. For more information. 1. 2. Repeat step 2 to analyze additional pairs of points. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 139 . Choose Main Menu. Analyzing entities of a defined type You can limit the entities that are selectable by defining allowable entity types and/or attributes using the Only menu. Analyze. 4. 4. you must first break them into line or arc segments. which is useful when you make your selection in complex geometry. This function is not available in Mastercam Design. Notes: ¨ ¨ To print the data.8. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to analyze additional entities of the defined type. In the prompt area. Analyze. 5. 3. then close the window. Repeat step 2 to analyze additional pairs of points. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 3. Analyzing the distance and angle between two points 1. Use the Only menu to define your selection. press [Alt+P] before closing the file in step 8. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Between pts. Mastercam displays the coordinates of the points and the distance (2D and 3D) and angle between the points. Only. depending on the Edit option on the Analyze Entity menu.

Analyzing the distance and angle between two points 1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Between pts.

2. Enter two points in the graphics window. In the prompt area, Mastercam displays the coordinates of the points and the distance (2D and 3D) and angle between the points. 3. 4. Repeat step 2 to analyze additional pairs of points. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Analyzing a curve, surface, or solid face at any position Mastercam displays different data depending on the type of entity you select. ¨ For lines, Mastercam displays the point and tangent coordinates.

¨ For arcs and splines, Mastercam displays the point and tangent coordinates and the radius of curvature. ¨ For surfaces and solid faces, Mastercam displays the point coordinates, the normal coordinates, and the minimum radius of curvature. 1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Dynamic.

2. Select a line, arc, spline, surface, or solid face. In the graphics window, Mastercam displays a dynamic arrow on the selected entity. 3. Use the mouse to move the base of the arrow to positions that you want to analyze on the entity. In the prompt area, Mastercam displays data relative to the arrow position. 4. 5. 6. Press [Esc] to stop analyzing the selected entity. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to analyze additional entities. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Analyzing the area/volume of entities The Analyze Area/Volume menu gives you options for analyzing the 2D area of curves, the area defined by surfaces and solid faces, and the volume defined by solid entities. You can access this menu by choosing Main Menu, Analyze, Area/volume. Analyzing 2D curve area 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Area/volume, 2D area. Select one or more closed, flat chains, then choose Done.

140

Note: Nested chains are allowed and are treated as holes whose area is subtracted from the area of the outermost boundary. Disjoint chains are not allowed. 3. Enter a value for Chord height.

Note: This value sets the preciseness with which Mastercam analyzes the area defined by the selected entities. A smaller value results in a more precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area but with the possibility of a longer processing time. 4. View the data, then choose OK to close the dialog box.

Analyzing surface and solid area 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Area/volume, Surface area. Select one or more surfaces, solids, and/or solid faces, then choose Done.

Note: For a solid, Mastercam analyzes the area of all faces associated with the solid. 3. Enter a value for Chord height.

Note: This value sets the preciseness with which Mastercam analyzes the area defined by the selected entities. A smaller value results in a more precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area but with the possibility of a longer processing time. 4. View the data, then choose OK to close the dialog box.

Analyzing solid volumes 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Area/volume, Solid props. If prompted, select a solid.

Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window, Mastercam selects it automatically. 3. View the data for Volume, then choose OK to close the dialog box.

Analyzing an entity by number Mastercam assigns a unique number to each entity in the file, which provides a useful method for referencing entities. 1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Number.

2. In the prompt area, enter the number of the entity to analyze. Mastercam displays data about the entity in the prompt area or in a dialog box, depending on the Edit option on the Analyze Entity menu. 3. To analyze additional entities by number, choose Number on the Analyze Entity menu and enter the entity number in the prompt area.

141

4.

Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Analyzing problems in chains In addition to analyzing chains for overlapping entities, direction reversals, and short entities, you can create geometry to mark problem areas, which helps you identify these areas in order to fix them. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Chain. Select one or more chains, then choose Done.

Note: To avoid missing overlapping or short entities, we recommend that you use the Window chaining method. 3. Set display options for the types of problems you want to locate in the chains, then choose OK.

4. In the prompt area, Mastercam reports the number of each type of problem it finds and highlights the problem areas in the graphics window. Press [Enter] to exit the function after reviewing the data. Analyzing surfaces The Analyze Surfaces menu gives you options for analyzing surfaces for information such as surface curvature, bad surfaces, base surfaces, downward normal directions, backups, and self-intersections. You can access this menu by choosing Main Menu, Analyze, Surfaces. Analyzing surface curvature 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Surfaces, Curvature. Choose Rad limits. In the prompt area, type a value for the minimum detectable radius, then press [Enter]. Type a value for the maximum detectable radius, then press [Enter]. Choose Surfaces. Select one or more surfaces, then choose Done.

Note: To analyze all visible surfaces, skip this step. 7. Set additional parameters on the Surface Curvature Analysis menu, as needed, then choose Do it to view the curvature display.

Testing surface normals The Test Normals function analyzes the normal vector of selected surfaces and reports the number of bad surfaces whose normal vector reverses direction abruptly in one or more locations. These surfaces are inherently unstable and may present problems during machining or may be unmachinable.

142

In addition to reporting the number of bad surfaces, this function gives you the option to change the color of the surfaces, which is helpful for identifying them in the graphics window in order to fix or recreate them. When changing the color of these surfaces, Mastercam uses the main system color, as indicated on the Secondary menu. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Surfaces, Test norms. Select one or more surfaces, then choose Done.

3. Mastercam displays a window containing the number of bad surfaces in the selection. Choose OK to continue. 4. If prompted, choose Yes to change the color of bad surfaces to the current system color, which makes them easier to identify in the graphics window, or No to maintain the current color of the surfaces. Notes: ¨ Once you’ve identified bad surfaces, you can use the Analyze, Dynamic function to further analyze the direction changes. ¨ To correct a bad surface, the portion of the surface containing the direction reversal must be trimmed from the surface, if possible. Otherwise, the surface must be recreated.

Checking the display for visible base surfaces This function lets you quickly check for and optionally blank visible base surfaces in the graphics window. Note: A base surface is the untrimmed parent surface of a trimmed surface. When Mastercam trims a surface, it creates the trimmed surface as a new surface and, in most cases, blanks the base surface, which allows you to work with the new surface and does not crowd the graphics window with the associated base surface. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Surfaces, Base surfs. Choose All, Surfaces, Done.

3. Mastercam displays a window containing the number of visible base surfaces in the current file. Choose OK to close the dialog box. 4. If prompted, choose Yes to blank the base surfaces or No to maintain the base surfaces as visible surfaces.

Setting the surface normal direction upward relative to the current Cplane The Check Model function analyzes surfaces for the following conditions, which pose problems in surface machining and surface shading: self-intersections, backups, and internal sharp ridges. The Check Model function is capable of fixing backups. However, it is not capable of fixing self-intersections or internal sharp ridges. We recommend that you try to fix these conditions in the sending system before importing the file 143

into Mastercam. You can also try to fix the problems in Mastercam by trimming the self-intersection from the trimmed surface and by splitting surfaces along the ridges. See the related topics below for more information. 1. 2. 3. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Surfaces, Check model. Select one or more surfaces, then choose Done. In the prompt area, enter a self-intersection tolerance.

4. Mastercam analyzes the selected surfaces and displays a message stating the number of trimmed surfaces and the number of surfaces containing each type of problem. Choose OK to continue. 5. When problem surfaces are detected, you have the option to have Mastercam mark them in the graphics window. Doing so is helpful for identifying them in order to fix or recreate them. Follow the system prompts. Note: You have the following options for marking problem surfaces: ¨ For backups, you can change the surface color to a color that you select.

¨ For self-intersections, you can change the surface color to a color that you select. You can also create a point entity at the location where the surface crosses over itself. Mastercam creates this point using the main system color, as defined on the Secondary menu. ¨ For internal sharp ridges, you can create curves (lines, arcs, splines) along the sharp ridges. You have the option to create the curves using a color that you select or the main system color, as defined on the Secondary menu.

Checking surface models for self-intersections, backups, and internal sharp ridges The Check Model function analyzes surfaces for the following conditions, which pose problems in surface machining and surface shading: self-intersections, backups, and internal sharp ridges. The Check Model function is capable of fixing backups. However, it is not capable of fixing self-intersections or internal sharp ridges. We recommend that you try to fix these conditions in the sending system before importing the file into Mastercam. You can also try to fix the problems in Mastercam by trimming the self-intersection from the trimmed surface and by splitting surfaces along the ridges. See the related topics below for more information. 1. 2. 3. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Surfaces, Check model. Select one or more surfaces, then choose Done. In the prompt area, enter a self-intersection tolerance.

4. Mastercam analyzes the selected surfaces and displays a message stating the number of trimmed surfaces and the number of surfaces containing each type of problem. Choose OK to continue.

144

For example. 2. Check Solid. Checking solids from the Analyze Solid dialog box 1. Choose Main Menu.5. Or you may use the Remove Faces function to remove faces having problems identified by the Check Solid function in order to reconstruct new surfaces. Checking solid models for errors The Check Solid function analyzes solids for error conditions that may pose problems in solid modeling operations. arcs. you can create curves (lines. from the Analyze Solid dialog box. ¨ For self-intersections. you can change the surface color to a color that you select. 3. On the Analyze Entity menu. the Check Solid dialog box displays and lists up to ten errors. You can access the Check Solids function from the Analyze Surfaces menu. This function is particularly useful for analyzing the integrity of imported solids and identifying entities that you may need to repair or reconstruct. as defined on the Secondary menu. Choose Check Solid. The Analyze Solid dialog box displays. Select a solid entity in the graphics window. This function identifies and describes specific errors and highlights their location in the solid drawing. Analyze. If errors are detected. Analyze. Surfaces. Doing so is helpful for identifying them in order to fix or recreate them. If errors are detected. a confirming message displays. you have the option to have Mastercam mark them in the graphics window. Checking solids from the Analyze Surfaces menu 1. Choose Main Menu. which can be subsequently stitched using the From Surfaces function. or from the Solids Manager. You have the option to create the curves using a color that you select or the main system color. make sure Edit is set to Y. Only. splines) along the sharp ridges. the Check Solid dialog box redisplays and lists up to ten errors. The Check Solid dialog box displays. you can change the surface color to a color that you select. Solids. ¨ For internal sharp ridges. You can also create a point entity at the location where the surface crosses over itself. When problem surfaces are detected. Note: You have the following options for marking problem surfaces: ¨ For backups. 145 . with file formats in which healing during import is supported. Follow the system prompts. Choose Perform Check. a confirming message displays. Mastercam creates this point using the main system color. as defined on the Secondary menu. 2. 3. If no errors are detected. 4. If no errors are detected. you may want to reimport the file with this feature turned on. Select a solid entity in the graphics window.

Select a solid in the list. Choose Zoom to selected item to magnify the selected error in the graphics window. If errors are detected. 146 . Analyze. 2. Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. A smaller value results in a more precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area but with the possibility of a longer processing time. Analyze. 3. then choose Check Solid. flat chains. Disjoint chains are not allowed. Repeat step 2 to analyze additional entities. Solids. Mastercam displays data about the entity in the prompt Note: If the Edit option on the Analyze Entity menu is set to Y. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Some of the data may be editable. Note: This value sets the preciseness with which Mastercam analyzes the area defined by the selected entities. Select one or more closed. Choose Main Menu. a confirming message displays. Enter a value for Chord height. Creating a point at the center of gravity of a 2D curve boundary 1. Right-click on the selected solid. 2. the Check Solid dialog box displays and lists up to ten errors. you can reset Maximum number of errors to a higher value (default is 10) and choose Perform Check see if there are more detectable errors. 3. Analyzing entity and attribute data 1. area. Choose Main Menu. ¨ If ten errors are listed. 2D area. Note: Nested chains are allowed and are treated as holes whose area is subtracted from the area of the outermost boundary. If no errors are detected. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.Checking solids from the Solids Manager 1. Choose Unzoom to return the graphics window to the original display scale. Notes on managing error display When errors are listed in the Check Solid dialog box: ¨ ¨ ¨ Select a listed error to highlight its location in the graphics window. then choose Done. Choose Main Menu. Select an entity in the graphics window. 2. Mastercam displays the data in a dialog box. 4. 3. Area/volume.

Select one or more closed.Y of a 2D curve boundary 1. Area/volume. Disjoint chains are not allowed. about CG). 2D area. Choose OK to close the dialog box and create the point. Area/volume. flat chains. then choose Done. 3. flat chains. Check Create Pt (Moment of Inertia. Creating a point at the moment of inertia about the center of gravity of a 2D curve boundary 1. 2. Check Create Pt (Moment of Inertia. Enter a value for Chord height. Select one or more closed. 2. A smaller value results in a more precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area but with the possibility of a longer processing time. 2D area. Check Create Pt (Center of Gravity). Analyze. Choose Main Menu. 4. Note: This value sets the preciseness with which Mastercam analyzes the area defined by the selected entities. Note: Nested chains are allowed and are treated as holes whose area is subtracted from the area of the outermost boundary. Disjoint chains are not allowed. 5. Select one or more closed. Enter a value for Chord height. flat chains. 3. Choose Main Menu. Note: Nested chains are allowed and are treated as holes whose area is subtracted from the area of the outermost boundary. then choose Done. Area/volume. Note: Nested chains are allowed and are treated as holes whose area is subtracted from the area of the outermost boundary. Note: This value sets the preciseness with which Mastercam analyzes the area defined by the selected entities. 4. Choose Main Menu. about X. Analyze. A smaller value results in a more precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area but with the possibility of a longer processing time. Disjoint chains are not allowed. Choose OK to close the dialog box and create the point. then choose Done. 147 . 5. Choose OK to close the dialog box and create the point. 2D area. Analyzing 2D curve area 1.4. Creating a point at the moment of inertia about X.Y). 5. 2. Analyze.

Analyze. Mastercam selects it automatically. Mastercam displays the point and tangent coordinates and the radius of curvature. 3. Analyze. View the data. 3. Mastercam displays the point and tangent coordinates. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window. ¨ For surfaces and solid faces. Enter a value for Chord height. View the data. Solid props. 4. View the data for Volume. and/or solid faces. Mastercam displays the point coordinates. then choose OK to close the dialog box. then choose Done. Note: For a solid. Choose Main Menu. ¨ For arcs and splines. 148 . then choose OK to close the dialog box. Note: This value sets the preciseness with which Mastercam analyzes the area defined by the selected entities. Note: This value sets the preciseness with which Mastercam analyzes the area defined by the selected entities. then choose OK to close the dialog box. Analyzing surface and solid area 1. Area/volume. solids. Choose Main Menu. the normal coordinates. Analyzing a curve. 2. ¨ For lines. 1. or solid face at any position Mastercam displays different data depending on the type of entity you select. Analyzing solid volumes 1. 4. Dynamic. Surface area. A smaller value results in a more precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area but with the possibility of a longer processing time. Choose Main Menu. Select one or more surfaces. A smaller value results in a more precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area but with the possibility of a longer processing time. surface. Mastercam analyzes the area of all faces associated with the solid.3. 2. Analyze. and the minimum radius of curvature. Area/volume. Enter a value for Chord height. select a solid. If prompted.

Enter a value for Density. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window. 3. or solid face. 2. 6. Area/volume. Choose OK to close the dialog box. Analyze. Press [Esc] to exit the function. In the prompt area. 4. Mastercam selects it automatically. 4. If prompted. Calculating a solid's moment of inertia about a selected axis line 1. In the field next to the Axis Line button. 3. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window. Use the mouse to move the base of the arrow to positions that you want to analyze on the entity. arc. 5. Solid props. 3. surface. spline. Mastercam selects it automatically. If prompted. select a solid. Mastercam displays data relative to the arrow position. Choose Main Menu. 2. Choose Main Menu. Mastercam selects it automatically. Choose OK to close the dialog box. 3. 4. Select a line in the graphics window. Select a line. then choose Axis Line. Area/volume. Creating a point at a solid's center of gravity 1. Mastercam displays a dynamic arrow on the selected entity. Analyze. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to analyze additional entities. 149 . select a solid. If prompted. Area/volume. Solid props. Analyze. 5. Calculating a solid's mass 1. Solid props. 2. Mastercam displays the solid’s moment of inertia relative to the selected line and density. Check Create Pt. Mastercam updates the value for Mass.2. Set Density. Choose Main Menu. In the graphics window. Press [Esc] to stop analyzing the selected entity. 4. Choose OK to close the dialog box and create the point. select a solid.

Choose Main Menu. In the graphics window. Analyze. 3. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. Editing the position of a line 1. toggle it to Y. 2. if necessary. Type a value for Length. 4. Enter XYZ coordinates for Endpoint 1 or Endpoint 2. 6. 5. 2. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. Choose Main Menu. Choose OK to close the dialog box. 7. Repeat step 4 for the other endpoint. 3. 6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.Editing the position of a point 1. 6. Select a line. Enter XYZ coordinates or choose Move and enter a point in the graphics window Choose OK to close the dialog box. Choose OK to close the dialog box. toggle it to Y. or choose Move and enter a point in the graphics window. 3. 5. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. 2. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 4. 4. Analyze. Choose Main Menu. Press [Esc] to exit the function. select the line at the endpoint where you want the length change to be calculated. Analyze. then press [Enter]. Select a point. Select a line. toggle it to Y. 7. Editing the length of a line 1. 150 . 5.

151 . Mastercam calculates the length from the arc’s ending point. then choose OK. Enter a View number. Choose Main Menu. 2.Editing the construction view of an arc The construction view is the plane that the arc was constructed on (Cplane). Mastercam calculates the angle from the arc’s ending point. Change the sweep of the arc by taking one of the following actions: Enter an angle value for Sweep. 4. toggle it to Y. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 3. Enter a value for 3D Length. Analyze. Enter a Radius or Diameter value. Select an arc. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. 1. 6. then choose OK. 5. Select an arc. toggle it to Y. Select an arc. 2. 3. 4. Editing the sweep of an arc 1. toggle it to Y. ¨ Enter an angle value for Startpoint and/or Endpoint or choose the corresponding Move button and enter a point in the graphics window. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. 3. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 4. 5. Analyze. Choose Main Menu. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. Choose OK to close the dialog box. Editing the size of an arc 1. 5. 2. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Analyze. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu.

Analyze. 2. 8. 5. At the prompt. Press [Enter] to continue. toggle it to Y. 5. Enter Center XYZ coordinates. 3. Press [Esc] to exit the function. In the prompt area. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. Enter a value for Allowable Error. If prompted. Select a NURBS spline. Reducing the amount of data stored for a parametric spline 1. 4. Select an arc. Mastercam displays the number of node points removed from the spline. Select a parametric spline. Enter a value for Allowable Error. choose Yes to save the spline with the reduced number of node points or No to maintain the original spline. 4. Press [Enter] to continue. 2. Reducing the amount of data stored for a NURBS spline 1. Analyze. Choose Main Menu. Analyze. or choose Move and enter a point in the graphics window. 4. toggle it to Y. 6. choose Yes to save the spline with the reduced number of control points or No to maintain the original spline. 5. Choose OK to close the dialog box.Editing the position of an arc 1. then choose Reduce It. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. Press [Esc] to exit the function. toggle it to Y. Choose Main Menu. Choose OK to exit the dialog box. 152 . 7. 3. Choose Main Menu. 2. In the prompt area. then choose Reduce It. 3. 6. 6. Mastercam displays the number of control points removed from the spline.

8. Flattening a 3D parametric spline 1. 7. Choose OK to close the dialog box. 5. 4. Analyze. 4. Choose Flatten. Choose OK to close the dialog box. 2. Select a node point on the spline. choose Keep Tan for one or both endpoints before choosing Move Node. 153 . Analyze. 8. Select a 3D parametric spline. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Choose Main Menu. toggle it to Y. 2. Choose Main Menu. then press [Esc] to return to the dialog box. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 3. Choose OK to close the dialog box.7. Choosing No tells Mastercam that you want to move the endpoint. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 6. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to move additional node points. then press [Esc] to set the point. Choosing Yes tells Mastercam that you want to move the startpoint. Select a node point. 3. 9. Choose Move Node. Mastercam displays the message shown below. Note: If you select the start/endpoint of a closed spline. Note: To maintain the tangency of the spline’s endpoints. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. 5. Enter a point for the new node position. then press [Esc]. toggle it to Y. Note: The selected node point sets the depth of the flattened spline. 7. Modifying the position of a node point 1. 6. Select a parametric spline.

3. 3. Mastercam calculates the angle from the surface’s end angle. 2. Select a curve-generated revolved surface. then choose OK. Editing the angle of a draft surface 1. 2. ¨ Choose Main Menu. toggle it to Y. Select an offset surface. Enter an Offset distance value. 5. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. 3. 154 .Editing the offset distance of a surface 1. 4. toggle it to Y. 4. 2. Analyze. toggle it to Y. Enter an Angle value. Analyze. 5. then choose OK. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Choose Main Menu. Analyze. then choose OK. 5. Select a curve-generated draft surface. Choose Main Menu. 4. 2. Select a curve-generated draft surface. Choose Main Menu. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. Editing the sweep of a revolved surface 1. Analyze. 3. Enter a 3D Length value. 4. Change the sweep of the surface by taking one of the following actions: Enter an angle value for Sweep. Editing the length of a draft surface 1. toggle it to Y. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

g. Enter an angle value for Start Angle and/or End Angle. and hatch entities. recreating or reformatting the entity to Mastercam standards. You can use this option when automatic regeneration is turned off (e. Creating and editing drafting entities The Drafting menu gives you options for creating and editing drafting entities: dimensions. labels. associated and nonassociated. you can also set or edit drafting parameters that affect drafting entities you select or create. Accessing the Drafting menu also puts you in SmartMode. Drafting. and edit a variety of drafting entities. The Regenerate menu gives you the following options for regenerating associated drafting entities: ¨ Automatic. Turning on this option tells Mastercam to regenerate associated drafting entities automatically. ¨ Select. ¨ If you modify (e. Choosing this option lets you regenerate all associated drafting entities at a particular time.g. trim) an arc so that a dimensioned quadrant point is no longer valid. Press [Esc] to exit the function.g. You can access the Regenerate menu by choosing Main Menu. In addition to creating or editing specific drafting entities. Drafting menu options Regenerating associated drafting entities When you create associated drafting entities. Create. regenerating an associated dimension means that: ¨ ¨ When you resize an entity. Drafting. create. leader lines. It runs each entity through the regeneration process. ¨ Validate. witness lines. Regenerate.¨ 5. 6. 155 . the associated dimension moves with it. during periods of intensive editing). Mastercam prompts you to convert the dimension to a radius/diameter format or to dissociate it. changing the size or position of geometry changes the status of associated drafting entities from "clean" to "dirty. You can access the Drafting menu by choosing Main Menu. you can validate both associated and non-associated drafting entities. Dirty drafting entities are highlighted in red. during periods of intensive editing) ¨ All. Create. whenever a change in geometry requires it... In particular. Choose OK to close the dialog box. the associated dimension’s value changes accordingly.. When you move an entity. Regenerating the drafting entity updates its position and/or value so that they once again match the geometry. notes. where you can select. Choosing this option lets you regenerate all drafting entities. However. Choosing this option lets you select associated drafting entities to regenerate at a particular time. You can use this option when automatic regeneration is turned off (e." A status of "dirty" means that the position and/or value of the associated entity no longer matches its geometry. Only associated drafting entities can be regenerated.

Creating drafting dimensions Mastercam provides two menus for creating drafting dimensions: the Drafting menu (SmartMode) and the Dimension menu. ¨ Drafting menu (SmartMode). The Drafting menu, when displayed, puts you into SmartMode, an integrated drafting environment where you can create all dimensions except baseline, chained, or ordinate. You can also create other entities such as notes, labels, leaders, and hatch entities from the Drafting menu. To access the Drafting menu, choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting. When to use. Because of its flexibility in allowing you to create or edit many different kinds of drafting entities, you will usually find it more convenient and efficient (fewer mouse clicks) to create dimensions (except baseline, chained, or ordinate) in SmartMode than from the Dimension menu—especially when you are creating or editing different types of dimensions in succession. You must use SmartMode to create perpendicular dimensions, which cannot be created from the Dimension menu. ¨ Dimension menu. The Dimension menu gives you options for creating specific types of dimensions. You can use the Dimension menu to create all dimensions except perpendicular. To access the Dimension menu, choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension. Then choose the option (Horizontal, Vertical, etc.) that corresponds to the dimension you want to create. When to use. If you are creating multiple instances of a particular dimension type (horizontal, vertical, etc.), you may find it more efficient to choose that option from the Dimension menu than to create the dimension in SmartMode. You must use the Dimension menu to create baseline, chained, and ordinate dimensions, as these dimensions cannot be created in SmartMode (from the Drafting menu). Note: You cannot select, reposition, or edit existing dimensions from the Dimension menu. Instead, display the Drafting menu, then use SmartMode and the Quick Edit options to select, reposition, and edit dimensions you wish to change.

Creating dimensions in SmartMode (Drafting menu)
Selecting drafting entities in SmartMode SmartMode is an integrated drafting environment, in which you can create different dimensions as well as select and edit existing dimensions and drafting entities. In this environment, the geometric or drafting entities you select activate the appropriate drafting function, allowing you to create or edit drafting entities, as summarized in the following table and the notes below. Notes: ¨ Selecting an existing drafting entity in SmartMode lets you edit that drafting entity, even if the entity was not created in SmartMode (e.g., a baseline, chained, or ordinate dimension, a note, or a label). ¨ To activate the point dimension function in SmartMode, the Display in SmartMode parameter must be turned on (checked) in the Dimension Text tab of the Drafting Globals dialog box. You can, however, select and edit an existing point dimension in SmartMode.

156

Creating dimensions in SmartMode: Overview As a dynamic environment for creating drafting dimensions, SmartMode allows you to create point, linear (horizontal, vertical, perpendicular, or tangent), angular, and circular, dimensions depending on the points or entities you select and the sequence in which you select them. The following table summarizes the selection sequences you can use to create dimensions in SmartMode.

Note: To create point dimensions in SmartMode, the Display in SmartMode parameter must be turned on (checked) in the Dimension Text tab of the Drafting Globals dialog box.

157

Creating linear dimensions in SmartMode In SmartMode, you can create horizontal, vertical, or parallel linear dimensions for selected entities in the graphics window. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting. Enter two points or select a line.

Note: Before entering a point, you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. 3. Drag the dimension text in different directions to display available linear dimension types: horizontal, vertical, or parallel. (If you are dragging a dimension associated with a horizontal or vertical line, its type is locked by default.) Note: While dragging the dimension text, you can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension. 4. While the desired dimension type is displayed, press and hold the left mouse button (or choose Quick Edit (L)ock option) to lock the dimension’s current type.

158

5. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then release (or click) the mouse button to set its position. Note: You can also create horizontal, vertical, and parallel dimensions from the Dimension menu. Creating horizontal dimensions (Dimension menu) Choosing the Horizontal option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more horizontal dimensions. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension, Horizontal. Enter two points or select a line.

Note: Before entering a point, you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. 3. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then click to set its position.

Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. 4. 5. Notes: ¨ Choosing the Quick Edit un(L)ock option, when available, allows the dimension to change type (horizontal, vertical, parallel), as you drag the dimension text. ¨ You can also create and edit horizontal dimensions in SmartMode. Creating vertical dimensions (Dimension menu) Choosing the Vertical option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more vertical dimensions. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension, Vertical. Enter two points or select a line. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional horizontal dimensions, as needed. Press [Esc] to exit the Horizontal dimension function.

Note: Before entering a point, you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. 3. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then click to set its position.

Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. 4. 5. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional vertical dimensions, as needed. Press [Esc] to exit the Vertical dimension function.

159

Notes: ¨ Choosing the Quick Edit un(L)ock option, when available, allows the dimension to change type (horizontal, vertical, parallel), as you drag the dimension text. ¨ You can also create and edit vertical dimensions in SmartMode. Creating parallel dimensions (Dimension menu) Choosing the Parallel option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more parallel dimensions. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension, Parallel. Enter two points or select a line.

Note: Before entering a point, you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. 3. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then click to set its position.

Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. 4. 5. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional parallel dimensions, as needed. Press [Esc] to exit the Parallel dimension function.

Creating perpendicular dimensions in SmartMode Perpendicular dimensions measure the perpendicular distance between any of the following: ¨ ¨ ¨ A point and a line Two points and a parallel line Two parallel lines

In SmartMode, you can create perpendicular linear dimensions for selected entities in the graphics window. 1. 2. ¨ ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting. Select either: One point and a line Two points and a parallel line Two parallel lines

160

Drafting. whose angular dimension you wish to display. press and hold the left mouse button (or choose Quick Edit (L)ock option) to lock the dimension into the current quadrant. While the dimension is in the desired quadrant. Drag the dimension into the quadrant. you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. 2. For an example and detailed information about angular dimensions. you can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension. relative to the selected lines or points. 5. Auto Center must be turned off while the dimension is locked. Note: To drag the dimension text outside of its quadrant. Note: While dragging the dimension text. then release (or click) the mouse button to save the position. Create. you can create angular dimensions for selected entities. see Creating angular dimensions (Dimension menu). Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. 5. Creating angular dimensions in SmartMode In SmartMode. While the desired perpendicular dimension is displayed. you can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension. (To select the two points you must first choose the Quick Edit Point mode option while dragging the linear dimension associated with the first line selected. Drag the dimension in different directions to display available perpendicular dimensions for the selected points and/or lines. 3. then release (or click) the mouse button to save the position. You can add connecting tails out-of quadrant text by checking the Add tail to angular leaders parameter in the Witness/Leaders/Arrows tab of the Drafting Globals dialog box. press and hold the left mouse button (or choose Quick Edit (L)ock option) to lock the current dimension.) Note: Before entering a point.Note: Before entering a point. 4. * * Choose Main Menu. Select either: Two non-parallel lines Three points (first point selected become the vertex) * A line and two points. 4. you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. 161 . Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. 3. Note: While dragging the dimension text. 1.

Create. see Tangent dimensions.Creating circular dimensions in SmartMode In SmartMode. horizontal. 3. as follows: ¨ ¨ ¨ If you selected a circle. While the desired dimension type (circular. the dimension’s last specified style is displayed. or vertical. 1. 4. Drag the dimension in different directions to display available dimension types: circular. If you selected an existing circular dimension. Select either: A circle (or two points on the same circle) An arc (or two points on the same arc) Note: Before entering a point. choose the Quick Edit (R)ad or (D)ia options. For an example and detailed information about circular dimensions. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. horizontal. Note: While dragging the dimension text. 2. 5. Drafting. Drafting. For an example and detailed information about tangent dimensions. you can create circular dimensions for selected entities. 1. you can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension. 2. a diameter dimension is displayed. Creating tangent dimensions in SmartMode In SmartMode. you can create tangent dimensions for selected entities. then release (or click) the mouse button to save the position. you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. a radius dimension is displayed. see Creating circular dimensions (Dimension menu). To change the measured dimension between diameter and radius. If you selected an arc (<360 degrees). Note: The default dimension depends on the selected object. Select either: A point and an arc/circle A line and an arc/circle 162 . 6. Create. or vertical) is displayed. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. press and hold the left mouse button (or choose Quick Edit (L)ock option) to lock the dimension’s current type. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu.

you can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension. Drafting. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. Choose Main Menu. For an example and detailed information about point dimensions. 2. Horizontal. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional point dimensions. Creating point dimensions in SmartMode In SmartMode. 1. Create. Enter two points or select a line. the Display in SmartMode parameter must be turned on (checked) in the Dimension Text tab of the Drafting Globals dialog box. Choose Main Menu. The following example shows a horizontal dimension: Choosing the Horizontal option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more horizontal dimensions. Drag the dimension in different directions to display available dimension types (vertical.¨ Two arc/circles 3. Drafting. see Creating point dimensions (Dimension menu). 4. While the desired tangent dimension is displayed. Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. then release (or click) the mouse button to save the position. Creating dimensions from the Dimension menu Creating horizontal dimensions (Dimension menu) Horizontal dimensions are linear dimensions that measure the horizontal distance between two points. Create. 1. you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. Enter a point Note: Before entering a point. 3. then click to set its position. 5. Note: Before entering a point. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. Dimension. 2. press and hold the left mouse button (or choose Quick Edit (L)ock option) to lock the dimension’s current type. 3. as needed. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. Note: To enable the point dimension function in SmartMode. then click to set its position. you can create point dimensions for selected entities. horizontal) and tangent points. Note: While dragging the dimension text. you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. 4. 163 .

Parallel. Note: Before entering a point. The following example shows a vertical dimension: Choosing the Vertical option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more vertical dimensions. then click to set its position. Creating parallel dimensions (Dimension menu) Parallel dimensions are linear dimensions that measure the actual distance between two points and are parallel to the axis that runs between the two points. you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. Enter two points or select a line. 3. 2. Vertical. Create. 1. parallel). Choose Main Menu. 1. 5. allows the dimension to change type (horizontal. 5. 164 . Creating vertical dimensions (Dimension menu) Vertical dimensions are linear dimensions that measure the vertical distance between two points. vertical. you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. ¨ You can also create and edit horizontal dimensions in SmartMode. 4. Note: Before entering a point. Press [Esc] to exit the Horizontal dimension function. as needed. Notes: ¨ Choosing the Quick Edit un(L)ock option. Choose Main Menu. when available. Create. Dimension. Dimension. 2. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional horizontal dimensions. Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. 4. Press [Esc] to exit the Vertical dimension function.Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. Drafting. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. as needed. as you drag the dimension text. then click to set its position. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional vertical dimensions. 3. Enter two points or select a line. The following example shows a parallel dimension: Choosing the Parallel option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more parallel dimensions. Drafting.

the dimension is set at the fixed baseline increment as soon as you enter the endpoint (step 3). 165 . The Point Entry menu displays. 1. 7. If desired. Drafting. Press [Esc] to complete the current baseline dimension series. 6. 4. 8. repeat steps 2–6 to create another set of baseline dimensions using a different linear dimension. which serves as a "base" line. Create. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to create additional baseline dimensions using the same linear dimension. When you create a series of baseline dimensions. Dimension. If you enter a point to the right of the original dimension’s midpoint. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional parallel dimensions. If the original (base) dimension is associated to a geometric entity.Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. as needed. 2. where you enter the endpoint for the first baseline dimension determines which witness line of the base dimension serves as the reference entity for all subsequent baseline dimensions in the series. Creating baseline dimensions Baseline dimensions are linear dimensions that reference an existing linear dimension. Press [Esc] to exit the Parallel dimension function. 5. If Baseline Increments: Automatic is checked. 4. Mastercam uses the witness line to the left as the reference entity. then click to set its position. Choosing the Baseline option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more series of baseline dimensions. Select a linear dimension to be the base. Press [Esc] to exit the baseline dimension function. and vice-versa. Depending on your drafting settings (Settings tab in the Drafting Globals dialog box). Choose Main Menu. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. Enter a point for the second endpoint of the first baseline dimension that you want to create. Note: You can drag the dimension text and use the Quick Edit options only if the Baseline Increments: Automatic parameter is not checked in the Settings tab of the Drafting Globals dialog box. 5. the linked baseline dimensions inherit that associativity. Baseline. or zero distance. you can set baseline dimensions at pre-determined increments or in a position you choose. You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. 3.

Chained. Creating circular dimensions (Dimension menu) Circular dimensions measure the diameter or the radius of arcs and circles. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to chain each new dimension to the previous one. a horizontal dimension is drawn. Mastercam calculates the midpoint of the previously entered dimension. 8. beginning with the selection of an existing linear dimension. and vice versa. 6. Dimension. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. a vertical dimension is drawn. Press [Esc] to complete the current chain. 5. 7. Mastercam uses the previous dimension’s right witness line as the first witness line of the new dimension. 3. 166 . Create. Select a linear dimension. The Point Entry menu displays. Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. becomes the base for the next dimension in the chain. then click to set its position. in turn. 2. Chained dimensions are not associated with a geometric entity. Each chained dimension. the dimension type and/or format changes (unless it is locked) as follows: ¨ ¨ To the right and left of the arc or circle. Choosing the Circular option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more circular dimensions. even if the original base dimension selected for the chain is associated. Enter a point for the second endpoint of the first chained dimension that you want to create. The format of a circular dimension can be linear (horizontal or vertical) or radius/diameter (rotating). You can position the dimension text inside or outside the arc. When you create each new dimension in a chain. Drafting. ¨ Inside the arc or circle or outside any of the four 45-degree "quadrants. Above and below the arc or circle. Choosing the Chained option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more sets of chained dimensions. Press [Esc] to exit the chained dimension function. Where you enter the endpoint for the new dimension determines which witness line of the previous dimension becomes the new dimension’s reference entity. While you drag a circular dimension." a radius/diameter (rotating) dimension is drawn. depending on the position to which you drag the dimension. If you enter a point to the right of the previous dimension’s midpoint. Choose Main Menu." or zero distance for the first chained dimension.Creating chained dimensions Chained dimensions are linear dimensions that build on one another. Repeat steps 2–6 to create another set of chained dimensions using a different linear dimension. This dimension is used as a "base. 4. 1.

three points. 4. Do either of the following: Select two non-parallel lines. a radius dimension is displayed. specify an angle (0 to 180 degrees) in the prompt area. Enter a point. Drafting. press and hold the left mouse button (or choose Quick Edit (L)ock option) to lock the quadrant. as follows: If you selected a circle. ¨ Choose Main Menu. 2. If you selected an arc (<360 degrees). Create. 6. Drafting. Drag the dimension in different directions to display available types and formats: circular. While the desired dimension type or format (radius/diameter. Mastercam displays the dimension. as needed. or a line and a horizon (a virtual line defined by specifying an angle relative to the X axis of the Cplane). horizontal. Angular dimensions from three points can be created only in SmartMode. or vertical) is displayed. Select an arc or a circle. 4. Dimension. Press [Esc] to exit the circular dimension function. 2. 167 . 3. The following example shows an angular dimension: Choosing the Angular option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more angular dimensions. Note: While dragging the dimension text. you can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension. 3. 5. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. Drag the dimension in different directions to display available quadrants. and press [Enter]. a diameter dimension is displayed. horizontal. or vertical. ¨ Select a line. Creating angular dimensions (Dimension menu) Angular dimensions measure the angle formed by: two non-parallel lines. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. you can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension. two points and a line. then Release (or click) the mouse button to set its position. While the desired quadrant is displayed. Dimension. Angular. then choose Relative from the Angular dimension menu to display the Point Entry menu. Note: While dragging the dimension text. Create. 1. Circular. Choosing the Quick Edit (R)ad or (D)ia options changes the measured dimension between diameter and radius. Repeat steps 2–5 to create additional circular dimensions. 7.1. press and hold the left mouse button (or choose Quick Edit (L)ock option) to lock the dimension type.

For each child dimension. Creating tangent dimensions (Dimension menu) Choosing the Tangent option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more tangent dimensions. Creating horizontal ordinate dimensions Horizontal ordinate dimensions measure the horizontal distance. 7. Dimension.0000. Drafting. The base dimension is an initial ordinate dimension that you create or select and whose position Mastercam designates as 0. Ordinate dimensions are composed of a base (also referred to as a "parent") dimension and one or more secondary (also referred to as "child") dimensions. as needed. Do either of the following: If you selected a point or a line in step 2. all children of that dimension become dirty as well. Select a point. 6. You can access the Ordinate Dimension menu by choosing Main Menu. or another arc/circle. The Ordinate Dimension menu gives you options for creating ordinate dimensions. as needed.5. Press [Esc] to exit the angular dimension function. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. 3. Creating ordinate dimensions Ordinate dimensions are non-linear dimensions that measure distance from a common base dimension. ¨ ¨ 4. 168 . Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. Create. if a change in geometry causes an associated base ordinate dimension to become dirty. then click to set its position. Choose Main Menu. If you selected an arc/circle in step 2. select a point. ordinate dimensions can display tolerances. Base or child ordinate dimensions may be associated with geometry independently of each other. Repeat steps 2-4 to create additional tangent dimensions. Repeat steps 2 – 5 to create additional angular dimensions. Drafting. 1. However. from a common base point. see Tangent dimensions. Press [Esc] to exit the tangent dimension function. Tangent. line. Ordinate. Create. then Release (or click) the mouse button to set its position. 6. 2. line. select an arc/circle. or zero distance. Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. Mastercam calculates its distance from the base dimension to determine its text value. Dimension. While non-linear in format. along the X axis of the current Cplane. 5. The following example shows a horizontal ordinate dimension. or arc/circle. For examples and information about creating and using tangent dimensions.

Creating vertical ordinate dimensions Choosing the Vertical option from the Ordinate Dimension menu lets you create one or more vertical ordinate dimensions. 5. Ordinate. 1. 2. The Point Entry menu displays. this base point is 0. 3. The Point Entry menu displays. Vertical. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. Create. Press [Esc] to exit the horizontal ordinate dimension function.0000. For the initial ordinate dimension. Choose Main Menu. this base point is 0. Drafting. For the initial ordinate dimension. 1. 4. Ordinate. Dimension. Horizontal.0000. Choose Main Menu. Enter a point. then click to set its position. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional ordinate (child) dimensions. Enter a point. 2. as needed. Create. Dimension. Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. 169 . Drafting.Choosing the Horizontal option from the Ordinate Dimension menu lets you create one or more horizontal ordinate dimensions.

or child. as needed.3. Drafting. Enter two points: the first defines the initial ordinate dimension (0. Create. 5. Press [Esc] to exit the parallel ordinate dimension function. 4. enter a point. as described in step 3. Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional ordinate (child) dimensions. 3. Adding ordinate dimensions to an existing base dimension Choosing the Existing option from the Ordinate Dimension menu lets you add secondary. Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position.0000. 5. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. Choose Main Menu. the second defines the dimension orientation. then drag/edit and position the dimension text. For each additional ordinate (child) dimension you wish to create. 4. Press [Esc] to exit the vertical ordinate dimension function. 2. Creating parallel ordinate dimensions Choosing the Parallel option from the Ordinate Dimension menu lets you create one or more parallel ordinate dimensions. Parallel. Ordinate. Dimension. 1. ordinate dimensions to an existing ordinate base dimension that you select and which Mastercam designates as 0. then click to set its position. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. The Point Entry menu displays.0000). 170 . then click to set its position.

1.0000). 1. Using this method can save time by letting you create many ordinate dimensions at once while eliminating the need to enter individual points. and surface curves. 2. Select entities to dimension from the Entity Selection menu. then choose Done. You can create dimensions at the center points of arcs. The Ordinate Dimension: Automatic dialog box opens. however. the endpoints of arcs. Ordinate.0000) in the X and Y text boxes. Drafting. 7. Window. Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. splines. check one or more options (you must check at least one) to specify what kinds of points to dimension. Ordinate. Type coordinates for the base point (0. Choose OK. Create. Choose Main Menu. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to create additional ordinate dimensions. or choose Select to enter a base point by clicking in the graphics window. Entry is required. then click to set its position. Once you set a base point and other dimension parameters. 6. 4. Create. and/or the endpoints of lines. Select an existing base ordinate dimension (0. child dimensions are associated with the base. Dimension. 171 . Press [Esc] to exit the existing ordinate dimension function. as desired. Under Points. Under Options. 2. Creating multiple ordinate dimensions automatically Choosing the Window option from the Ordinate Dimension menu opens a dialog box that lets you create multiple sets of ordinate dimensions from a common origin (base point) based on parameters that you set for entities that you select. Mastercam automatically creates a base (parent) dimension and all possible child dimensions relative to this point based on the selected parameters and entities. 3. Drafting. Ordinate dimensions created using this method are not associated with any geometry. Choose Main Menu. to achieve desired dimension format. Dimension. 5. as needed. check or clear parameters. You have the option to create horizontal and/or vertical ordinate dimensions. ¨ ¨ Check one or both of the following (you must check at least one): Horizontal to create horizontal ordinate dimensions Vertical to create vertical ordinate dimensions 4. Existing. 5. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. 6. 3. Enter a point for an additional ordinate dimension.

Aligning ordinate dimensions Choosing the Align option from the Ordinate Dimension menu lets you select. Enter a point. reposition. Select and drag an existing ordinate dimension (base or child). Create. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional point dimensions. 3. Drafting. Dimension. you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. 2. Note: Before entering a point. Choose Main Menu. Aligning ordinate dimensions can improve neatness in a drawing while highlighting their relatedness. Drafting. and align the text of all related ordinate dimensions along a common axis. 5. Creating a drafting note You can create a drafting note by choosing the Note option from the Drafting menu. as needed. 3. Choose Main Menu. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. Point. The text of all related ordinate elements snaps into alignment and moves together. 172 . if aligning the ordinate dimensions interferes with other entities in the drawing. Align. Choose Main Menu. The Note dialog box opens. Create. However. you can use the Quick Edit (A)lign option to move a selected ordinate dimension independently from the others. Creating point dimensions (Dimension menu) Point dimensions identify the coordinates for any given position in the graphics window. 1. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. Ordinate. Note. Press [Esc] to exist the point dimension function. 1. The following example shows a point dimension: Choosing the Point option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more point dimensions. 1. then click to set its position and exit the Align function. Create. Dimension. 2. 4. Drafting. Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. then click to set its position.

Note: You can choose Properties to edit the note’s text properties using the Drafting Globals dialog box. If desired. witness lines are paired parallel lines that indicate the end points of a dimension. Enter note text in one or more of the following ways: ¨ Key In. 4. You can also create freestanding witness lines by choosing Witness from the Drafting menu. The following example shows witness lines in a dimension. then press [Esc] to exit the Note function. The Note dialog box closes. unformatted) you wish enter. If you selected Multiple Notes in step 3. Type the text directly into the Note text box. Drag the note text to a desired position in the graphics window. Click Load File to open the Specify File Name to Read dialog box. etc. then click to set its position. Choose Main Menu. Choose OK. You can create freestanding witness lines anywhere in the graphics window. Drafting. Creating freestanding witness lines Witness lines are simple. Create.2. such as midpoints. 5. straight drafting lines (no arrowheads) used to indicate boundaries or connect entities. 1. drag and position each additional note copy. Unless you turn off the display of witness lines (Drafting Globals dialog box). ¨ File. Freestanding witness lines can be associated with the geometry selected during their creation or by entering points relative to an entity. then click Open. Witness. then click the symbol you wish to enter. Locate and select a file containing the text (ASCII. endpoints. Click Add Symbol to open the Select Symbol dialog box. center points. ¨ Symbol. In dimensions. 3. ¨ ¨ Select either of the following: Single Note to create one instance of the note. 173 . Mastercam creates witness lines automatically when you create dimensions. press [Enter] to create line or paragraph breaks. The Point Entry menu displays. quadrant points. Multiple Notes to create multiple copies of the same note.

Mastercam creates leader lines automatically when you create dimensions. select the Settings tab and choose one of the following options: ¨ ¨ ¨ Get globals from disk file Get globals from entity Get default globals 174 . Freestanding leader lines can be associated with the geometry selected during their creation or by entering points relative to an entity. Enter two points. Drafting. 1. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional single or segmented leaders. Beginning with the arrowhead position. 1. Multi edit. The Point Entry menu displays. Drafting. 2. endpoints. Create. 3. enter additional points to create a segmented leader line. To get settings from a file. You can use this option to create single or segmented leader lines. center points. 2. as needed. Press [Esc] when done. The Drafting Globals dialog box opens. 5. etc. Mastercam creates the witness line between them. Press [Esc]. from an entity. then choose Done. enter two points to create a single leader line. Creating freestanding leader lines Leader lines are drafting lines with single arrowheads that function as pointers. Editing global parameters for selected drafting entities Choosing the Multi Edit option on the Drafting menu lets you use the Drafting Globals dialog box to edit parameters for one or more drafting entities that you select. You can create freestanding leader lines anywhere in the graphics window. Mastercam creates a leader line connecting all entered points. 3. 4. as needed. Create. 3. Choose Main Menu. quadrant points. Select one or more entities that you want to edit.2. leader lines most often point from a dimension’s text to its witness lines. such as midpoints. Leader. Unless you turn off the display of leader lines in the Drafting Globals dialog box. In Mastercam. Repeat step 2 to create additional witness lines. Leader lines are also used with note text to create labels. The following example shows a leader line in a dimension: You can also create freestanding leader lines by choosing the Leader option from the Drafting menu. Choose Main Menu. The Entity Selection menu displays. or from the system defaults.

notes. and labels. Choose Edit text to turn on the edit text function (there should be a ‘Y’ following the option to show that it is turned on). For additional help with individual parameter settings. select the appropriate tab and set desired parameters. Note: For additional dialog box help. ¨ text. ¨ In addition to editing multiple drafting entities. regeneration. as described above. Create. 2. and tolerances. and labels without changing the entity’s position in the graphics window. Choose OK to close the Drafting Globals dialog box and apply settings to selected entities. To modify individual settings. ¨ Set initial drafting parameters and save them to the Mastercam configuration file (Screen Configure option) Editing drafting text Turning on the Drafting menu’s Edit text function allows you to edit the text of drafting dimensions. 1. 5. Click the ? in the upper-right corner. ¨ Select the Settings tab to set miscellaneous drafting parameters affecting associativity. witness lines. as follows (only tabs and parameters relevant to selected entities will be available): ¨ Select the Dimension Attributes tab to set parameters affecting dimension format. Choose Main Menu. ¨ To keep settings for future use. Notes: ¨ You cannot select or edit hatch entities. and baseline increments. notes. you can save the new drafting settings to a file before closing the Drafting Globals dialog box. 175 . ¨ Select the Dimension Text tab to set parameters affecting the size and appearance of dimension Select the Note Text tab to set parameters affecting the size and appearance of note and label text.4. ¨ Edit a single drafting entity (Quick Edit (G)lobals option). and arrowheads associated with dimensions. Drafting. display conditions. ¨ Select the Leaders/Witness/Arrows tab to set parameters affecting the display and appearance of leader lines. you can use the Drafting Globals dialog box to: ¨ Set current drafting parameters that apply to all new entities you may create during the drawing session (Drafting Globals option). then click a parameter. display. choose the Help button on each tab. Note: Choosing Edit text again turns off the edit text function (Y changes to N).

or delete a user-defined cross-hatch pattern. where you can create up to eight user-defined hatch patterns (in addition to the eight standard hatch 176 . as follows: In the Spacing box. spacing. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to edit the text of additional drafting entities. The Hatch dialog box opens. type a different value for spacing between hatch lines. regardless of the number of boundaries that you select. then choose OK to close the dialog box and apply changes to the selected entity. then choose Done. Note: If you want to define. Choose OK. In the Angle box. 5. Note: In the Note dialog box. using the above procedure. In either dialog box. To change a hatch entity. Create. 4. Select a hatch pattern from the Pattern list. If necessary. Mastercam fills each closed boundary with the hatch pattern with the exception of nested boundaries. For more information see Related Topics. Notes: ¨ Mastercam creates one hatch entity. Hatch. first delete the existing hatch entity. Note: You can also edit drafting text while dragging an entity by choosing the Quick Edit (T)ext option. Type text changes in the appropriate text box. Select one or more closed chains. which form holes in the pattern. 1. Select a drafting dimension. you can insert special characters (choose Add Symbol or Ø). Drafting. and rotation angle for closed curve boundaries that you select. or label to open the Edit Dimension Text dialog box (if a dimension is selected) or the Note dialog box (if a note or label is selected). ¨ You cannot edit a hatch entity in the graphics window. you can also load text from a file (choose Load File). 3. Choose Main Menu. Defining a hatch pattern Choosing User defined hatch patterns in the Hatch dialog box opens the User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box. 2. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. ¨ ¨ 4. type a different value for the angle of the hatch lines. choose User defined hatch patterns. 5. Creating hatch entities Choosing the Hatch option on the Drafting menu lets you create hatch entities by specifying a hatch pattern. Then create a new hatch entity. note. edit.3. change the spacing and/or angle settings.

Drafting. 177 . select the number of the user-defined pattern you wish to Note: The Hatch Number corresponds to the User Defined # in the Hatch dialog box. Create. Note: The Hatch Number corresponds to the User Defined # in the Hatch dialog box. Hatch. Choose New Hatch to select the next available number of a new pattern you wish to add. Repeat the previous step for each line you wish to modify. (You cannot edit the standard hatch patterns supplied by Mastercam. Drafting. 2. Solid Line. Choose OK to save your changes and close the User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box. Editing a hatch pattern Choosing the Hatch option on the Drafting menu lets you edit the hatch and crosshatch lines of an existing user-defined hatch pattern. The User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box opens and the first user-defined hatch number is selected. 4. you can specify up to 16 hatch lines and 16 crosshatch lines. or Broken Line. Choose User defined hatch patterns. Shortcut: In the Pattern list. 4. The Hatch dialog box opens. 1. then choose either Blank Line. 2. edit. Create. 3. For each user-defined pattern. then choose either Blank Line. Modify Hatch Lines and Cross Hatch Lines as follows: Select a number from the Line # list. ¨ ¨ 5. Hatch. The User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box opens and the first user-defined Hatch Number is selected. You can then proceed to step 4. In the Hatch Number drop-down list. The Hatch dialog box opens. Choose Main Menu. Choose OK to save your work and close the User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box. or Broken Line. ¨ ¨ 5. The User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box opens with that pattern already selected as the Hatch Number.) 1. Repeat the previous step for each line you wish to add. Choose Main Menu. Choose User defined hatch patterns. 3. Solid Line. Specify new Hatch Lines and Cross Hatch Lines as follows: Choose New Line. double-click the user-defined pattern you wish to edit.patterns supplied by Mastercam).

4. 1. Drafting. Create. 3. Shortcut: In the Pattern list. In the Hatch Number drop-down list. select the number of the user-defined pattern you wish to delete. 2. initial drafting configuration settings loaded when you started Mastercam or initialized the current drawing session. for the remainder of the current drafting session. Choose Main Menu. Globals. double-click the user-defined pattern you wish to edit. 1. as follows: ¨ Select the Dimension Attributes tab to set parameters affecting dimension format. The settings you enter override. and tolerances. display. select the appropriate tab and set desired parameters. Setting global drafting parameters for the current drawing session Choosing the Globals option on the Drafting menu opens the Drafting Globals dialog box and lets you set drafting parameters and preferences that apply to all drafting entities you subsequently create during the current drawing session. 5. select the Settings tab and choose one of the following options: ¨ ¨ ¨ 3. or from the system defaults. Drafting. The deleted hatch number reverts to Undefined. Choose User defined hatch patterns. Choose OK to save the change and close the User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box. Hatch. The Hatch dialog box opens. Setting these parameters before creating entities can save you time later on by minimizing the need to edit or recreate entities with the properties you want. You can then proceed to step 4. The User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box opens and the first user-defined hatch number is selected. from an entity.Deleting a hatch pattern Choosing the Hatch option on the Drafting menu lets you delete an existing user-defined hatch pattern. Note: The Hatch Number corresponds to the User Defined # in the Hatch dialog box. Select the Dimension Text tab to set parameters affecting the size and appearance of dimension 178 . Create. To get settings from a file. 2. Choose Main Menu. The Drafting Globals dialog box opens. The User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box opens with that pattern already selected. ¨ text. Get globals from disk file Get globals from entity Get default globals To modify individual settings. Choose Delete Hatch to the remove the selected user-defined pattern.

¨ Select the Note Text tab to set parameters affecting the size and appearance of note and label text. then click a parameter. ¨ Select the Leaders/Witness/Arrows tab to set parameters affecting the display and appearance of leader lines. ¨ Set initial drafting parameters and save them to the Mastercam configuration file (Screen Configure option) 179 . ¨ Select the Settings tab to set miscellaneous drafting parameters affecting associativity. and labels. and baseline increments. click the ? in the upper-right corner. you can save the current drafting settings to a file before closing the Drafting Globals dialog box. notes. and arrowheads associated with dimensions. witness lines. regeneration. Note: For additional help with individual parameter settings. you can use the Drafting Globals dialog box to: ¨ ¨ Edit multiple drafting entities (Drafting Multi edit option). Edit a single drafting entity (Quick Edit (G)lobals option). ¨ In addition to setting drafting parameters for the current drawing session. display conditions. Notes: ¨ To keep settings for future use. 4. Choose OK to close the Drafting Globals dialog box and use the new settings for creating drafting entities during the current drawing session. as described above.

You can create a base operation by taking one of the following actions: ¨ ¨ ¨ Define a solid by extruding. you can create and machine a solid model in Mastercam. The first operation. Creating a solid model in Mastercam Through a few easy steps. revolving. Import a solid from a parasolid file. cone. You can then adapt these steps to create your own solid model. You can perform the following functions to modify a solid: ¨ ¨ Remove material by making one or more cuts on a target solid Add material by creating one or more bosses on a target solid 180 . sweeping. You can create multiple solids in a file. Step 2: Create additional operations. which define the closed boundary of the solid. organized model. Mastercam creates one or more bricks (solids with no operation history) to represent the disjoint pieces. Mastercam is able to keep track of the inside and outside of the model for you. However. regardless of its complexity. It cannot be moved in or deleted from the operation list. Because a solid is a closed. and even combine it with another solid—it still remains one entity. For example. or torus. three-dimensional geometric entity that occupies a region of space and that consists of one or more faces. Note: For additional information on these functions. Unlike wireframe models. which are a collection of curves. a solid model is a single entity. Define a solid using primitive (pre-defined) shapes. Once the base operation has been created. see Solids menu options and Reading a Parasolid file. called the base operation. You work with a solid model as a whole. you can add fillets to a solid. creates the solid. The steps outlined below give you an overview of the process of solid modeling in Mastercam. Step 1: Create a base operation. You never have to determine the surfaces that you want to keep or trim when you perform operations on the solid. Mastercam does not support creation of disjoint bodies. This characteristic makes solid modeling easy because the system handles the complexities of the model behind the scenes. Common) operation would result in disjoint bodies. and surface models. when a Trim or Boolean (Remove. you can perform subsequent operations to modify the solid. To access the Solids menu. The system automatically performs these actions for you. choose Solids from the Main Menu. then hollow it out. sphere. About solid modeling Solid modeling refers to the process of creating solids. A solid is defined by one or more operations. such as a cylinder. rather than building a model from a series of unrelated entities. See the related topics for more information. which are a collection of surfaces.Master cam Solids The Solids menu gives you options for performing solid operations to create and modify solid models and for managing solid operations. or lofting chains of curves. always maintaining each solid as a single entity. A base operation is always listed as the first operation under the solid in the Solids Manager. A solid is a closed. like molding a piece of clay. block.

Deleting geometry that defines an operation is a common cause of invalid operations.. ¨ ¨ Draft solid faces Trim solids to a plane or surface Note: For additional information on these functions. For a solid to be stable and current. see Mill toolpaths and Lathe toolpaths. see Managing solid operations. After editing an operation’s components (geometry and parameters). ¨ Dirty: Describes an operation whose defining parameters and/or geometry have changed and no longer match the associated solid. Step 4: Machine the solid. you can regenerate the solid to incorporate your changes. remove solids from one another. When you perform a solid operation such as extrude. Solid associativity Solid associativity is the dependent relationship between a solid and the operations that define it. you cannot copy operations or move them to a different solid. Note: For additional information on the Solids Manager. You can check the location of an operation in the model. see Solids menu options. when rechaining a fillet operation. You can correct dirty operations by regenerating them.¨ ¨ ¨ Smooth solid edges by adding a radius (fillet) Bevel (chamfer) solid edges Hollow out (shell) solids and optionally cut entry holes ¨ Perform Boolean functions: add solids together. its operations should be clean. which prevents it from being regenerated. For more information. edit an operation’s components (geometry and parameters). ¨ Invalid: Describes an operation that fails due to a problem in its geometry and/or parameters. and regenerate all or individual solids. check a solid model at various points in its development. You can use Mastercam Mill and Mastercam Lathe to create toolpaths directly on solid geometry. For example. find common solid volumes. all of the new edges that you select must be on the same solid where the operation was originally defined. This association can be broken only by deleting the operation. Mastercam marks each invalid operation and its associated solid with a red question 181 . The Solids Manager lists the operations that were performed to define each solid in the current file. This condition applies to all newly created operations and to operations that have been successfully regenerated. The following terms describe a solid operation and the current state of its associativity: ¨ Clean: Describes an operation whose defining parameters and geometry match the associated solid. Step 3: Manage solid operations. draft face. fillet. etc. To fillet edges on a different solid. Mastercam associates it with the solid that it creates or modifies. Associativity eliminates the need to recreate a solid each time you modify it. Mastercam marks each dirty operation and its associated solid with a red X in the Solids Manager. Because an operation is associated with the solid that it creates or modifies. you would need to create a new fillet operation on that solid.

Creating/modifying solids by extruding chains of curves The Extrude function lets you extrude planar chains of curves to create one or more new solid bodies. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 4). You can try to correct an invalid operation by making changes to the operation’s parameters and/or geometry. Set the extrusion direction. choose Add Boss. Mastercam associates the tool body with the target body. The system extrudes chains of curves by driving the shape of the curves along a linear path using a specified direction. Choose Main Menu. The system performs the extrude operation or prompts you to: ¨ Enter a point if you chose to extend the extruded chains to a point. clear Combine Operations. cuts. 4. whether you combine operations. whether the chains are nested. 5. Set additional parameters as needed. a defining operation always precedes a dependent operation in the operation list. indicate whether or not to combine operations: ¨ ¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation. If you delete the cut operation. 2. Note: The default extrusion direction is normal (perpendicular) to the curves. 1. if a cut operation results in a new face and you fillet that face. 3. To process each chain selection as a separate operation. Associativity does not exist between individual solids in a Mastercam file unless those solids are used in Boolean combinations. When you perform a Boolean operation. and other parameters that further define the results. In the Solids Manager. To remove material from an existing body. 6. For example. 182 . Extrude. then choose OK. the fillet operation is dependent on the cut operation. To add material to an existing body. Associativity can also exist between some solid operations. distance. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on each selected chain of curves to reflect its current extrusion direction. Solids. then choose Done. and what construction method you use. ¨ ¨ ¨ Indicate the type of extrude operation to perform: To create new solid bodies. choose Create Body. Select one or more chains. or bosses depends on the number of chains that you select. Mastercam deletes the fillet operation as well because the edge that defined the fillet operation no longer exists. choose Cut Body. The number of resulting solids. then regenerating the operation. but all chains do not have to be in the same plane.mark (?) in the Solids Manager. select Combine Operations. Note: Each chain that you select must be planar (flat). cuts on an existing body. or bosses on an existing body.

¨ Indicate the outward direction for open chains of curves if you chose the thin-wall construction method. Normal One : Sets the extrusion direction of all selected chains normal to one chain that you select. When this menu displays. It is set so that the chain is counter-clockwise about the normal vector. Mastercam does not support extrude operations that would result in disjoint bodies. Line : Sets the extrusion direction of all selected chains based on the direction of a line that you select in the graphics window. Note: When using the thin-wall construction method. The Extrusion Direction menu. You can also access this menu from the Extrude Chain dialog box if you need to edit the extrusion direction at a later time. Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. The endpoint closest to where you select the line functions as the endpoint of the 183 . The sense of the normal vector is determined by the chaining direction and the righthand rule. cut. gives you options for changing the extrusion direction. The default extrusion direction is normal to each chain of curves that you select to extrude. although you can reverse the sense of the normal vector. However. ¨ Select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. or boss. ¨ Select a face if you chose to trim a cut or boss operation to a selected face. ConstZ : Sets the extrusion direction according to the positive Z axis of the current construction plane. Setting the extrusion direction The extrusion direction is the direction that the system drives the shape of the selected chains of curves to form an extruded solid. you must use the normal direction. which displays after you select the chains of curves to extrude. This function tells Mastercam to extrude all selected chains in the same plane. Normal : Sets the extrusion direction normal to each selected chain of curves based on the chaining direction and the right-hand rule. a direction arrow also displays on each selected chain of curves to show the current extrusion direction.

direction vector. Two Points : Sets the extrusion direction of all selected chains based on the direction of the axis defined by two points that you enter using the Point Entry menu. Note: The set of chains that you select must be planar (flat). indicate whether or not to combine operations: ¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation. then choose Done to set the axis. 2. Note: The extrusion direction cannot be parallel to the plane defined by the selected chains of curves because you cannot extrude a chain sideways. and the extrusion direction moves away from this point toward the second point that you enter. Done : Accepts the draft direction indicated by the direction arrow on the reference geometry. Choose Main Menu. Reverse It : Reverses the current extrusion direction of all selected chains. the solid does not update if the points that you enter are actual point entities and they change. The number of resulting solids. ¨ ¨ ¨ Change the rotation axis and/or direction as needed. choose Cut Body. and the extrusion direction moves away from this point along the line. 1. then choose Done. 6. select Combine Operations. Revolve. and the Revolve menu displays. or bosses on an existing body. whether you combine operations. cuts on an existing body. Select one or more chains. 184 . Solids. or bosses depends on the number of chains that you select. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 5). The first point that you enter functions as the endpoint of the direction vector. Select a line in the graphics window to use as the rotation axis. 3. and what construction method you use. 5. The line is not associative. whether the chains are nested. choose Add Boss. Reverse One : Reverses the current extrusion direction of one chain that you select. To create new solid bodies. The points are not associative. the solid does not update if the line changes. The system revolves chains of curves by driving the shape of the curves about an axis using given start and end angles and other parameters that further define the results. 4. To remove material from an existing body. A direction arrow displays on the selected line. Creating/modifying solids by revolving chains of curves The Revolve function lets you revolve planar chains of curves to create one or more new solid bodies. therefore. choose Create Body. cuts. Indicate the type of revolve operation to perform: To add material to an existing body. therefore.

Set additional parameters as needed. with the axis’ direction vector representing the positive Z axis. cuts on an existing body. Creating/modifying solids by sweeping chains of curves The Sweep function lets you sweep closed. Mastercam does not support revolve operations that would result in disjoint bodies. The system performs the revolve operation or prompts you to: ¨ Indicate the outward direction for open chains of curves if you chose the thin-wall construction method. When this menu displays. clear Combine Operations. Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. Reverse : Reverses the current rotation direction. The endpoint closest to the cursor’s position when you select the line defines the base point of the axis’ direction vector. therefore. Note: The rotation direction follows the right-hand rule . planar chains of curves. Note: The revolve operation fails if the axis line causes the solid to self-intersect.¨ To process each chain selection as a separate operation. Selecting a rotation axis The rotation axis is the line about which the system revolves the chains of curves to form a revolved solid. The start and end angles are then measured in a positive sense about the axis. or bosses on an existing body. You can select any line in the graphics window to use as the rotation axis. gives you options for selecting a different line and for reversing the rotation direction. ¨ Select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. The Revolve menu. The default rotation direction is determined when you select a line to use as the rotation axis. The axis line is associative. Done : Accepts the current rotation axis and direction. which displays after you select a line to use as the rotation axis. 7. then choose OK. The system sweeps chains 185 . called section chains. you must regenerate the solid to update the association between the line and the solid if the line changes. including a line on the selected chain of curves. However. Axis : Returns you to the graphics window where you can select a new line to use as the rotation axis. which sets the rotation direction. You can also access this menu from the Revolve Chain dialog box if you need to edit the rotation axis at a later time. to create one or more new solid bodies. a direction arrow also displays on the selected line to show the current rotation direction.

2. (optional) Choose Sync. or a boss on an existing body. Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. or bosses depends on the number of chains that you select. and whether you combine operations. Solids. The start point of each chain and the Sync method that you use when selecting the chains affect how the system aligns the selected chains as it transitions between them. Indicate the type of blend method to use: 186 . The system performs the sweep operation or prompts you to select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. 5. 2. Indicate the type of sweep operation to perform: To create new solid bodies. 4. Mastercam does not support sweep operations that would result in disjoint bodies. To remove material from an existing body. The angle between the section chains and the path chain is maintained throughout each resulting swept solid. However. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 4).of curves by translating and rotating the shape of the curves along the entire distance of a single chain of curves. Choose OK. 4. Choose Main Menu. clear Combine Operations. Select two or more closed chains of curves. select Combine Operations. Note: The set of chains that you select must be planar (flat). indicate whether or not to combine operations: ¨ ¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation. 3. 6. To process each chain selection as a separate operation. then choose Done. choose Create Body. then choose Done. ¨ ¨ ¨ Select one curve or chain of curves for the sweep path. Select one or more closed chains of curves to sweep. select a Sync option from the Chain Synchronization Options dialog box. choose Cut Body. Loft. The number of resulting solids. To add material to an existing body. Creating/modifying solids by lofting chains of curves The Loft function lets you loft closed chains of curves to create a new solid body. called the path chain. whether the chains are nested. choose Add Boss. a cut on an existing body. Choose Main Menu. cuts. Sweep. Solids. 3. 1. The system performs a loft operation by transitioning between two or more chains of curves in the order that you select them using either smooth or ruled (linear) blending between the chains and by capping the first and last chains with solid faces. 1. then choose Done.

Create the first lofted solid as a separate body. however. A selected chain of curves cannot self-intersect. Notes: ¨ You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. then create each additional lofted solid as a boss on the first body. You can increase the calculation speed for lofted solids by trying one or more of the following actions: ¨ Limit the number of chains to four or five and select the chains that provide the most accurate overall definition for the solid. Each chain of curves must form a closed boundary. To remove material from an existing body. you reduce the time it takes for the system to calculate the solid. however.¨ ¨ 5. Choose OK to close the dialog box. 187 . clear Create as Ruled Indicate the type of loft operation to perform: To create new solid bodies. especially when the lofted solid is defined by many chains or if some or all of the chains contain splines. choose Cut Body. by selecting the Create as Ruled parameter on the Loft Chain dialog box . check Create as Ruled To create a linear blend. choose Create Body. All of the chains that you select must follow the same chaining direction. ¨ Create the lofted solid in multiple operations using four or five adjacent chains at a time. the set of chains that you select does not have to be planar. You cannot select a chain of curves more than once for a given loft operation. 6. Mastercam does not support loft operations that would result in disjoint bodies. choose Add Boss. ¨ ¨ ¨ To create a smooth blend. ¨ Create the lofted solid as a ruled solid. Time-saving tips for creating lofted solids Lofted solids sometimes require a large amount of processing time. The system performs the loft operation or prompts you to select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. ¨ For a Loft operation to succeed. By indicating how the chains should be aligned. To add material to an existing body. which takes less time to calculate. the selected chains of curves must meet the following criteria: Each individual chain of curves must be planar. ¨ Use a sync method when selecting the chains.

regardless of whether the chains are nested. With the thin-wall construction method. which has four vertical walls. With the regular method. you have the option to draft the faces associated with the endpoints of open chains of curves when you apply a draft angle to the solid’s walls. Revolve. the system creates a sheet entity (similar to a trimmed surface) within the boundary of the curves. You cannot combine operations when creating a new solid body or modifying parameters from the Solids Manager. however. You can then thicken sheet entities to create closed solid bodies. ¨ When you extrude or revolve open chains of curves using the thin-wall construction method. For example. You can combine operations only when creating new cuts or bosses on an existing body. The following differences further distinguish the construction methods: ¨ You can use open or closed chains of curves when creating solids with the thin-wall construction method. Mastercam does let you create sheet entities by stitching surfaces or by removing faces from a solid. cube-shaped solid.Thin-wall vs. if you extrude a square into a solid using the regular construction method. or sweeping chains of curves. You can use only closed chains with the regular construction method. Note: Mastercam calculates sheet entities when creating solids. 188 . The most significant difference between the construction methods is how Mastercam calculates the solid. Combining solid operations When you create a new cut or boss operation by extruding. While this interim body is not an entity type that you can create or manipulate on your own. you have the option to create the solids using the regular or the thin-wall construction method. you can tell Mastercam to combine operations on multiple chains into a single operation instead of creating a separate operation for each chain. You can. Revolve Chain. you must use the default extrusion direction. then extrudes or revolves the sheet entity into a solid. cut. ¨ When extruding curves using the thin-wall construction method. revolving. the result is a cube-shaped solid. you extrude a square using the thin-wall construction method. With the thin-wall construction method. each chain of curves results in a separate solid. ¨ With the regular construction method. or Sweep Chain dialog box. cut. then thickens the sheet entities to form solids. the system extrudes or revolves each entity in the chain to form sheet entities (similar to surfaces). or boss. each non-nested chain of curves or each set of nested chains results in a separate solid. you must select the outward direction (to distinguish it from the inward direction) at the end of the operation so that the system knows how to apply the inward and outward thickening values. you can set the direction using any option on the Extrusion Direction menu. which has eight vertical walls (four interior and four exterior). however. combine operations when modifying the geometry of existing Extrude. If. You choose this option by selecting Combine Operations in the Extrude Chain. the result is a hollowed-out. regular method of constructing solids When you use the Extrude or Revolve functions to generate solids from chains of curves. which must be closed. or boss. which is normal to the first selected chain of curves. even if Combine Operations was not selected during initial creation. ¨ When extruding open chains of curves using the thin-wall construction method. With the regular construction method. or Sweep Cut/Boss operations by adding new chains.

a closed solid body is created. Choose Main Menu. the Select surfaces menu displays. Cylinder. since you only have to edit parameters once from the Solids Manager. Mastercam creates a cylinder-shaped solid in the graphics window. If you select all surfaces. 1. Next menu. Set parameters on the dialog box as needed. These solids are not defined by curve geometry. Mastercam displays the Primitives menu when you choose Main Menu. an open sheet body is created.You can also tell Mastercam to combine appropriate operations when you create operations as part of finding features on a brick solid. ¨ If you cleared Use all visible surfaces. then choose Done to convert the selected surfaces into one or more solids. predefined shapes. Stitching surfaces into solids The From Surfaces function lets you create one or more solids from selected surfaces by "stitching" them together. ¨ You can change an open sheet body into a closed solid body by thickening it. "Create edge curves on open edges?" Choose Yes to select a color for the edge curves and create an open sheet body with edge-curve geometry. The Stitch Surfaces into Solid(s) dialog box opens. Creating solids in pre-defined (primitive) shapes The Primitives menu gives you options for creating primitive solids. Solids. Combining operations makes it easier to modify similar or repetitive operations involving multiple chains. Mastercam aggregates operations on selected chains (for holes) or edges (for fillets) into a single operation. Solids. Primitives. Notes: ¨ If Mastercam cannot create a closed solid body. ¨ You can set default parameter values for the Stitch Surfaces into Solid(s) dialog box by choosing Solids Settings. Choose Main Menu. Otherwise. they are solids that are created in simple. Mastercam immediately converts all visible surfaces into one or more solids. Choose No to create the open sheet body without edge-curve geometry. Instead. This function is useful for working on imported files containing surface representations of a solid or for converting newly constructed surfaces that may have been created to replace problem surfaces. Solids. In this case. Creating a cylinder-shaped primitive solid 1. ¨ If you selected Use all visible surfaces. From surfaces. Stitching from the CAD Settings tab of the System Configuration dialog box. and edge gaps between surfaces are within a specified tolerance. a message asks. 2. Primitives. 189 . Select one or more surfaces in the graphics window. Stitching surfaces can result in the same kind of sheet solid as removing one or more faces from a closed solid body. Next menu. Next menu. then choose OK to complete the operation.

choose Axis. choose Height. Btm radius.2. Mastercam creates each new solid using the exact parameters as the previously created solid of the same type. then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area. and Taper angle. Note: This step is optional. choose Base point. If you choose not to name the operation. ¨ To set the orientation of the cone. choose Height and Radius. Choose Main Menu. Mastercam names it "Cylinder" by default. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them. choose Base point. Mastercam creates a cone-shaped solid in the graphics window. choose Axis. ¨ To set the position of the cylinder. If you choose not to name the operation. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the cylinder’s bottom face. Top radius. 3. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis. Notes: ¨ If you create multiple primitive solids of a given type. 4. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. Note: This step is optional. Next menu. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. ¨ To set the size of the cone. 4. Cone. 3. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis. ¨ To set the position of the cone. Modify the solid by setting parameters on the Cone menu as follows: Choose Done to exit the Cylinder menu. Creating a cone-shaped primitive solid 1. you must enter a value in the prompt area. Solids. 190 . After choosing any of these options. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them. 2. Choose Name. After choosing either option. ¨ To set the orientation of the cylinder. Primitives. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the cone’s bottom face. Choose Done to exit the Cone menu. Mastercam names it "Cone" by default. Notes: ¨ If you create multiple primitive solids of a given type. Mastercam creates each new solid using the exact parameters as the previously created solid of the same type. Choose Name. you must enter a value in the prompt area. then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area. Modify the solid by setting parameters on the Cylinder menu as follows: ¨ To set the size of the cylinder.

Choose Name. then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area. Note: This step is optional. choose Base point. If you choose not to name the operation. Primitives. Mastercam creates each new solid using the exact parameters as the previously created solid of the same type. Notes: ¨ If you create multiple primitive solids of a given type. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. Primitives. 3. Next menu. and Width. choose Radius. Length. After choosing any of these options. choose Base point. ¨ To set the orientation of the block. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them. Choose Name. ¨ To set the position of the block. You can also choose Rotate to revolve the block about its base point by an angle value that you enter in the prompt area. Next menu. 2. If you choose not to name the operation. Sphere. ¨ To set the position of the block. then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the sphere. 3. Enter two points in the graphics window for opposing corners of the block’s bottom face. Solids. ¨ Modify the solid by setting parameters on the Sphere menu as follows: To set the size of the sphere. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. Mastercam names it "Block" by default. you must enter a value in the prompt area. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the block’s bottom face. Mastercam creates a block-shaped solid in the graphics window. The block’s height is unchanged. Block. 4. 2. Solids. Mastercam creates a sphere-shaped solid in the graphics window. then enter a value in the prompt area.Creating a block-shaped primitive solid 1. choose Axis (H) and Axis (L). Creating a sphere-shaped primitive solid 1. Choose Main Menu. Mastercam names it "Sphere" by default. Choose Done to exit the Block menu. Choose Main Menu. 191 . Mastercam updates the length. Note: This step is optional. and base point. ¨ To set the block’s position and 2D size in one step. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axes that correspond to the block’s height and length. width. choose Height. Modify the solid by setting parameters on the Block menu as follows: ¨ To set the size of the block. choose Corners.

Choose Main Menu. Choose Name. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. If you choose not to name the operation. 2. Creating a torus-shaped primitive solid 1. Modifying Solids Removing faces from a solid The Remove Faces function lets you remove selected faces from a solid. Mastercam names it "Torus" by default. 192 . choose Maj radius and Min radius. ¨ If you create multiple primitive solids of a given type. then choose Done. 2. Choose Main Menu. Mastercam creates each new solid using the exact parameters as the previously created solid of the same type. 3. you must enter a value in the prompt area. You can remove faces from either a closed solid body or a sheet entity. Solids. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them. The Remove Faces From a Solid dialog box opens. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the torus’ hole. Select the faces to remove. Next menu. ¨ To set the orientation of the torus. Removing one or more faces from a solid can result in the same kind of sheet solid as Stitching from surfaces whose edge gaps are too large to create a closed solid body. Notes: Choose Done to exit the Sphere menu. You may use this function to remove faces that have problems identified by the Check Solid function or to remove faces so that new surfaces can be constructed and then stitched using the From Surfaces function. Choose Done to exit the Torus menu. Remove faces. choose Base point. Notes: ¨ If you create multiple primitive solids of a given type. resulting in an open sheet body. After choosing either of these options. Mastercam creates each new solid using the exact parameters as the previously created solid of the same type. ¨ To set the position of the torus. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them. Primitives. Torus. then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area. Modify the solid by setting parameters on the Torus menu as follows: ¨ To set the size of the torus. 4.4. Note: This step is optional. Solids. 1. choose Axis. Mastercam creates a torus-shaped solid in the graphics window. Next menu.

Indicate which side of the solid to thicken: ¨ One Side. 4.3. The system extrudes chains of curves by driving the shape of the curves along a linear path using a specified direction. whether you combine operations. or delete the original solid and what level the resulting solid will be placed on. choose One side. cuts on an existing body. "Thicken"). and other parameters that further define the results. 3. To thicken one side only. Set the extrusion direction. 5. Choose OK to complete the operation. then choose OK. To specify a thickness. Note: Each chain that you select must be planar (flat). cuts. You can use this function in conjunction with the From Surfaces function to turn selected surfaces into a solid that can be managed like any other solid created in Mastercam. To thicken both sides. then choose Done. 3. Next menu. choose Both sides. Choose OK to complete the operation. The number of resulting solids. 193 . 4. but all chains do not have to be in the same plane. Select one or more chains. A direction arrow displays on the selected solid. then choose OK to complete the operation. Indicate whether to keep. Choose Main Menu. Mastercam selects it automatically. accept or change the value in the Thickness text box. To reverse the thickening direction. In the Name text box. ¨ Both Sides. Solids. distance. Choose Main Menu. and the Sheet thickening direction menu displays. and what construction method you use. or bosses depends on the number of chains that you select. Thicken. indicating which side will be thickened. blank. and this step is unnecessary. The Thicken sheet solid dialog box opens. 1. whether the chains are nested. choose Flip. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window and it is a sheet solid. 2. Select a sheet solid in the graphics window. 1. or bosses on an existing body. 2. Solids. Creating cuts on a solids Creating/modifying solids by extruding chains of curves The Extrude function lets you extrude planar chains of curves to create one or more new solid bodies. Extrude. Thickening a sheet solid The Thicken function lets you thicken an open sheet solid and thereby convert it into a closed solid body. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on each selected chain of curves to reflect its current extrusion direction. enter a name that will identify this operation in history (or use the default entry.

3. cuts. and what construction method you use. ¨ Select a face if you chose to trim a cut or boss operation to a selected face. ¨ Indicate the outward direction for open chains of curves if you chose the thin-wall construction method. 1. The number of resulting solids. However. Select one or more chains. then choose OK. Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. then choose Done. or bosses depends on the number of chains that you select.Note: The default extrusion direction is normal (perpendicular) to the curves. or bosses on an existing body. whether you combine operations. To add material to an existing body. The system performs the extrude operation or prompts you to: ¨ Enter a point if you chose to extend the extruded chains to a point. Select a line in the graphics window to use as the rotation axis. To remove material from an existing body. choose Create Body. cuts on an existing body. Choose Main Menu. Note: The set of chains that you select must be planar (flat). 194 . Solids. 4. 2. Mastercam does not support extrude operations that would result in disjoint bodies. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 4). choose Cut Body. ¨ ¨ ¨ Indicate the type of extrude operation to perform: To create new solid bodies. 5. The system revolves chains of curves by driving the shape of the curves about an axis using given start and end angles and other parameters that further define the results. select Combine Operations. A direction arrow displays on the selected line. Revolve. ¨ Select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. 6. To process each chain selection as a separate operation. Creating/modifying solids by revolving chains of curves The Revolve function lets you revolve planar chains of curves to create one or more new solid bodies. Set additional parameters as needed. indicate whether or not to combine operations: ¨ ¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation. and the Revolve menu displays. choose Add Boss. whether the chains are nested. clear Combine Operations.

then choose Done. planar chains of curves. Set additional parameters as needed. 5. Select one or more closed chains of curves to sweep. choose Cut Body. 4. to create one or more new solid bodies. However. 7. To process each chain selection as a separate operation. 2. cuts on an existing body. The system performs the revolve operation or prompts you to: ¨ Indicate the outward direction for open chains of curves if you chose the thin-wall construction method. called the path chain. Mastercam does not support revolve operations that would result in disjoint bodies. choose Create Body. To create new solid bodies. ¨ Select one curve or chain of curves for the sweep path. Creating/modifying solids by sweeping chains of curves The Sweep function lets you sweep closed. choose Add Boss. then choose Done to set the axis. To remove material from an existing body. Indicate the type of revolve operation to perform: To add material to an existing body. 6. ¨ Select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. or bosses on an existing body. Note: The set of chains that you select must be planar (flat). ¨ ¨ ¨ Change the rotation axis and/or direction as needed. then choose OK. clear Combine Operations. Sweep. Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. Solids. The number of resulting solids. indicate whether or not to combine operations: ¨ ¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation. Choose Main Menu. 3. 195 . If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 5). choose Create Body. The system sweeps chains of curves by translating and rotating the shape of the curves along the entire distance of a single chain of curves. 1. select Combine Operations.4. then choose Done. called section chains. whether the chains are nested. The angle between the section chains and the path chain is maintained throughout each resulting swept solid. cuts. Indicate the type of sweep operation to perform: To create new solid bodies. or bosses depends on the number of chains that you select. and whether you combine operations.

4. 196 . 5. choose Cut Body. To remove material from an existing body. To add material to an existing body. 3. Choose OK. ¨ ¨ 5. The system performs the sweep operation or prompts you to select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. To process each chain selection as a separate operation. then choose Done. Solids. The system performs the loft operation or prompts you to select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. check Create as Ruled To create a linear blend.¨ ¨ To remove material from an existing body. clear Combine Operations. (optional) Choose Sync. choose Create Body. Creating/modifying solids by lofting chains of curves The Loft function lets you loft closed chains of curves to create a new solid body. a cut on an existing body. The start point of each chain and the Sync method that you use when selecting the chains affect how the system aligns the selected chains as it transitions between them. 6. clear Create as Ruled Indicate the type of loft operation to perform: To create new solid bodies. choose Cut Body. select a Sync option from the Chain Synchronization Options dialog box. choose Add Boss. The system performs a loft operation by transitioning between two or more chains of curves in the order that you select them using either smooth or ruled (linear) blending between the chains and by capping the first and last chains with solid faces. 2. Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. select Combine Operations. Choose OK to close the dialog box. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 4). Choose Main Menu. 1. 6. ¨ ¨ ¨ Select two or more closed chains of curves. However. Indicate the type of blend method to use: To create a smooth blend. Mastercam does not support sweep operations that would result in disjoint bodies. or a boss on an existing body. Loft. indicate whether or not to combine operations: ¨ ¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation. To add material to an existing body. choose Add Boss.

the selected chains of curves must meet the following criteria: Each individual chain of curves must be planar. All of the chains that you select must follow the same chaining direction. which has eight vertical walls (four interior and four exterior). With the regular method. The following differences further distinguish the construction methods: ¨ You can use open or closed chains of curves when creating solids with the thin-wall construction method. which is normal to the first selected chain of curves. the system extrudes or revolves each entity in the chain to form sheet entities (similar to surfaces). or boss. you can set the direction using any option on the Extrusion Direction menu. regular method of constructing solids When you use the Extrude or Revolve functions to generate solids from chains of curves. You can use only closed chains with the regular construction method. ¨ With the regular construction method. however. You cannot select a chain of curves more than once for a given loft operation. regardless of whether the chains are nested. cut. If. however. Each chain of curves must form a closed boundary. the result is a cube-shaped solid. The most significant difference between the construction methods is how Mastercam calculates the solid. A selected chain of curves cannot self-intersect. the set of chains that you select does not have to be planar. cube-shaped solid. While this interim body is not an entity type that you can create or manipulate on your own. however. you have the option to create the solids using the regular or the thin-wall construction method. Mastercam does let you create sheet entities by stitching surfaces or by removing faces from a solid. then extrudes or revolves the sheet entity into a solid. if you extrude a square into a solid using the regular construction method. ¨ When you extrude or revolve open chains of curves using the thin-wall construction method. you must use the default extrusion direction.Notes: ¨ You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. each non-nested chain of curves or each set of nested chains results in a separate solid. you extrude a square using the thin-wall construction method. cut. or boss. which has four vertical walls. then thickens the sheet entities to form solids. the system creates a sheet entity (similar to a trimmed surface) within the boundary of the curves. you must select the outward direction (to distinguish it from the inward direction) at the end of the operation so that the system knows how to apply the inward and outward thickening values. ¨ For a Loft operation to succeed. You can then thicken sheet entities to create closed solid bodies. 197 . Mastercam does not support loft operations that would result in disjoint bodies. which must be closed. ¨ When extruding curves using the thin-wall construction method. each chain of curves results in a separate solid. With the regular construction method. Thin-wall vs. With the thin-wall construction method. the result is a hollowed-out. Note: Mastercam calculates sheet entities when creating solids. For example. With the thin-wall construction method.

and what construction method you use. and other parameters that further define the results. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on each selected chain of curves to reflect its current extrusion direction. but all chains do not have to be in the same plane. then choose Done. To process each chain selection as a separate operation. Choose Main Menu. choose Create Body. cuts on an existing body. 5. 198 . 4. The system performs the extrude operation or prompts you to: ¨ Enter a point if you chose to extend the extruded chains to a point. distance.¨ When extruding open chains of curves using the thin-wall construction method. Set the extrusion direction. ¨ Indicate the outward direction for open chains of curves if you chose the thin-wall construction method. then choose OK. select Combine Operations. indicate whether or not to combine operations: ¨ ¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation. 2. The system extrudes chains of curves by driving the shape of the curves along a linear path using a specified direction. whether you combine operations. or bosses depends on the number of chains that you select. Solids. To remove material from an existing body. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 4). Note: The default extrusion direction is normal (perpendicular) to the curves. 6. clear Combine Operations. ¨ Select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. Note: Each chain that you select must be planar (flat). 1. choose Cut Body. The number of resulting solids. cuts. choose Add Boss. whether the chains are nested. or bosses on an existing body. Creating/modifying solids by extruding chains of curves The Extrude function lets you extrude planar chains of curves to create one or more new solid bodies. ¨ Select a face if you chose to trim a cut or boss operation to a selected face. 3. Set additional parameters as needed. you have the option to draft the faces associated with the endpoints of open chains of curves when you apply a draft angle to the solid’s walls. Extrude. Select one or more chains. To add material to an existing body. ¨ ¨ ¨ Indicate the type of extrude operation to perform: To create new solid bodies.

¨ ¨ ¨ Change the rotation axis and/or direction as needed. Select one or more chains. whether you combine operations. Revolve. 3.Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. A direction arrow displays on the selected line. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 5). To remove material from an existing body. The system revolves chains of curves by driving the shape of the curves about an axis using given start and end angles and other parameters that further define the results. Choose Main Menu. indicate whether or not to combine operations: ¨ ¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation. select Combine Operations. 1. cuts. 7. Mastercam does not support extrude operations that would result in disjoint bodies. choose Cut Body. However. then choose OK. whether the chains are nested. Indicate the type of revolve operation to perform: To add material to an existing body. Solids. or bosses depends on the number of chains that you select. Creating/modifying solids by revolving chains of curves The Revolve function lets you revolve planar chains of curves to create one or more new solid bodies. then choose Done to set the axis. and what construction method you use. choose Create Body. To create new solid bodies. choose Add Boss. Note: The set of chains that you select must be planar (flat). To process each chain selection as a separate operation. cuts on an existing body. Select a line in the graphics window to use as the rotation axis. ¨ Select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. and the Revolve menu displays. 199 . However. The number of resulting solids. The system performs the revolve operation or prompts you to: ¨ Indicate the outward direction for open chains of curves if you chose the thin-wall construction method. Mastercam does not support revolve operations that would result in disjoint bodies. 4. Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. Set additional parameters as needed. clear Combine Operations. 2. or bosses on an existing body. then choose Done. 5. 6.

2. To process each chain selection as a separate operation. Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. called the path chain. 4. 1. Note: The set of chains that you select must be planar (flat). or bosses on an existing body. cuts on an existing body. To remove material from an existing body. Solids. whether the chains are nested. called section chains. to create one or more new solid bodies. 1. indicate whether or not to combine operations: ¨ ¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation. a cut on an existing body. select Combine Operations. or a boss on an existing body. The system sweeps chains of curves by translating and rotating the shape of the curves along the entire distance of a single chain of curves. The system performs a loft operation by transitioning between two or more chains of curves in the order that you select them using either smooth or ruled (linear) blending between the chains and by capping the first and last chains with solid faces. planar chains of curves. Choose OK. and whether you combine operations.Creating/modifying solids by sweeping chains of curves The Sweep function lets you sweep closed. To add material to an existing body. choose Cut Body. Solids. Indicate the type of sweep operation to perform: To create new solid bodies. choose Create Body. Mastercam does not support sweep operations that would result in disjoint bodies. The system performs the sweep operation or prompts you to select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. then choose Done. 200 . Loft. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 4). 5. 2. then choose Done. Choose Main Menu. then choose Done. However. The angle between the section chains and the path chain is maintained throughout each resulting swept solid. select a Sync option from the Chain Synchronization Options dialog box. 6. The number of resulting solids. Choose Main Menu. or bosses depends on the number of chains that you select. 3. Sweep. (optional) Choose Sync. Creating/modifying solids by lofting chains of curves The Loft function lets you loft closed chains of curves to create a new solid body. cuts. choose Add Boss. Select one or more closed chains of curves to sweep. clear Combine Operations. The start point of each chain and the Sync method that you use when selecting the chains affect how the system aligns the selected chains as it transitions between them. ¨ ¨ ¨ Select one curve or chain of curves for the sweep path.

the set of chains that you select does not have to be planar. Thin-wall vs. choose Cut Body. you extrude a square using the thin-wall construction method. then thickens the sheet entities to form solids.3. check Create as Ruled To create a linear blend. To add material to an existing body. ¨ ¨ 5. For example. All of the chains that you select must follow the same chaining direction. 6. the system extrudes or revolves each entity in the chain to form sheet entities (similar to surfaces). Notes: ¨ You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. ¨ For a Loft operation to succeed. 4. the result is a hollowed-out. then extrudes or revolves the sheet entity into a solid. choose Add Boss. The most significant difference between the construction methods is how Mastercam calculates the solid. To remove material from an existing body. the selected chains of curves must meet the following criteria: Each individual chain of curves must be planar. however. Each chain of curves must form a closed boundary. ¨ ¨ ¨ Select two or more closed chains of curves. the result is a cube-shaped solid. the system creates a sheet entity (similar to a trimmed surface) within the boundary of the curves. Choose OK to close the dialog box. choose Create Body. With the thin-wall construction method. Mastercam does not support loft operations that would result in disjoint bodies. however. which has eight vertical walls (four interior and four exterior). which has four vertical walls. which must be closed. regular method of constructing solids When you use the Extrude or Revolve functions to generate solids from chains of curves. cube-shaped solid. The system performs the loft operation or prompts you to select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. clear Create as Ruled Indicate the type of loft operation to perform: To create new solid bodies. 201 . if you extrude a square into a solid using the regular construction method. With the regular method. A selected chain of curves cannot self-intersect. If. Indicate the type of blend method to use: To create a smooth blend. You cannot select a chain of curves more than once for a given loft operation. however. you have the option to create the solids using the regular or the thin-wall construction method.

1 Distance. ¨ When you extrude or revolve open chains of curves using the thin-wall construction method. 3. ¨ When extruding curves using the thin-wall construction method. While this interim body is not an entity type that you can create or manipulate on your own. you must select the outward direction (to distinguish it from the inward direction) at the end of the operation so that the system knows how to apply the inward and outward thickening values. 202 . Chamfering a solid using one distance This function defines a chamfer using one distance. cut. you can set the direction using any option on the Extrusion Direction menu. then choose OK to chamfer the edges. or boss. or boss. If edges are added to or removed from a chamfered face or body. With the regular construction method. The following differences further distinguish the construction methods: ¨ You can use open or closed chains of curves when creating solids with the thin-wall construction method. Select the edges. You can use only closed chains with the regular construction method. With the thin-wall construction method. then choose Done. 2. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. you have the option to draft the faces associated with the endpoints of open chains of curves when you apply a draft angle to the solid’s walls. The Chamfer Parameters dialog box opens. you must use the default extrusion direction. Click on the topics below for more information. Chamfering solid edges When you choose Chamfer from the Solids menu. each chain of curves results in a separate solid. ¨ When extruding open chains of curves using the thin-wall construction method. Choose Main Menu.Note: Mastercam calculates sheet entities when creating solids. the Chamfer menu displays to give you options for creating chamfers. Mastercam does let you create sheet entities by stitching surfaces or by removing faces from a solid. cut. ¨ With the regular construction method. Note: Chamfers that are created on the edges of selected faces or whole solid bodies are associative. The system chamfers solid edges by introducing new faces that add material to or remove material from the selected edges and that are not tangent with the adjoining faces of the original edge. 1. You can then thicken sheet entities to create closed solid bodies. which is normal to the first selected chain of curves. on solids. Chamfer. which determines where the chamfer is positioned along both edge faces. A chamfer is a type of edge blending that has a linear crosssection. faces. each non-nested chain of curves or each set of nested chains results in a separate solid. Set parameters on the dialog box as needed. regardless of whether the chains are nested. Solids. or beveled edges. and/or whole solid bodies to chamfer. You determine the extent of the chamfer by specifying distances and possibly an angle to offset the chamfer from the selected edge on the adjoining faces. regardless of the changes. the entire face or body remains chamfered.

Chamfering a solid using two distances This function defines a chamfer using two distances. If you selected an edge. regardless of the changes. then choose Done. Set parameters on the dialog box as needed. If edges are added to or removed from a chamfered face or body. then choose OK to chamfer the edges. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select additional faces and/or edges. Select one of the two faces that are adjacent to the edge. Solids. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. Note: Mastercam uses this face to calculate the distance and angle that you define in step 5. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select additional faces and/or edges. The Chamfer Parameters dialog box opens. which determine where the chamfer is positioned along the edge faces. 2. Chamfer. Dist/Ang. Mastercam displays the Pick Reference Face menu. 5. then choose Done. If you selected an edge. Select a face or an edge. If edges are added to or removed from a chamfered face or body. 3. Chamfering a solid using a distance and an angle This function defines a chamfer using a distance and an angle. Select one of the two faces that are adjacent to the edge. then choose Done. Chamfer. 3. 203 . 1. Choose Main Menu. See "Defining a reference face" in the Related Topics below for more information. 2.Note: Chamfers that are created on the edges of selected faces or whole solid bodies are associative. 2 Distances. Set parameters on the dialog box as needed. which determine where the chamfer is positioned along the edge faces. then choose Done. The Chamfer Parameters dialog box opens. regardless of the changes. Note: Mastercam uses this face to calculate the first distance that you define in step 5. then choose OK to chamfer the edges. Select a face or an edge. 5. 4. 1. the entire face or body remains chamfered. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. Mastercam displays the Pick Reference Face menu. Note: Chamfers that are created on the edges of selected faces or whole solid bodies are associative. 4. See "Defining a reference face" in the Related Topics below for more information. the entire face or body remains chamfered. Choose Main Menu. Solids.

the entire face or body remains chamfered. Keep All : When set to N. then choose Done. Select one or more solids in the graphics window. Solids. 2. Solids. Mastercam selects it automatically. Trimming solids The Trim Solids menu gives you options for trimming selected solids to a plane. Name : Returns you to the prompt area where you can name the solid trim operation. and for choosing whether or not to keep what was trimmed as new "bricks" (solid bodies with no history). Mastercam displays this menu after you select the solids you want to trim (Main Menu. Choose Plane from the Trim Solids menu. or to an open sheet body. Next menu. removes trimmed parts from the drawing. Surface : Trims the solids to a surface that you select in the graphics window. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window. Mastercam displays the Define Plane menu. Trim). The default name is Trim. Choose Main Menu. 3. to a surface. If edges are added to or removed from a chamfered face or body. Flip : Reverses the trimming direction. and this step is unnecessary.Note: Chamfers that are created on the edges of selected faces or whole solid bodies are associative. keeps trimmed parts in the drawing as brick solids. Next menu. 204 . regardless of the changes. Sheet : Trims the solids to an open sheet solid that you select in the graphics window. Plane : Trims the solids to a plane that you define using the Define Plane menu. The direction arrow in the graphics window points to the side of the plane on which the solids will not be trimmed. When set to Y. Trimming solids to a plane 1. Trim.

6.4. Mastercam names it "Trim" by default. to reverse the trimming direction. 7. If you choose not to name the operation. if necessary. Select a surface in the graphics window. Mastercam selects it automatically. Choose Done to trim the solids. Notes: ¨ The trimming plane must fully intersect a selected solid in order to trim it. Choose Name. Choose Flip. 2. Choose Main Menu. To keep trimmed parts as bricks. set Keep All to Y. Choose Name. To keep trimmed parts as bricks. Note: You can recreate trimmed parts as bricks at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. Mastercam displays a temporary plane marker in the graphics window. set Keep All to N. Note: This step is optional. To remove trimmed parts from the drawing. The remaining solid (on the side with the direction arrow) maintains the history. Note: This step is optional. then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area. 8. Solids. Define the trimming plane. Next menu. Mastercam names it "Trim" by default. 4. set Keep All to N. To remove trimmed parts from the drawing. to reverse the trimming direction. Choose Flip. 5. then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area. The arrow points to the side of the plane on which the solids will not be trimmed and which retain the history. If you choose not to name the operation. Select one or more solids in the graphics window. set Keep All to Y. ¨ When trimmed parts are kept in a drawing. Trimming solids to a surface 1. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on the surface. 3. 5. 7. Choose Surface from the Trim Solids menu. if necessary. the resulting disjoint pieces are represented as brick solids with no history. Note: You can recreate trimmed parts as bricks at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. Trim. then choose Done. which points to the side of the surface on which the solids will not be trimmed and which retain the history. 205 . Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window. 6. and this step is unnecessary.

Note: This step is optional. 3. move. 206 Choose Done to trim the solids. move. then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area. Trimming solids to a sheet 1. ¨ The trimming surface must fully intersect a selected solid in order to trim it. Choose Name. Notes: Choose Done to trim the solids. the resulting disjoint pieces are represented as brick solids with no history. Note: You can recreate trimmed parts as bricks at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. then choose Done. . Mastercam selects it automatically. Next menu. to reverse the trimming direction. Select an open sheet body in the graphics window. To remove trimmed parts from the drawing. and this step is unnecessary. Mastercam renders the trim operation invalid. 2. If you choose not to name the operation. which points to the side of the sheet body on which the solids will not be trimmed and which retain the history. set Keep All to N. set Keep All to Y. Choose Main Menu. or in any other way change the trimming surface so that it no longer fully intersects the solid. Mastercam names it "Trim" by default. ¨ When trimmed parts are kept in a drawing. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on the surface. To keep trimmed parts as bricks. Choose Flip. ¨ The edges and faces that are created as a result of the trim operation are associated with the trimming surface. if necessary. 7. If you delete. Notes: ¨ The edges and faces that are created as a result of the trim operation are associated with the trimming surface. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. Select one or more solids in the graphics window. The remaining solid (on the side with the direction arrow) maintains the history. 5. 8. ¨ You can trim a solid to multiple surfaces by first stitching those surfaces into an open sheet body and then trimming to a sheet. Solids. 6. Trim. Mastercam renders the trim operation invalid.8. Choose Sheet from the Trim Solids menu. If you delete. 4. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window. or in any other way change the trimming surface so that it no longer fully intersects the solid.

as if a ball is rolled along each selected edge and material is either added to or removed from the ball’s path to form the smooth edge. 3. Choose Main Menu. Shelling solids The Shell function lets you hollow solid bodies by removing material and optionally leaving selected faces open. Select one or more edges. Choose Constant Radius. Filleting solid edges The Fillet function that you access from the Solids menu lets you fillet the edges of solids. then choose OK to shell the selected solids.¨ The trimming surface must fully intersect a selected solid in order to trim it. faces. then choose Done. Choose Main Menu. and thickens the solid’s faces to form the solid’s shell. The remaining faces are thickened by a specified amount. Set the shell direction and thickness as needed. Similarly. If you select individual faces on a solid. The remaining solid (on the side with the direction arrow) maintains the history. You determine the extent of the fillet by specifying the radius of the rolling ball or crosssection. Solids. and/or whole solid bodies. Fillet. ¨ When trimmed parts are kept in a drawing. and you cannot see into the solid if it is shaded. 1. The Shell Solid dialog box opens. opens the selected faces to form entry holes into the solid. 2. the system removes the material from the interior of the solid. Filleting is a type of edge blending that results in a rounded edge by introducing new faces that are tangent to the edges’ adjacent faces. If edges are added to or removed from a filleted face or body. Note: When you shell whole solids. Shell. you can visualize the void in the interior of the solid if you use translucent shading. 2. and thickens the remaining faces to form the solid’s shell. Solids. regardless of the change. If you select a whole solid body and no individual faces. there are no entry holes into the solid. the system hollows the solid. which leaves a void. then choose Done. the entire face or body remains filleted. A fillet is also referred to as a rolling ball blend because it has a circular cross-section. the resulting disjoint pieces are represented as brick solids with no history. However. Select the faces and/or whole solid bodies to shell. You can define the fillet’s radius using a constant radius value or by varying the radius value along the edge. Filleting solid edges using a constant radius 1. 3. Note: Fillets that are created on the edges of selected faces or whole solid bodies are associative. ¨ You can trim a solid to multiple surfaces by first stitching those surfaces into an open sheet body and then trimming to a sheet. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. 207 . you can turn on the display of hidden lines to distinguish the solid’s inner walls.

Set other parameters and edit radii as needed. 3. 208 . Mastercam marks the position of the radius with a display point in the graphics window. Varying the radius along filleted solid edges The Fillet Edit menu gives you options for editing the radius of solid fillet operations that are defined using a variable radius. Note: To enter a radius at the position of an existing point. Mastercam displays a dynamic arrow on the selected edge. If edges are added to or removed from a filleted face or body. Note: You cannot create variable radius fillets if your selection includes solid faces or whole solid bodies. In the prompt area. You can use this menu to insert a radius. Choose Insert Dyn from the Fillet Edit menu. or choose Done to exit the Fillet Edit menu. Note: This menu can be accessed by choosing Edit from the Fillet Parameters dialog box when creating or editing a solid fillet operation using a variable radius. 4. See the related topics below for more information. then choose Done. 2. Inserting a radius midway between two existing radii along a solid edge 1. choose the Edit button on the Fillet Parameters dialog box during the creation or editing of a solid fillet operation. Note: Fillets that are created on the edges of selected faces or whole solid bodies are associative. regardless of the change. move the cursor crosshair over the point. then choose OK to create the fillets. 5. Inserting a radius at any position along a solid edge 1. Set other parameters as needed. Choose Main Menu. enter a value for radius. check radius values. Select one or more edges. then click. 2. 4. and change radius values. the entire face or body remains filleted. Fillet. Solids. Choose Insert Mid from the Fillet Edit menu. Continue to edit the filleted edges.4. then click to snap to the point. 3. Filleting solid edges using a variable radius 1. Select an edge on the solid that you are filleting or editing. Choose Variable Radius. To access this menu. then choose OK to create the fillets. type [S] to activate snapping. Use the mouse to slide the base of the arrow to the location where you want to insert a radius. remove a radius.

See the related topics below for more information. Note: You can also change the value of a radius by selecting it in the edge list of the Fillet Parameters dialog box. or choose Done to exit the Fillet Edit menu. or choose Done to exit the Fillet Edit menu. or choose Done to exit the Fillet Edit menu. In the graphics window. 2. Choose Modify Pos from the Fillet Edit menu. 209 . Choose Remove from the Fillet Edit menu. 4. move the cursor crosshair over the point. 4. then click. select the display point that marks the location of the radius that you want to edit. See the related topics below for more information. Mastercam displays the current value of the radius. Continue to edit the filleted edges.Note: This menu can be accessed by choosing Edit from the Fillet Parameters dialog box when creating or editing a solid fillet operation using a variable radius. Choose Modify Rad from the Fillet Edit menu. enter a new value for radius. Select an edge on the solid that you are filleting or editing. Changing the position of a radius on a solid edge 1. Use the mouse to slide the base of the arrow to the location where you want to position the radius. 3. then click to snap to the point. Changing the value of a radius on a solid edge 1. 2. 2. See the related topics below for more information. 3. Note: This menu can be accessed by choosing Edit from the Fillet Parameters dialog box when creating or editing a solid fillet operation using a variable radius. 3. Mastercam displays a dynamic arrow on the radius marker. Note: To position the radius at the location of an existing point. See the related topics below for more information. In the graphics window. Mastercam displays a temporary point to mark the midpoint between the two closest radii. Continue to edit the filleted edges. select the display point that marks the location of the radius that you want to edit. enter a value for radius. In the prompt area. 4. In the prompt area. Removing a radius from a solid edge 1. Note: This menu can be accessed by choosing Edit from the Fillet Parameters dialog box when creating or editing a solid fillet operation using a variable radius. type [S] to activate snapping. Note: This menu can be accessed by choosing Edit from the Fillet Parameters dialog box when creating or editing a solid fillet operation using a variable radius. then typing a new value in the Radius text box. Continue to edit the filleted edges.

Take one of the following actions: ¨ To change the value of the highlighted radius. or choose Done to exit the Fillet Edit menu. After the last radius. the adjacent faces are trimmed and/or extended to accommodate the new geometry of the drafted face. type a new value for radius in the prompt area. Note: This menu can be accessed by choosing Edit from the Fillet Parameters dialog box when creating or editing a solid fillet operation using a variable radius. or choose Done to exit the Fillet Edit menu. ¨ To maintain the current value of the highlighted radius. which changes its geometry from cylindrical to planar. Repeat step 2 to check the remaining radius values. 3. Continue to edit the filleted edges. If the adjacent faces are unable to accommodate the new geometry. When a face is drafted. 3. 4. Checking and changing radius values on a solid edge 1. 2. like a chamfered face. or remove draft from a face. Continue to edit the filleted edges. Note: You can also check and change the value of a radius marker by selecting it in the edge list of the Fillet Parameters dialog box. select the display point that marks the location of the radius that you want to remove. regardless of whether the solid was created in Mastercam or imported from a Parasolid file. drafting results in faces being deleted from the solid. the operation fails. The method that you use determines where a drafted face hinges. For example. See the related topics below for more information. Failure is more likely to occur with larger draft angles or if adjacent faces are tangent (or near tangent) and are not also being drafted. then choosing Remove from the right-click menu. In the graphics window. then typing a new value in the Radius text box. which is particularly useful for mold-making.2. Choose Cycle from the Fillet Edit menu. Mastercam cycles to the next radius. Mastercam highlights a display point that marks the location of a radius and displays the radius value at this location. When draft is added to a solid face. You can draft virtually any solid face. a filleted face can be drafted. Mastercam exits the function. Drafting solid faces using a reference face 210 . Mastercam removes the display point at this location. press [Enter]. The Draft Faces function gives you four methods of drafting solid faces. The Draft Faces function lets you add draft to a face. it has the effect of creating a tapered wall. change draft on a face. In some cases. Drafting solid faces Drafting solid faces is the process of tilting the faces by a defined angle and direction. then press [Enter]. Note: You can also remove a radius marker by right-clicking to select it in the edge list of the Fillet Parameters dialog box.

The operation fails if there is no intersection. Choose Main Menu. Solids. Enter a value for Draft Angle. Failure is more likely with a larger angle. Mastercam opens the Draft Face Parameters dialog box. and draft angle are calculated. choose Reverse it to flip the draft direction. Choose OK. then choose Done. The draft direction is perpendicular to the reference face. where one face is drafted using the Draft to Face method. The hinge point can be located on or off the solid. 1. 3. Select a planar solid face. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. ¨ When you select multiple faces to draft. Changes that you make to the solid to alter the position or orientation of the reference face are reflected in the associated operations. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. Notes: ¨ The reference face that you select for the draft plane in step 6 is associated with the resulting Draft Face operations. The drafted face hinges at the intersection of the original face (the face selected to be drafted) and the reference face. 2. The first graphic illustrates how the hinge point. 4. Note: You can extend the draft along tangent faces by checking Propagate along tangencies on the Draft Face Parameters dialog box before choosing OK. If needed. Note: You can select faces from more than one solid. Choose Draft to Face.The Draft to Face method requires you to select a planar reference face. the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted. then choose Done. which is used to calculate where the drafted face hinges and the draft direction. 5. Note: A larger value results in more tilt. Mastercam will create a separate Draft Face operation for each solid. See the graphic following the procedure for more information. Select one or more faces to draft. The second graphic shows the drafted face and how the adjacent faces were extended to accommodate it. 211 . This face must have an intersection with the face(s) being drafted. Mastercam displays a cone-shaped graphic and arrow on the reference face to indicate the draft direction and how the inward/outward nature of the draft angle relates to the direction. 6. ¨ The following graphics show the side view of a solid. Draft faces. This value determines how much the selected faces are tilted. 7. draft direction. and the draft angle is measured with respect to the direction. Next menu.

Next menu. The drafted face hinges at the intersection of the original face (the face selected to be drafted) and the reference plane. The operation fails if there is no intersection. See the graphic following the procedure for more information. 212 . The draft direction is perpendicular to the reference plane. Mastercam opens the Draft Face Parameters dialog box. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu 2. 1. Draft faces. and the draft angle is measured with respect to the direction. Solids. Choose Main Menu.Drafting solid faces using a reference plane The Draft to Plane method requires you to define a reference plane. which is used to calculate where the drafted face hinges and the draft direction. then choose Done. The hinge point can be located on or off the solid. Note: You can select faces from more than one solid. Select one or more faces to draft. Mastercam will create a separate Draft Face operation for each solid.

Notes: ¨ The reference plane that you define in step 6 is not associated with the resulting Draft Face operations. Enter a value for Draft Angle. then choose Done. If needed. This plane must have an intersection with the face(s) being drafted. 6. Note: A larger value results in more tilt. Choose OK. Mastercam displays a cone-shaped graphic and arrow on the reference plane to indicate the draft direction and how the inward/outward nature of the draft angle relates to the direction. For a linear edge. a solid face. 7. such as a geometric line. the draft direction follows the edge. even if you defined the plane using geometry. 4. The draft direction is defined by a selected linear edge or planar face. Define the reference plane. Failure is more likely with a larger angle.5. ¨ ¨ When you select multiple faces to draft. Drafting solid faces using one or more reference edges The Draft to Edge method requires you to select one or more edges on each face being drafted. The draft angle is measured with respect to the direction. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Define Plane menu. etc. 213 . The reference edges that you select define the hinge points for the drafted faces. The following graphics show the left side of a block drafted using the XY plane with a Z value of . For a planar face.3. 5. choose Reverse it to flip the draft direction. the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted. Choose Draft to Plane. This value determines how much the selected faces are tilted. the draft direction is perpendicular to the face.

Notes: ¨ The reference edges that you select in steps 6 and 7 and the linear edge or planar face that you select in step 8 are associated with the resulting Draft Face operations. Mastercam cycles to the next selected face if more than one face was selected in step 2. a separate face corresponding to each reference edge. Draft faces. 3. Enter a value for Draft Angle. Mastercam displays a cone-shaped graphic and arrow along the edge or on the face to indicate the draft direction and how the inward/outward nature of the draft angle relates to the direction. ¨ When you select multiple faces to draft. Note: A larger value results in more tilt. Choose OK. Choose Main Menu. Choose Draft to Edge. 6. This value determines how much the selected faces are tilted. then choose Done. The reference edges define the hinge points for the drafted face. then choose Done. 9. 2. If needed. 5. then choose Done. Mastercam attempts to break the original face into multiple drafted faces. 214 . Mastercam will create a separate Draft Face operation for each solid. choose Reverse it to flip the draft direction. such as with a dovetail shape. Changes that you make to the solid to alter the position or orientation of the reference edges or linear edge or planar face are reflected in the associated operations. Mastercam opens the Draft Face Parameters dialog box. Select one or more faces to draft. ¨ When multiple edges are selected for a face. Repeat step 6 for each additional face. 4. 8. Solids. Failure is more likely with a larger angle. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. Next menu. Note: You can select faces from more than one solid. 7. Specify the draft direction by selecting a linear edge or a planar face. the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted. Select one or more reference edges on the face that is currently highlighted in the graphics window.1. The following graphics show a face that is successfully drafted using multiple reference edges (highlighted in red). This application of this draft method has limited uses and fails if the edges overlap or turn back on themselves when looked at in the draft direction.

Enter a value for Draft Angle. ¨ This value can be positive or negative. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu.Drafting solid faces for an extrude operation The Draft Extrude method requires you to select lateral faces (walls) swept out from an extrude operation. The draft direction follows the extrusion direction. Draft faces. Next menu. The drafted faces hinge at the intersection of the original faces (the faces selected to be drafted) with the planar chains of curves that defined the original extrude operation. However. All of the faces that you select must be lateral faces (walls) swept out from an extrude operation. Notes: 215 Choose OK to draft the faces. After selecting the faces. Select one or more faces to draft. Choose Main Menu. Mastercam opens the Draft Face Parameters dialog box. choose Done. 4. 5. A positive value is measured with respect to the extrusion direction. you have the option to draft the resulting lateral faces. 3. and the draft angle is measured with respect to this direction. Failure is more likely with a larger angle. 1. all of the lateral faces are drafted using the same draft angle and direction. Solids. Note: You can select faces from more than one solid. . Notes: ¨ A larger value results in more tilt. This value determines how much the selected faces are tilted. Mastercam will create a separate Draft Faces operation for each solid. Choose Draft Extrude. A negative value is measured with respect to the direction opposite the extrusion direction. Note: When you perform an extrude operation. 2.

Material from the tool bodies that you select in step 4 will be added to the target body that you select in step 3. and find the common region defined by overlapping solids. When performing a Boolean function. Mastercam displays the Boolean menu. You can add solids together. material will be removed. Solids. Choose Main Menu. the result of each Boolean operation is always a single body. The curves that defined the original extrude operation are highlighted in red and now form the hinges for the drafted faces. Boolean. all other material will be removed. In places where the tool bodies that you select in step 4 intersect the target body that you select in step 3. Indicate the type of Boolean operation to perform: ¨ To add solids together. the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted. subtract solids from one another. or overlapped with the target body. material will be kept. choose Common.¨ When you select multiple faces to draft. Regardless of the number of tool bodies you use. choose Add. This is the solid that material is added to. 2. You then select one or more tool bodies. or overlapped. In places where the tool bodies that you select in step 4 and the target body that you select in step 3 overlap. choose Remove. Boolean functions let you construct a solid using combinations of two or more existing solids. ¨ To remove solids from one another. 216 . ¨ The following graphics show an extruded solid whose lateral faces have been drafted along the extrusion direction. you must first identify a target body. ¨ To find common solid regions. 1. lets you select from several types of Boolean functions. removed from. which displays when you choose Boolean from the Solids menu. which are the solids that are added to. Performing a Boolean operation The Boolean menu. which results in cuts on the target body. removed from.

4. Select one or more tool bodies. a message displays giving you the option to create a non-associative Boolean (a brick solid). then regenerating the solid. You can roll back a solid to a previous state by dragging the stop operation icon to a new position in the operation list. You can drag operations to roll back a solid or to change the operation order. Select a target body. 217 . To correct an invalid solid. Set Tools to Y (keep tool body) or N (remove tool body). Creating and keeping a non-associative Boolean will create entirely new brick solids that represent the resulting disjoint pieces. Marks an invalid operation. Clicking on this symbol expands the tree structure of operation details. Indicates that the move is allowed when dragging an operation in the operation list. Each symbol is described below: Symbol Description Marks a dirty operation. If a Boolean Remove or Common operation fails because it would create a disjoint body.3. You can drag operations to roll back a solid or to change the operation order. ¨ Choose No to cancel the Boolean operation. thus preventing the solid from being rebuilt. An operation is invalid when a change has been made that Mastercam is unable to incorporate into the model. Note: Mastercam is unable to create disjoint bodies and maintain associativity between them. 5. You must regenerate the solid in order for the changes to be incorporated into the model at which point the operation will be ‘clean’ and the dirty symbol will be removed. Respond in one of the following ways: ¨ Choose Yes to continue the Boolean operation and display the Keep menu. Indicates that there are additional operation details. try adjusting the parameters or geometry of any invalid operations. An operation is dirty when its parameters and/or geometry have been modified. Then choose Done to complete the Boolean operation. Indicates that the move is not allowed when dragging an operation in the operation list. Symbols used in the Solids Manager The Solids Manager uses many symbols to communicate information about operations. without changing either the target or the tool. Set Target to Y (keep target body) or N (remove target body). then choose Done to perform the Boolean operation. Marks the end of the operations that define a solid.

Indicates a tool body or solid that is used in the associated Boolean operation. it indicates that the operation has been suppressed and/or that the solid is in a rolled back state. Indicates a Mill or Lathe toolpath operation. Indicates a Primitive Cylinder operation. Indicates a Boolean operation. 218 . Double-click this icon to edit the geometry. or Sweep operation. Indicates a Fillet operation. Indicates a Revolve operation. Loft. Clicking on this symbol collapses the tree structure of operation details. Double-click this icon to edit the parameters. Indicates a Shell operation. When an icon has been grayed out. Indicates a Chamfer operation. Indicates that there is editable geometry for this operation. Indicates a solid. Indicates a Primitive Cone operation.Indicates that the operation details are expanded. Indicates an Extrude. Indicates that there are editable parameters for this operation.

Due to the dependent nature of solid operations. Indicates a Primitive Torus operation. 3. ¨ You can use Mastercam’s Delete function to delete and restore solids. its tool bodies are restored as distinct solids that are no longer associated with the target body. It is important that you use the Suppress function only as a temporary model checking feature and that you pay attention to what actions you take while operations are suppressed. but not individual operations. 2. your actions could render the model invalid when you restore the suppressed operations. Indicates a Trim operation. ¨ If you delete a Boolean operation. then choose Delete. Mastercam opens the Solids Manager dialog Select one or more solids or solid operations to delete. Solids. 4. Indicates a Primitive Sphere operation. Indicates a Draft Face operation. edges. See the related topics below for more information. 219 . Notes: ¨ Mastercam automatically deletes all operations whose input (selected faces. ¨ You cannot delete base operations or tool bodies. Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. Right-click in the dialog box. bodies) is dependent on the deleted operation. Note: You can select multiple operations from a single solid only. This way you can check the model in various states without having to delete and recreate operations. Mastercam marks the corresponding solid dirty. Choose Main Menu.Indicates a Primitive Block operation. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. box. Deleting solids and solid operations 1. or press the Delete key on your keyboard. If you selected operations to delete in step 3. Suppressing solid operations The Suppress function lets you build a solid without factoring in selected operations.

1. All operations beyond the stop point are suppressed and are grayed out in the operation list. then release the mouse button. the system automatically suppresses them. 3. Right-click in the dialog box. Note: You can select multiple operations from a single solid only. then choose Suppress. If other operations are dependent on the suppressed operation. 2. you cannot edit its parameters or geometry or select it for use in any other operation. Solids mgr.1. and the operation is restored. ¨ To return the solid to its original state. your actions could render the model invalid when you return the stop operation to the end of the solid. However. Notes: ¨ A check mark displays next to the Suppress icon on the right-click menu of each suppressed operation. To restore a suppressed operation. Solids. the operation is inserted after the final operation in the list. 220 . or revert. Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. follow the steps above. Select one or more operations to suppress. ¨ While an operation is suppressed. as well. it is extremely important that you roll back a solid only as a temporary model checking feature and that you pay attention to what actions you take while the solid is rolled back. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. the check mark is cleared. Notes: ¨ The stop operation is inserted after the operation on which you release it. Due to the dependent nature of solid operations. You can roll back. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. When you select the Suppress option a second time. including tool bodies. 3. Mastercam rebuilds the model without the selected operations and grays out the icons of the suppressed operations in the list. Drag it up through the history tree until it is positioned over a selected operation. Choose Main Menu. Solids. a solid to an earlier stage in its development by moving the Stop Op icon to different positions in the operation list. The roll back feature is commonly used to fix invalid operations or to build a model one operation at a time when you are editing operations. If the operation is suppressed and does not have a check mark next to the Suppress option. have a stop operation icon that marks the end of the operations that define the solid. drag the Stop Op icon to the last operation in the list. Select a stop operation to roll back. the system builds the model to the stop point only. When you release the mouse button. Choose Main Menu. 2. the operation can be unsuppressed only by unsuppressing the operation on which it is dependent. Rolling back a solid All solids listed in the Solids Manager. When a solid is in a rolled back state. ¨ You cannot suppress a base operation. The system rebuilds the model up to the stop operation.

¨ When a solid is rolled back, operations that you perform are added to the end of the active operations in the model (before the stop point), instead of at the end of the operation list. Therefore, you may find the roll back function a useful way to insert an operation in the middle of the operation list instead of adding it to the end of the list, then dragging to the correct position, which sometimes fails due to operation dependencies. Identifying a solid operation based on its geometry You can identify an operation in the Solids Manager by selecting geometry in the graphics window. Mastercam matches the selected geometry (a solid face) with the operation that is defined by the geometry. This function is particularly useful when you are working on a complex solid that has a large number of operations. You can quickly identify the operation you’re looking for instead of having to check multiple operations using automatic or manual highlighting. Note: For more information on highlighting, see the related topics below. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Choose Select. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window.

3. Select a solid face. Mastercam reopens the Solids Manager with the corresponding operation selected.

Renaming solids and solid operations The name assigned to a solid or solid operation can help identify it in the operation list of the Solids Manager. When you perform a solid operation, you have the option to assign it a unique name, or you can accept the default name, which reflects the operation type (e.g., Extrude Cut, Boolean Remove, Fillet, etc.). Unlike solid operations, solids cannot be assigned unique names when they are created. However, you can rename both solids and solid operations at any time from the Solids Manager. 1. 2. 3. field. 4. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Select a solid or operation. Right-click on the selected item, then choose Rename. The current name changes to an editable

Type a new name, then press [Enter].

Note: You can also rename an operation by editing the operation’s parameters and entering a new name in the Name field. Changing the order of solid operations The Solids Manager lists the operations that define each solid in the current file. The operations are listed in the order in which they are performed on the solid. You can change the order by dragging operations to new positions in the operation list. Mastercam will rebuild the solid based on the new operation order.

221

1. 2.

Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Select an operation to move.

3. With the mouse button pressed, drag the operation to the desired position in the operation list, then release the mouse button. Mastercam rebuilds the solid using the current operation order. Notes: ¨ The selected operation is inserted after the operation on which you release it.

¨ As you drag an operation, the cursor changes to a downward arrow if the move is allowed or to a circle with a slash through it if the move is not allowed. The following moves are not allowed: ¨ ¨ You cannot move a base operation. You cannot move an operation to a position before a base operation.

¨ If an operation is dependent on one or more other operations, you cannot move it to a position ahead of the operation(s) on which it is dependent in the list.

Regenerating solids Regeneration is the process of rebuilding a solid so that it matches its associated operations. Regeneration is required when a solid becomes dirty or invalid due to changes that you make to the parameters and/or geometry of one or more of the solid’s operations. When you regenerate a solid, Mastercam incorporates your changes into the solid and restores the solid to a clean state, if possible. Regeneration fails if a solid has one or more invalid operations. When making a lot of changes to a model, it is useful to regenerate often. This way, if regeneration fails, you will have to make fewer corrections to return the operation to a valid state. For more information on dirty and invalid operations, see the related topics below. 1. 2. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Take one of the following actions: To regenerate all dirty or invalid solids, choose Regen All. To regenerate an individual solid, right-click to select the solid, then choose Regen Solid.

Accessing Solids menu options from the Solids Manager You can access the Solids menu options from the Solids Manager, which enables you to perform new solid operations without having to exit the Solids Manager dialog box. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Right-click anywhere in the list of operations.

222

3. Choose Solids. Mastercam displays a flyout menu containing all of the Solids menu options. For more information, see the related topics. Accessing the toolpath Operations Manager from the Solids Manager You can access the toolpath Operations Manager from the Solids Manager, which enables you to edit Mill or Lathe toolpaths that were created on solids and to access other toolpath functions without having to exit the Solids Manager dialog box. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Right-click anywhere in the list of operations.

3. Choose Operations Manager. Mastercam closes the Solids Manager dialog box and opens the Operations Manager dialog box. 4. Perform functions from the toolpath Operations Manager, as needed. When you close the Operations Manager, Mastercam returns you to the Solids Manager. Note: For information on the toolpath Operations Manager, see the related topics below. Expanding and collapsing solid operation details The Solids Manager lists the operation history for each solid in the current file. You can expand or collapse the tree structure of a solid to show or hide a list of operations that define the solid. Likewise, you can expand or collapse the tree structure of each operation to show or hide its editable components (e.g., parameters and geometry). Note: Imported solids have no operation history. The tree structure of an imported solid lists only the operations that have been performed on the solid since it was imported into Mastercam. Expanding operation details 1. 2. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Take one of the following actions: To expand an individual operation, click on the plus (+) sign preceding the operation. To expand all operations for a solid, right-click on the solid, then choose Expand all.

Collapsing operation details 1. 2. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Take one of the following actions: To collapse an individual operation, click on the minus (-) sign preceding the operation. To collapse all operations for a solid, right-click on the solid, then choose Collapse all.

Duplicating solids 223

You can make exact copies of solids, including tool bodies. Each copy is an active solid that you can select and edit. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Select one or more solids to copy.

3. Right-click in the dialog box, then choose Duplicate Solid. Mastercam creates a copy of each selected solid and lists the new solids at the end of the operation list in the Solids Manager. Note: This function is particularly useful if you want to use the same tool body to affect different target solids. Editing solid parameters You can edit the parameters that define a selected operation. Some of the original defining parameters, however, may not be editable. For example, you cannot change an extrude, revolve, sweep, or loft operation from a create to a cut or boss (or vice versa), but you can change any of these operations from a cut to a boss (or vice versa)—provided the change would not create disjoint bodies. There are no parameters to edit for Boolean and Trim operations. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Expand the list of components for the operation you want to edit, then double-click on Parameters.

3. Mastercam returns you to the dialog box or menu that is used to define the operation’s parameters. Make changes to the parameters, as needed, then choose OK to close the dialog box or Done to exit the menu. 4. Mastercam may require additional input, depending on the parameters that you edited. Follow the prompts on your screen. After all required input has been entered, the Solids Manager dialog box reopens. 5. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Editing solid attributes You can edit a solid’s attributes by accessing the Solid Attributes dialog box from the Solids Manager. 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Select a solid. Right-click on the selected item, then choose Attributes. The Solid Attributes dialog box opens. Change one or more attributes, as follows:

¨ Level: Type the number of the level that you want to assign, or choose Level to select a level using the Level dialog box

224

¨ Color: Type the number of the color that you want to assign, or choose Color to select a color from the Color dialog box. ¨ ¨ 5. Notes: ¨ You can edit level and color attributes of a selected solid using the Attributes tab of the Analyze dialog box. ¨ You can set default entity attributes using the Screen tab and the CAD Settings tab of the System Configuration dialog box. ¨ If entities do not change color, it may be because selected entities are being displayed in a group color instead of an entity color. (See Assigning a color to a group.) To apply the color change to group/result entities, use the Screen, Clr function. Recreating trimmed bodies After a trim operation, you can recreate as brick solids the parts of the original solid that were trimmed away and deleted from the drawing. The effect is the same as if you had turned on the Keep All option during the initial trim operation. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Select a trim operation. Style: Select a line pattern from the drop-down list. Width: Select a line thickness from the drop-down list. Choose OK to apply the current Solid Attributes dialog box settings to the selected solid.

3. Right-click on the selected item, then choose Recreate trimmed bodies. The Solids Manager dialog box closes. After Mastercam completes the operation, the Solids Manager dialog box reopens and displays the recreated solid bodies (bricks) in the history tree below the original solid. Editing solid geometry You can edit solid operations that are defined by geometry (i.e., chains, edges, etc.) Each solid operation is associated with the solid on which the operation is performed. Changes that you make to an operation’s geometry (adding selections, deleting selections, etc.) can affect the selected operation and its associated solid only. Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid, but does support creation of brick solids by Trim and Boolean (Remove, Common) operations. Note: No geometry is editable for Boolean (Add, Remove, Common) or Primitive (Cone, Block, Cylinder, Torus, Sphere) operations. Editing chains for solid operations Mastercam opens the Solid Chain Manager dialog box when you edit the geometry of an Extrude, Revolve, Sweep, or Loft solid operation, since these operation types are defined by chains of curves. The dialog box lists the chains that currently define the selected operation and gives you options for adding chains, 225

which helps you identify chains to edit.deleting chains. The new chains replace the selected chain in the list. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. In addition. then choose Done. then choose Done. 226 . Mastercam returns you to the Solid Chain Manager. Solids. The new chains replace the chains that previously defined the operation. Editing geometry for Extrude operations You can edit the underlying chains of curves that define an extruded solid. 2. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. 2. then double-click on Geometry . To delete chains ¨ Right-click on the chain to delete. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. or boss. To add chains 1. Mastercam highlights the corresponding chain in the graphics window. Steps for editing each of these components are given below. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. Right-click anywhere in the dialog box. Note: If the selected solid has only one geometry component. Expand the list of components for the Extrude operation you want to edit. 3. Right-click anywhere in the dialog box. 2. To rechain a selected chain 1. then choose Rechain. then choose Delete Chain. then choose Rechain All. Solids mgr. Select one or more chains. right-click on a chain in the list. The new chains are reflected in the list. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. Select one or more chains. Take one or more of the following actions from the Solid Chain Manager dialog box: ¨ To add chains. then choose Add Chain. and rechaining one or all of the chains. Note: When you select a chain in the list. To access these editing options. Select one or more chains.Chains. Mastercam returns you to the Solid Chain Manager. it will read ‘Geometry’. To rechain all chains 1. Choose Main Menu. cut. Right-click on a chain in the list. you can edit the faces that an extruded cut or boss is trimmed to if the Trim to selected faces parameter was turned on when the operation was initially defined. To edit chains 1. right-click anywhere in the dialog box. Select one or more chains. 2. Mastercam returns you to the Solid Chain Manager. then choose Add Chain. then choose Done. then choose Done.

then choose Done. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. of the solid. ¨ To rechain all of the chains. then double-click on Geometry. Select one or more chains to replace the selected chain. then choose Done. 5. 4. Choose OK to close the Solid Chain Manager. ¨ To rechain a selected chain. Solids. Solids. cut. To edit faces 1. then choose Delete Chain. then double-click on Geometry – Faces. Solids mgr. Select one or more chains to replace the original chains. Note: The faces that you select must be located on the solid with which the operation being edited was originally associated. Choose Main Menu. then choose Rechain. 3. ¨ The Extrude operation can have more than one chain only if there is an outermost chain that defines a closed boundary around the other chains. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. You cannot use the thin-wall construction method in this case. then choose Rechain All. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Mastercam returns you to the Solids Manager dialog box and marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Choose Main Menu. Solids mgr. 227 . or cross-section. 2. right-click it in the dialog box. Mastercam returns you to the Solids Manager dialog box and marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. ¨ Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. right-click anywhere in the dialog box. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. 4. The base chain is the outermost chain of curves. Select one or more new faces. 1. The chains that are nested within this boundary form cutouts in the solid. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and cancels the original face(s) to which the boss or cut was trimmed.¨ To delete a chain. Editing geometry for Revolve operations You can edit the underlying chains of curves that define a revolved solid. Expand the list of components for the Extrude operation you want to edit. or boss. which defines the outer boundary. then choose Done. 2. Notes: ¨ You cannot delete the base chain. Expand the list of components for the Revolve operation you want to edit. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. right-click the chain to delete.

then choose Add Chain. right-click it in the dialog box. cut. cut. Mastercam returns you to the Solids Manager dialog box and marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. right-click anywhere in the dialog box. 4. See the related topics below for more information. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. 3. then choose Add Chain. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. ¨ To rechain a selected chain. ¨ To delete a chain. Select one or more chains to replace the original chains. You cannot use the thin-wall construction method in this case. then choose Rechain All. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. The base chain is the outermost chain of curves.3. 5. ¨ To rechain all of the chains. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Choose OK to close the Solid Chain Manager. right-click anywhere in the dialog box. then choose Done. Choose Main Menu. Take one or more of the following actions from the Solid Chain Manager dialog box: ¨ To add chains. you must edit the solid’s parameters. right-click the chain to delete. Steps for editing each of these components are given below. which defines the outer boundary. right-click anywhere in the dialog box. Select one or more chains. then choose Rechain. Editing geometry for Sweep operations Each Sweep operation has two editable geometry components: the underlying chains of curves (called section chains) that define a swept solid. ¨ The Revolve operation can have more than one chain only if there is an outermost chain that defines a closed boundary around the other chains. ¨ To edit the rotation axis of a revolved solid. Take one or more of the following actions from the Solid Chain Manager dialog box: ¨ To add chains. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. The chains that are nested within this boundary form cutouts in the solid. To edit the section chain 1. then double-click on Geometry – Section Chain. then choose Done. or boss. Solids mgr. then choose Done. 228 . or cross-section. then choose Delete Chain. of the solid. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. or boss. or boss and the chain of curves (called a path chain) that defines the path along which the section chains are swept to form the solid. cut. Expand the list of components for the Sweep operation you want to edit. 2. Notes: ¨ You cannot delete the base chain. Select one or more chains to replace the selected chain. then choose Done. Solids. Select one or more chains. ¨ Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid.

or boss. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window in chaining mode. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. Take one or more of the following actions from the Solid Chain Manager dialog box: 229 . of the solid. then choose Delete Chain. 4. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. right-click the chain to delete. or cross-section. Notes: ¨ You cannot delete the base chain. Note: The selected chain must intersect the plane defined by the section chains. then double-click on Geometry. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. then choose Done. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Select one or more chains to replace the original chains. Choose Main Menu. ¨ Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. then choose Rechain All. Mastercam returns you to the Solids Manager dialog box and marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. 2. ¨ To rechain a selected chain. Solids mgr. 4. Solids. 1. 5. right-click anywhere in the dialog box. Editing geometry for Loft operations You can edit the chains of curves that define the cross-sections of a lofted solid. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. 3. then choose Done. Select a chain of curves to be used as the path chain. Select one or more chains to replace the selected chain. Choose OK to close the Solid Chain Manager. To edit the path chain 1. cut. ¨ The Sweep operation can have more than one chain only if there is an outermost chain that defines a closed boundary around the other chains.¨ To delete a chain. right-click it in the dialog box. 2. Solids mgr. Expand the list of components for the Loft operation you want to edit. Choose Main Menu. ¨ To rechain all of the chains. Expand the list of components for the Extrude operation you want to edit. then choose Rechain. The base chain is the outermost chain of curves. The chains that are nested within this boundary form cutouts in the solid. which defines the outer boundary. then double-click on Geometry – Path Chain. 3. Solids. Mastercam returns you to the Solids Manager dialog box and marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty.

Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. ¨ To rechain a selected chain. or the whole solid. 4. ¨ To delete a chain. 1. 4. 5. faces. Expand the list of components for the Fillet operation you want to edit. then choose Rechain All. planar chains to define a lofted operation. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. or the whole solid.¨ To add chains. right-click the chain to delete. right-click anywhere in the dialog box. right-click it in the dialog box. Select one or more chains. 230 . Choose OK to close the Solid Chain Manager. then choose Done. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Editing geometry for Fillet operations You can edit the edges that define a fillet operation. Note: Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. Note: There must be a minimum of two closed. Take one or both of the following actions: ¨ ¨ To fillet additional edges. 2. Select one or more chains to replace the original chains. 1. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. you will be able to select edges only. Solids mgr. Solids mgr. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. then choose Rechain. then choose Done. then choose Delete Chain. Mastercam returns you to the Solids Manager dialog box and marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Solids. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. select unhighlighted edges. Solids. Select one or more chains to replace the selected chain. Choose Main Menu. ¨ To rechain all of the chains. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. faces. Choose Main Menu. Editing geometry for Chamfer operations You can edit the edges that define a chamfer operation. select highlighted edges. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Note: If the fillet operation is defined as a variable radius fillet. or the whole solid. then choose Done. then double-click on Geometry. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. 3. then choose Add Chain. 5. Mastercam maintains your original selection of edges. faces. right-click anywhere in the dialog box. To remove filleting from edges.

Solids mgr. opens the selected faces to form entry holes into the solid. or the whole solid. 5. ¨ Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. Mastercam cancels your original geometry selection. or the whole solid. then double-click on Geometry. faces. 2. Redefine the shell operation by selecting new faces and/or the whole solid. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. select highlighted edges. Note: If the chamfer operation is defined using two distances or a distance and angle. Solids. Note: Your selections are restricted to the solid on which the selected shell operation was originally defined. If you select a whole solid body and no individual faces. 4. select unhighlighted edges. 3. Take one or both of the following actions: ¨ ¨ To chamfer additional edges. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box. Expand the list of components for the Shell operation you want to edit. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. not the whole solid. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box. 5. faces. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. 3. 1. and thickens the solid’s faces to form the solid’s shell. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. then double-click on Geometry. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. Editing geometry for Shell operations You can reselect the geometry that defines a shell operation. Choose Main Menu. faces. you will be able to select edges and faces only. 4. To remove chamfering from edges. Editing geometry for Trim operations 231 . Note: Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. the system hollows the solid.2. Mastercam maintains your original selection of edges. Notes: ¨ If you select individual faces on a solid. which leaves a void. and thickens the remaining faces to form the solid’s shell. or the whole solid. the system removes the material from the interior of the solid. Expand the list of components for the Chamfer operation you want to edit.

1. ¨ To trim the solid to a surface. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box. Mastercam renders the trim operation invalid. Choose Main Menu. 2. Expand the list of components for the Trim operation you want to edit. choose Surface. then select a trimming surface in the graphics window. 3. then use the Define Plane menu to define a trimming plane. Note: You can recreate trimmed parts as bricks at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. Notes: ¨ The trimming plane or surface must fully intersect the solid in order to trim it. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Solids. If you delete. 232 . the edges and faces that are created as a result of the trim operation are associated with the surface. Choose Main Menu. The remaining solid (on the side with the direction arrow) maintains the history. Solids mgr. 6. set Keep All to N. Solids mgr. To remove trimmed parts from the drawing. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Trim Solids menu. Take one of the following actions to redefine the Trim operation: ¨ To trim the solid to a plane. set Keep All to Y. choose Plane. 1. ¨ When trimmed parts are kept in a drawing.You can redefine the trimming geometry and direction of a Trim operation. then select an open sheet body in the graphics window. 4. ¨ If the solid is trimmed to a surface. move. or in any other way change the trimming surface so that it no longer fully intersects the solid. To keep trimmed parts as bricks. choose Sheet. to reverse the trimming direction. the resulting disjoint pieces are represented as brick solids with no history. This arrow points to the side of the surface on which the solids will not be trimmed and which retain the history. ¨ To trim the solid to a sheet. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Solids. ¨ You can trim a solid to multiple surfaces by first stitching those surfaces into an open sheet body and then trimming to a sheet. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on a plane marker or surface in the graphics window. Choose Flip. 5. if necessary. then double-click on Geometry. Editing geometry for Thicken operations You can redefine the thickening direction of a Thicken operation.

Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box. Click on the topics below for more information. Note: Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. The original reference face has been cancelled. select unhighlighted faces. Editing geometry for a Draft Face operation that was defined using a reference face For Draft Face operations defined using a reference face (Draft to Face option on the Draft Face Parameters dialog box). Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Choose Main Menu. the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted. then double-click on Geometry – Faces. Solids mgr. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. select highlighted faces. 2. To remove draft from faces. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. 3. you can edit the drafted faces and the reference face. 2. Choose Main Menu. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. Choose Flip. to reverse the thickening direction. Select a new planar reference face. Expand the list of components for the Thicken operation you want to edit. 5. Editing geometry for Draft Face operations The editable geometry components for a Draft Face operation vary depending on how the operation was defined. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager. This arrow points to the side of the solid which is thickened. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. then double-click on Geometry. Expand the list of components for the Draft Face operation you want to edit. Solids. 3. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on the solid in the graphics window.2. Solids mgr. To edit drafted faces 1. To edit the reference face 1. 3. This face must have an intersection with the face(s) being drafted. Steps for editing each of these components are given below. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Sheet Thickening Direction menu. Take one or both of the following actions: ¨ ¨ 4. if necessary. Solids. Note: When you select multiple faces to draft. To draft additional faces. then double-click on Geometry – Plane Face. Expand the list of components for the Draft Face operation you want to edit. Mastercam highlights the solid faces that are currently drafted for the selected operation. 233 . 4.

Expand the list of components for the Draft Face operation you want to edit. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Solids mgr. 234 . If needed. Define a new reference plane.4. 5. Mastercam displays a cone-shaped graphic and arrow on the reference face to indicate the draft direction and how the inward/outward nature of the draft angle relates to the direction. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Define Plane menu. 2. Expand the list of components for the Draft Face operation you want to edit. Solids. Solids mgr. Note: The reference face that you select in step 3 is associated with the Draft Face operation being edited. Choose Main Menu. Solids. 4. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager. The original reference plane has been cancelled. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. then double-click on Geometry – Faces. Choose Main Menu. choose Reverse it to flip the draft direction. the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted. 2. select unhighlighted faces. This plane must have an intersection with the face(s) being drafted. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. To remove draft from faces. Note: When you select multiple faces to draft. To edit the reference plane 1. Mastercam displays a cone-shaped graphic and arrow on the reference plane to indicate the draft direction and how the inward/outward nature of the draft angle relates to the direction. you can edit the drafted faces and the reference plane. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Take one or both of the following actions: ¨ ¨ 4. select highlighted faces. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. then choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box. Steps for editing each of these components are given below. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. To draft additional faces. 3. If needed. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Changes that you make to the solid to alter the position or orientation of the reference face are reflected in the associated operation. choose Reverse it to flip the draft direction. Editing geometry for a Draft Face operation that was defined using a reference plane For Draft Face operations defined using a reference plane (Draft to Plane option on the Draft Face Parameters dialog box). Mastercam highlights the solid faces that are currently drafted for the selected operation. 5. Note: Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. 3. To edit drafted faces 1. then double-click on Geometry – Plane. then choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box.

When you finish selecting edges for the last face. 2. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Choose Main Menu. Changes that you make to the solid to alter the position or orientation of the reference face are reflected in the associated operation. then choose Done. you can edit the drafted faces and the reference edges. 3. such as with a dovetail shape.5. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. 5. Mastercam reopens the Solids Manager dialog box. To draft additional faces. the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted. Expand the list of components for the Draft Face operation you want to edit. To remove draft from faces. Note: The reference plane that you define in step 3 is associated with the Draft Face operation being edited. Note: Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. Solids mgr. Take one or both of the following actions: ¨ ¨ 4. Mastercam highlights the solid faces that are currently drafted for the selected operation. ¨ The reference edges that you select in steps 5 and 6 are associated with the Draft Face operation being edited. Editing geometry for a Draft Face operation that was defined using reference edges For Draft Face operations defined using reference edges (Draft to Edge option on the Draft Face Parameters dialog box). The Solids Manager dialog box opens. then double-click on Geometry – Faces. Mastercam attempts to break the original face into multiple drafted faces. Solids. 235 . select highlighted faces. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. To edit drafted faces 1. 6. a separate face corresponding to each reference edge. Changes that you make to the solid to alter the position or orientation of the reference face are reflected in the associated operation. Repeat step 5 for each additional face. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Steps for editing each of these components are given below. Select one or more reference edges on the face that is currently highlighted in the graphics window. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. 7. The reference edges define the hinge points for the drafted face. select unhighlighted faces. Choose Done. Notes: ¨ When you select multiple faces to draft. ¨ When multiple edges are selected for a face. This application of this draft method has limited uses and fails if the edges overlap or turn back on themselves when looked at in the draft direction. Mastercam cycles to the next face if more than one face was selected in step 3.

If needed. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Note: Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. Note: The linear edge or planar face that you select in step 3 is associated with the Draft Face operation being edited. 3. 3. Solids. Editing geometry for a Draft Face operation that was defined using an existing Extrude operation For Draft Face operations defined using an existing Extrude operation (Draft Extrude option on the Draft Face Parameters dialog box). Solids mgr. Mastercam displays a cone-shaped graphic and arrow along the edge or on the face to indicate the draft direction and how the inward/outward nature of the draft angle relates to the direction. 4. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. Changes that you make to the solid to alter the position or orientation of the reference face are reflected in the associated operation. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Note: When you select multiple faces to draft. To edit drafted faces 1. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. 5. Choose Main Menu. Expand the list of components for the Draft Face operation you want to edit. Define a new draft direction by selecting a linear edge or planar face. 2. Mastercam highlights the solid faces that are currently drafted for the selected operation. Note: All of the faces that you select must be lateral faces (walls) swept out from the extrude operation.To edit the reference plane 1. select highlighted faces. choose Reverse it to flip the draft direction. the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted. Take one or both of the following actions: ¨ ¨ To draft additional faces. select unhighlighted faces. 5. 236 . Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. 2. you can edit the drafted faces. then double-click on Geometry – Direction. then double-click on Geometry. Choose Main Menu. Expand the list of components for the Draft Face operation you want to edit. then choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box. The geometry that defined the original direction has been cancelled. Solids. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Solids mgr. 4. To remove draft from faces.

you can also tell Mastercam whether or not to combine appropriate operations by combining selected chains (for holes) or edges (for fillets) into a single operation. see the related topics below. then choose Highlight. Choose Main Menu. on imported bricks or other solid bodies whose base operation in the history is "Body. Mastercam uses the color red to highlight the wireframe geometry of the faces associated with the selected operation. you can also tell Mastercam whether to remove detected instances of the feature or to recreate the operations and any associated geometry needed to reconstruct the detected instances of the feature. Highlighting solid operations automatically The auto-highlight feature is an on/off toggle. Unlike manual highlighting. 2. Removing features is useful when you need to create toolpaths that precede or ignore the features. 1. Auto-highlighting is turned on when there is a check mark next to the Auto-Highlight option and off when there is no check mark next to the option. Highlighting solid operations manually Manual highlighting is used to identify the geometry associated with a selected solid operation. 1. When you create operations. Mastercam uses the color red to highlight the wireframe geometry of the faces associated with the operation that’s currently selected in the Solids Manager. You can highlight operations automatically or manually. Mastercam uses the color red to highlight the wireframe geometry of the faces associated with the selected operation. Right-click anywhere in the operation list. For information on turning off autohighlighting. Solids. the highlighting lasts for only a couple of seconds then disappears. Note: The Highlight option is grayed out if auto-highlighting is active. When it’s on. Note: When the auto-highlight feature is off. Right-click to select an operation. It can be used only when auto-highlighting is turned off. When you select a feature to detect. 2. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Choose Main Menu. where they can be modified using the Solids Manager. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. such as holes and fillets. choose Auto-Highlight. the geometry remains highlighted until you select a different operation or close the Solids Manager dialog box. Finding solid features The Find Features function lets you find specified features. highlighting is disabled. but you can still highlight selected operations manually.Highlighting solid operations Highlighting is used to identify the geometry associated with an operation.". Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. To change the status of the auto-highlight feature. Click on the topics below for more information. 3. Creating solid operations adds them to the solid’s history tree. Note: Highlighting an operation is a useful way to check and be sure you have selected the correct operation before editing it. Mastercam highlights the corresponding geometry in the graphics window. 237 . Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. see the related topics below. For more information. Solids. Unlike auto-highlighting.

and this step is unnecessary. 2. removing. choose Remove features. 4. where possible: ¨ ¨ 7. select Combine operations. Indicate the type of function to perform: To recreate detected fillets as operations. then choose Done. 3. To remove detected fillets from the solid body. Only fillets whose radius falls within a specified range are detected. Boolean. remove. When finding and recreating holes in a single face. indicate whether or not to combine operations. and creating holes on a solid body The Find Features function lets you detect. To fillet similar edges as one operation. 5.When operating on a brick. Only holes whose radius falls within a specified range are detected. and create constant-radius fillets on brick solids. Mastercam recognizes the contours of the face the hole cuts through. or trim operations. Next menu. Find features. Solids. Choose Main Menu. Finding. Mastercam will try to extend one face and cap the hole in a single plane. 6. invalid. Mastercam selects it automatically. If Mastercam cannot recreate the hole. Select one or more solids in the graphics window. 238 . choose Fillets. the operation fails. The Find Features function only recognizes features on imported brick solids or on brick solids created in Mastercam from stitching. and creating fillets on a solid body The Find Features function lets you detect. The Find Features function will not recognize solid bodies with dirty. the Find Features function modifies the solid by removing features and adding operations to its history. Choose OK to perform the function. To specify the size of fillet to detect. removing. accept or change the values in the Minimum Radius and Maximum Radius text boxes. 1. If you chose to create operations in step 4. Combining operations fillets similar edges as one operation in history. remove. or suppressed operations. clear Combine operations. To recreate each fillet as a separate operation. and create through holes and blind holes (pass through solid in one direction) on brick solids. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window. Finding. The Find Features dialog box opens. Combining operations aggregates multiple chains into one extrude cut operation. choose Create operations. while maintaining the modified brick as a solid body at the top of the history tree. ¨ ¨ Under Feature. If a hole cuts through multiple faces.

clear Include blind holes. where possible: ¨ To combine operations on multiple chains into one extrude cut operation. accept or change the values in the Minimum Radius and Maximum Radius text boxes. To recreate each hole as a single-chain extrude cut operation. If you chose to create operations in step 4. Select one or more solids in the graphics window. To specify the size of hole to detect. 8. ¨ Level: Type the number of the level that you want to assign. To remove detected holes from the solid body. ¨ Color: Type the number of the color that you want to assign. select Include blind holes. 5. ¨ 7. as follows: ¨ Offset: Type the value of the offset—the distance of the new geometry from the outermost point on the adjacent solid—you wish to use. The Find Features dialog box opens. clear Combine operations. If you selected Holes in step 3 and Create Operations in step 4. If you chose to find holes in step 3. select Combine operations. Mastercam selects it automatically. indicate whether or not to include blind holes: ¨ To detect blind holes (pass through solid in one direction only) as well as thru holes (pass completely through solid). Width: Select a line thickness from the drop-down list. Choose Main Menu. 4. ¨ ¨ Under Feature. or choose Select to select a level using the Level dialog box. Solids. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window. 6. Next menu. Indicate the type of function to perform: To recreate detected holes as extrude cut operations. indicate whether or not to combine operations. Find features. 239 . Choose New Geometry Attributes to change one or more attributes. ¨ To exclude blind holes and detect only thru holes. then choose Done. 2. or choose Color to select a color from the Color dialog box. and this step is unnecessary. choose Create operations. choose Holes. 3. choose Remove features. ¨ ¨ Style: Select a line pattern from the drop-down list.1. you can change default attributes of new geometry created to reconstruct detected holes.

Checking solids from the Solids Manager 1. 2. Choose Main Menu. If errors are detected. This function is particularly useful for analyzing the integrity of imported solids and identifying entities that you may need to repair or reconstruct. 4. Notes on managing error display When errors are listed in the Check Solid dialog box: ¨ ¨ Select a listed error to highlight its location in the graphics window. Select a solid in the list. Choose OK to perform the function. This function identifies and describes specific errors and highlights their location in the solid drawing. then choose Check Solid. If no errors are detected. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Choose Main Menu. 2. Choose Check Solid. Choose Perform Check. 3. 240 . Only. Solids. If no errors are detected. You can access the Check Solids function from the Analyze Surfaces menu. Checking solid models for errors The Check Solid function analyzes solids for error conditions that may pose problems in solid modeling operations. Select a solid entity in the graphics window. the Check Solid dialog box displays and lists up to ten errors. 3. If errors are detected. Analyze. Analyze. from the Analyze Solid dialog box. Right-click on the selected solid. with file formats in which healing during import is supported. For example. Solids. If no errors are detected. a confirming message displays. the Check Solid dialog box displays and lists up to ten errors.9. On the Analyze Entity menu. Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. Checking solids from the Analyze Solid dialog box 1. Check Solid. Surfaces. make sure Edit is set to Y. 2. you may want to reimport the file with this feature turned on. The Analyze Solid dialog box displays. which can be subsequently stitched using the From Surfaces function. 3. or from the Solids Manager. Choose Zoom to selected item to magnify the selected error in the graphics window. If errors are detected. Or you may use the Remove Faces function to remove faces having problems identified by the Check Solid function in order to reconstruct new surfaces. a confirming message displays. Choose Main Menu. The Check Solid dialog box displays. Checking solids from the Analyze Surfaces menu 1. a confirming message displays. the Check Solid dialog box redisplays and lists up to ten errors. Select a solid entity in the graphics window.

420 x 594 mm A1 .34 x 44 in. side. You can use this function multiple times. Scale factor You can have Mastercam automatically scale each view by the percentage you enter here. such as title blocks on the bottom or sides. not 75%.¨ Choose Unzoom to return the graphics window to the original display scale.11 x 17 in.5 x 11 in. so you can easily keep them separate from your original part. each time you create a new layout. you can customize it further. If you wish. A4 . B . C . you can change the scale later from the Solid Drawing Layout menu.210 x 297 mm A3 . to the layout. 241 .MC9 file in the MC9\TITLE BLOCKS sub-directory. arranged within a standard page. The border design should be stored in the SHEETAS. E . Mastercam automatically places the new drawings on their own level.8.22 x 34 in. Load border template Select this option to add a border design. Use a scale of less than 1 if all the drawings won't fit on the page size you have selected.17 x 22 in. D . top. Once you create the basic layout from this dialog box. for the same solid or for different ones. Choose any of the following to learn about the different dialog box options: Paper size Select any of the following paper sizes: English Metric A . front. edit this file. To change the border design. Suppress hidden lines Select this option if you do not want hidden lines to show.841 x 1189 mm You can also select Custom and type in your own dimensions.75. you can reset Maximum number of errors to a higher value (default is 10) and choose Perform Check see if there are more detectable errors. If you leave this box blank.297 x 420 mm A2 . You can change this later from the Solid Drawing Layout menu. Mastercam will just draw a plain solid line matching the paper dimensions. make sure you select a new level for it (unless you want to replace an existing layout).594 x 841 mm A0 . Solid Drawing Layout Use the Solid Drawing Layout function to create a layout of different part views (for example. ¨ If ten errors are listed. and isometric). use . Enter numbers as decimals: for example.

Front. 242 . you will have multiple views of your part laid out within a standard size page. The Solid Drawing Layout dialog box opens. Enter a scaling factor for the different views. 4. and Isometric views. 1. When you finish. Choose from the following: 1 – Top 5 . Creating a drawing layout Example Follow these steps to create a drawing layout. Left. To see hidden lines. You can change this setting later. Next menu. Front. Indicate whether or not to apply a page border. Front. Right. 7. Type up to 4 numbered views (separated by commas) in the text box. Select a paper size.Layout view selection Choose from four standard layouts: ¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ 4View DIN includes Bottom. Front. you can select those as well. Choose Main Menu. Indicate whether or not to display hidden lines in the solid drawing layout (you can change this setting later): ¨ ¨ If you do not want to see hidden lines. Choose a paper orientation: Portrait (tall) or Landscape (wide). select Suppress hidden lines. Note: The Solid Drawing Layout function works on only one solid at a time. and Isometric views. and Left views. 6.Right Side 2 – Front 6 – Left Side 3 – Back 7 – Isometric 4 – Bottom 8 – Axonometric If you have created any custom graphics views in this file. 5. 2. 3. and Right views. 3View ANSI includes Top. The value you type in here will be applied to each of the views. Solids. Layout. Choose a layout view format. Or choose User defined to create your own layout. clear Suppress hidden lines. 4View ANSI includes Top. 3View DIN includes Bottom.

(You can still use the regular Mastercam drafting and design tools. 12. or press [Esc]. 9. Find the level that contains the part. Note: All of the entities in the drawing layout will be placed on this level. you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu again to edit this layout. Screen tab). Mastercam prompts you to enter a level in the prompt area. 11. you are prompted to choose one. Note: If Enter level in prompt area is selected in your screen configuration settings (choose Main Menu. 10. Choose OK (or press [Enter] after each prompt area entry). choose Main Menu or Backup. The Solid Drawing Layout menu appears in the menu area. Choose OK. Important: Once you exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment. the layout is created. To exit Solid Drawing Layout. Level and select the layout level in the Levels dialog box. if desired.) Tip: To hide your original part. Configure. Screen. and click the red check mark next to it so that the level does not display. then choose All. The Levels dialog box opens.8. choose Level. Make sure you select a level that doesn’t already contain part information or geometry (any entities on the level will be deleted). You can also press [Alt+E] to display the Hide menu. a plate with a pocket and four mounting holes: BEFORE 243 . Example: Creating a drawing layout Step-by-Step Choose the Before button to see the sample part. instead of opening the Levels dialog box. When you click on it. If your drawing contains more than one solid. This menu will be active until you choose Main Menu or Backup. a name. You can use it to customize or enhance your drawing layout. Type a level number and.

you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu again to edit the current drawing layout.Choose the After button to see the drawing layout produced by the Solid Drawing Layout function. You can see the original part in the lower corner. the Solid Drawing Layout menu displays. (If you choose the Solid Drawing Layout function again. This menu gives you options for customizing a layout drawing. If another Mastercam function displays a different menu. you can still use the toolbar or the Secondary Menu to access other Mastercam functions. you can return to this menu by choosing Backup until it reappears. Choosing Backup or Main Menu. or pressing [Esc]. and the Gview automatically changes to Top. while this menu is active will cause you to exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment. Once you exit.) 244 . you will create a new drawing layout. and all Solid Drawing Layout menu commands will apply to it. After Customizing the drawing layout Immediately after you create a drawing layout. While this menu is active. Click here to see the settings that were used in the Solid Drawing Layout dialog box. The lower-left corner of the paper boundary is automatically placed at X0Y0.

or removes a view. you will create a new drawing layout. Scale : Changes the scale of one or more views. or pressing [Esc]. you can return to this menu by choosing Backup until it reappears. where you can recreate the drawing layout. and all Solid Drawing Layout menu commands will apply to it. Once you exit. (If you choose the Solid Drawing Layout function again. Chg view : Changes the orientation of a view (for example. Pan : Moves a view from one point to another. the Solid Drawing Layout menu displays. Allign : Aligns a view along a vertical or horizontal axis. Front to Side). where you can change how hidden lines are displayed for one or more of the views. however. using the same setting as the current layout. Add/Remove : Creates and adds defined. you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu again to edit the current drawing layout. while this menu is active will cause you to exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment.Solid : Creates a new drawing layout for a different solid. Note: After you use this command. You may. custom detail. you can still use the toolbar or the Secondary Menu to access other Mastercam functions. section. 245 . Hidden Lines : Displays the Hidden Lines menu. Reset : Opens the Solid Drawing Layout dialog box. If another Mastercam function displays a different menu. This menu gives you options for customizing a layout drawing. place the new layout on a different level.) Changing the hidden lines display Choosing the Hidden Lines option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you fine-tune how hidden lines are displayed on your drawing layout. other Solid Drawing Layout menu functions will apply only to the new drawing layout and not to a previous one. or cross-section views. Rotation is measured counter clockwise. While this menu is active. using current or new settings. Rotate : Rotates the selected view. or detail by an angle you specify. Choosing Backup or Main Menu. Customizing the drawing layout Immediately after you create a drawing layout. Paper Size : Changes the paper size.

type the letter code for the desired paper size or type Custom to enter your own dimensions. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. choose Scale. or choose Main Menu to exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment completely. The Scale menu displays. press [Enter] after each entry. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. The new page will still have its lower-left corner at X0Y0. The individual views will be redistributed evenly in the new page. 2. Specify a scaling option: 246 . 1. If you typed Custom. you will be prompted to enter an X and Y dimension. Then press [Enter]. or choose Main Menu to exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment completely. choose Hidden lines. In the prompt area. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. 2. You will be prompted to select a view in the graphics window. ¨ ¨ Choose Toggle all to reverse the settings for all of the drawings. you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu again to edit this layout.) Changing the scale Choosing the Scale option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you select a different scale for one or more views in the drawing layout. 1.1. Choose Backup or press [Esc] to return to the Solid Drawing Layout menu. Choose Backup or press [Esc] to return to the Solid Drawing Layout menu. Choose one of the Hidden Line options: ¨ Choose One view to toggle the hidden lines display for a single view. The Hidden Lines menu displays. 3.) Changing the paper size Choosing the Paper Size option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you select a new paper size for the drawing layout. (You can still use the regular Mastercam drafting and design tools. Important: Once you exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment. Important: Once you exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment. 3. (You can still use the regular Mastercam drafting and design tools. you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu again to edit this layout. choose Paper size. 2. Choose Hide all or Show all to hide or show all hidden lines for all of the drawings in the layout.

¨ ¨ Use the Pan feature to move a single drawing to a desired point. Changing the orientation of a view Choosing the Chg View option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you change the orientation of one of the views. or choose Main Menu to exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment completely. Enter numbers as decimals: for example. choose Chg view.¨ Choose Scale one to change the scale for a single view. Choose Backup or press [Esc] to return to the Solid Drawing Layout menu.) The scaled views are positioned at the center point of the original views. 247 . you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu again to edit this layout. type the number of the new view and press [Enter]. You need to select one point in a view. For example. if you change the scale once to . Important: Once you exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment. not 75%. 4. Choose Backup or press [Esc] to return to the Solid Drawing Layout menu. the drawings will go back to their original size. 2. Important: Once you exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment. Enter a scale amount in the prompt area and press [Enter]. When prompted. (You can still use the regular Mastercam drafting and design tools.75. In the prompt area.75. 1. ¨ Choose Scale all to change the scale for all the views. 4. (You can still use the regular Mastercam drafting and design tools. Use the Align feature to align the drawings with each other. use . click on any point in the desired view. or choose Main Menu to exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment completely. and the entire view will move with it. and then change it again and enter 1. Use the same Gview numbers as for custom layout selection. Select one of the views by clicking on any of its points or entities. Note: The scale amount is always relative to the original size. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu.) Moving a view Choosing the Pan option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you drag a single view to a new location. Note: This command also works on cross-sections and detail views. you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu again to edit this layout. either horizontally or vertically. 3. 3.

3. You can choose this point in two ways: ¨ ¨ Drag the mouse to a new point anywhere in the graphics window. choose Pan. you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu again to edit this layout. The Point Entry menu displays. The Point Entry menu displays. 1. Use the mouse to sketch a point. 4. (You can still use the regular Mastercam drafting and design tools. Enter a rotation angle in the prompt area and press [Enter]. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. or use the Point Entry menu to access additional point selection options. 248 . From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. 4. Select a reference point. Aligning views Choosing the Align option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you line up a view along a vertical or horizontal axis. Mastercam displays intersecting horizontal and vertical axes that indicate where the selected views will line up. Click anywhere on the desired view to select it. choose Align. 2. 2. Important: Once you exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment. you may use the mouse to sketch a point. 2. Choose a destination point. On any view. the rotation will be measured counter-clockwise. Use positive numbers only.1. Note: In this step and the next. Note: This command also works on cross-section and detail views.) Rotating a view Choosing the Rotate option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you rotate a view around its center point. Use the Pan or Align features to re-position the rotated drawing in line with the others. or use the Point Entry menu to access additional point selection options. and click at the desired point. Choose Backup or press [Esc] to return to the Solid Drawing Layout menu. select a reference point to move from. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. 3. choose Rotate. The reference point you selected in step 2 will move here. or choose Main Menu to exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment completely. 1. Use the Point Entry menu to choose a point. anywhere in the graphics window.

On any view outside the selected reference point. Remove : Removes an entire view. Click on the menu and topics below for more information. the Add/Remove menu displays. Choose Backup or press [Esc] to return to the Solid Drawing Layout menu. or choose Main Menu to exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment completely. Important: Once you exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment. cross-section. When you choose Add/Remove. Add Details : Creates detail drawings that zoom in on small sections of a part. (You can still use the regular Mastercam drafting and design tools.) Resetting a drawing layout Choosing the Reset option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu displays the original Solid Drawing Layout dialog box and lets you replace the current drawing layout with a new one based on the selections you make. Mastercam is smart enough to figure out whether it should align the view to the horizontal or vertical axis. You can add as many new elements as you wish. you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu again to edit this layout. or detail drawing. Add Section : Adds a cross-section view to the drawing layout. choose the point that you want to align to one of the axes. a zigzag cross-section. You can add any or all of the following views: ¨ ¨ ¨ Currently defined graphics views Cross-section views of various orientations Detail views When you use this menu option. Add View : Adds a currently defined graphics view to the drawing layout. you are no longer limited to four views. or a 3D plane.3. 4. 249 . You can define a cross-section based on a straight horizontal or vertical line through any point in the part. Adding and removing views Choosing the Add/Remove option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you create and add new views to your layout or remove existing views from your layout.

3. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. Add View. Click anywhere on a view to remove it completely. or use the Point Entry menu to access additional point selection options. Creating and adding detail views Example Use the Add Detail option to zoom in on a section of a view and add a detail drawing to the layout. In the prompt area. ¨ ¨ 3. choose Add/Remove. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. choose Add/Remove. you can use the Pan or Align features to fine-tune the layout. section or detail that has been added. 3. Note: Use the same Gview numbers as the custom layout selection.Adding defined views Use the Add View option to add a currently defined graphics view to the drawing layout. The Parameters dialog box opens. 2. Select the location for the new view. The Detail Type dialog box opens. 2. Important: You cannot use Mastercam’s Undo function to reverse this operation. 2. choose Add/Remove. type the number of the new view and press [Enter]. Choose OK when prompted to confirm the selection. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. Select the type of detail view to create: Circle Rectangle Choose OK. Select a color and scale factor for the new view and choose OK. 250 . Use it to delete any of the original views or a view. Remove. 5. Removing views Use the Remove option to delete all of the entities associated with a particular view. 1. You may use the mouse to sketch a point. 1. Note: The point you select will be the center of the new view. Once you have added the new view. Add Detail. The Point Entry menu displays. 1. 4.

Select the location for the new view. 251 . the point you select will be the center of the detail drawing. The Point Entry menu displays 7. 8. Example: Adding a detail view Step-by-Step Choose the Before button to see part of a sample drawing layout. For a Rectangle detail. Drag the mouse to define the zoom area and click when you are done. The example uses a scale of 2X. You may use the mouse to sketch a point. This example shows a Circle detail. The Parameters dialog box opens. Select the point you want to zoom in on. The focus of the detail is the bolt hole indicated by the white circle: BEFORE Choose the After button to see the detail view created by the Solid Drawing Layout function. or use the Point Entry menu to access additional point selection options. or use the Point Entry menu to access additional point selection options. which became the center of the detail area. or use the Point Entry menu to choose a boundary point. 6.. the point will be one of the corners. The selected point is on the rim of the bolt hole. Use the Pan or Align features to fine-tune the layout. You may use the mouse to sketch a point.4. Select a color and scale factor for the section view and choose OK. Note: The point you select will be the center of the new view. and a different color for clarity’s sake. Note: For a Circle detail. 5.

The Section Type dialog box opens. 252 . From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. Select an orientation for your cross-section: Straight cross-sections ¨ Horizontal The section is based on a horizontal line through the part at a point you select. the cross-section is based on the line through these points.AFTER Creating and adding section views Examples Use the Add Section option to define a cross-section view and add a drawing of it to your layout. choose Add/Remove. 2. Add Section. 1. ¨ 2 points You are prompted to select two points on a view. ¨ Vertical The section is based on a vertical line through the part at a point you select.

unlike other cross-section methods. the second indicates where it ends. the second indicates where it ends. Use a scale of less than 1 if all the drawings won't fit on the page size you have selected. using the Define Plane menu and entering additional information or points. You may use the mouse to sketch a point. Depending on your selection in step 2. Use the Pan or Align features to fine-tune the layout. The first point of the pair indicates where a segment begins. 3. the plane is set with respect to the solid itself rather than the graphics window. Note that. The white circle shows the point that will be the basis for the cross-section. Mastercam automatically draws the connecting lines for you. You can have as many segments as you wish. Mastercam automatically draws the connecting lines for you. The Parameters dialog box opens. use . Choose OK. The color will apply to all entities created as a result of this operation) and scale factor ( You can have Mastercam automatically scale each view by the percentage you enter here. 253 . The first point of the pair indicates where a segment begins. Enter numbers as decimals: for example. To select a plane. 6. Note: To select a point. ¨ Vertical You will be prompted to select several pairs of points. 4. use the mouse to sketch a point.Zigzag cross-sections ¨ Horizontal You will be prompted to select several pairs of points. 7. Select the point (or points) or plane where you want the section to divide the part. Example: Adding a cross-section view Step-by-Step Choose the Before button to see a sample drawing layout. the Point Entry or Define Plane menu displays. 5.. as prompted.75. You can have as many segments as you wish. Select the location for the new view. you can change the scale later from the Solid Drawing Layout menu. or use the Point Entry menu to access additional point selection options. as prompted. Each pair of points defines a horizontal segment of a cross-section. ¨ 3D Plane You are prompted to define a cross-section plane. The Point Entry menu displays. Select a color (Use this option to choose a color that will apply to just this operation. not 75%) If you wish. Each pair of points defines a vertical segment of a cross-section. for the section view and choose OK. Note: The point you select will be the center of the new view. use the Define Plane menu and enter additional information or points. or use the Point Entry menu to access additional point selection options.

You can see on the Top view where Mastercam drew an extra line to indicate the precise location and orientation of the section. the Align feature was used to line it up with the other views. a corresponding line appears in the Side view at lower right. based on the point shown above. A Horizontal line cross-section was selected. 254 . a different color was specified.Choose the After button to see the cross-section view that has been added. In addition. After adding the section view.

Mastercam adds the lines showing the precise location of the cross section. This example shows how to create a crosssection that cuts through the boss and pocket on the upper-left of the part. The left-most white circle shows the start of the first segment. In the Top view. Mastercam automatically draws a bounding box around the cross-section.Example: Adding a zigzag cross-section view Step-by-Step Choose the Before button to see a sample drawing layout. then drops down to the lower-right bolt hole. then drops down to cut through one of the bolt holes. After adding the section view. Choose the After button to see the cross-section view that has been added. the Align feature was used to line it up with the other views. 255 . It continues to near the "X".

25.Example: Adding a 3D-Plane cross-section view Step-by-Step This example shows a cross-section created by defining a plane. X=1. Choose the Before button to see a sample drawing layout. which cuts the cross-section through the YZ plane at whatever X value is specified. Choose the Step 1 button to see the cross-section view that has been created. This example replaces the side view on the lower right with a cross-section through the boss and pocket. 256 . The white circle shows the approximate starting point of the cross-section. in this example. which is about where the starting point is in the Before drawing. The cross-section is based on an X=const plane.

the Align feature is used to line it up with the front view. then the Pan command is used to move the new section view to that location. The Remove command is used to delete the lower-right view. Finally.Choose the After button to see how the original side view is replaced by the new cross-section. 257 .

You're Reading a Free Preview

Descarga
scribd
/*********** DO NOT ALTER ANYTHING BELOW THIS LINE ! ************/ var s_code=s.t();if(s_code)document.write(s_code)//-->